Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
AT
AEB-740-08
REV.00
DECEMBER 2013
REV.
DATE
ISSUE PARTICULARS
AEB-740-08
REV.00
AEB-740-08
REV.00
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 19
Section 20
Drainage Installation
1. General
2. System Network
Section 21
Electrical Installation
1. General
2. Electrical Supply and Distribution
Section 22
Section 23
AEB-740-08
REV.00
SECTION 19
PLUMBING, SNG &
IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
SL NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
19.1.00
PLUMBING GENERAL
19.1.01
Site
19.1.02
Site Conditions
19.1.03
Definitions
19.1.04
Scope of Works
19.1.05
19.1.06
Programme
19.1.07
Contract Drawings
19.1.08
Working Drawings
19.1.09
Co-ordination of Drawings
19.1.10
Material Submittals
19.1.11
Material Inspection
19.1.12
Alternative Materials
19.1.13
19.1.14
Safety
19.1.15
Contractors License
19.1.16
19.1.17
19.1.18
Protective Finishes
19.1.19
19.1.20
19.1.21
As Built Drawings
19.1.22
Period of Maintenance
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-1/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
19.2.00
PLUMBING MATERIALS
19.2.01
19.2.02
19.2.03
19.2.04
Pipe Sleeves
19.2.05
19.2.06
19.2.07
19.2.08
Trench Excavation
19.2.09
Pipework Insulation
19.2.10
19.2.11
19.2.12
19.2.13
19.2.14
19.2.15
19.2.16
19.2.17
19.2.18
19.2.19
19.2.20
SNG System
19.2.21
19.2.22
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-2/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.1.01
SECTION 19
SITE
19.1.02
SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials and Equipments shall be
capable of withstanding the following site conditions:
1. Maximum Ambient
Temperature
2. Altitude
Sea Level
95 %
5. Prevailing Wind
6. Storms
7. Annual Rainfall
19.1.03
DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:
Site
QCS
BS
CP
Tender Drawing
Working Drawings
As Built Drawings
Works
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-3/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Submitted
Accepted
Provide
Install
Furnish
Concealed
Exposed
19.1.04
SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, installation testing and
commissioning of the Plumbing materials, fixtures and equipment as per
specifications drafted in these sections and drawings. The contractor shall provide
complete installation of the project and other associated works such as supporting
structures, ancillary works etc. Brief descriptions of plumbing works are as follows:
1. Potable Cold water storage and distribution network.
2. Solar Hot water system
3. External services works as well as connection to infrastructure
19.1.05
The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition. The
contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and unskilled labours under the
supervision of competent Engineers to complete the works in accordance with the
programme.
The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with this
specification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities in the state of
Qatar Q.G.E.W.C (Water Division) and fire department and to the relevant B.S
specification.
i.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
The equipment shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes
of practice (current editions including all amendments) and QCS.
S-19-4/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
19.1.06
PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-5/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
19.1.07
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Plumbing tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general
arrangement required for the project.
These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractors
responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative
and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy
shall be brought to the attention of the consultant, in writing at the time of tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of draw offs, valves, and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with
these drawings.
19.1.08
WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:100 for plans, 1:10
for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultants approval.
The contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:
i.
Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.
ii.
iii.
iv. Levels, Center Lines of the pipework installations and the details of supports.
19.1.09
CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
and Drainage systems.
The Main contractor shall ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-6/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.1.10
SECTION 19
MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary
review and approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted in
the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.
In case of items involving aesthetic, sink taps, Showers, Draw offs etc., samples
must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Plumbing Materials & Equipments in the following
proforma to the consultant:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Submittal Number
Type of Material
Manufacturer / Local Agent
Date of Approval
Date of Order / Order Number
Mode of Delivery (Air, Land or Sea)
ETA on Site
Status as on date of Report
a. Equipment Supply
All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. Above).
In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the consultant specifically.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-7/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
c. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the
Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the
Consultants advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration shall be applicable, as the contractor is deemed
to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
19.1.11
MATERIAL INSPECTION
The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at
site which is not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.
Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or
the sample submitted shall also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor
shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant.
Any time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractors account.
The contractor shall have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client shall have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
Materials Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials
at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on
completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes
undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be strictly as
per QCS section 1-11, 1-12 & 1-13.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-8/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.1.12
SECTION 19
ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the
equipment or material for the Consultants consideration. Only in case if the specified
item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives
shall be considered by the Consultant, before the tender is accepted and the
Consultants decision shall be final regarding the matter.
In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same shall be confirmed
in writing by the Consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings shall be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time shall not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractors expenses etc.
19.1.13
The locations of Sink taps, showers, draw offs and their piping routes, etc., as
indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit
the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the
detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed architectural drawings and coordinated with furnishing and other services.
19.1.14
SAFETY
The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipment at
any point of time.
19.1.15
CONTRACTORS LICENSE
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman, and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary,
re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for
a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such
cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local
experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience shall be rejected by
the consultant.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-9/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.1.16
SECTION 19
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of
7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for
obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for
any connected works to others.
All statutory permits from Fire, Water, and Sewerage Department are secured by the
Consultant. The plumbing contractor shall however coordinate all inspection works
and liaise with the State departments regarding all pipework and payment of fees,
etc., when connecting city water mains connections to the mains. The contractor is
required to produce certificates of approval of all materials and equipment by the
relevant authorities when requested by the Consultant
The plumbing contractor shall coordinate connection works of water/sewer and fire to
the city mains with relevant local authorities of works.
19.1.17
Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used in
the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the
attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the
necessary instructions shall be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from
the Consultant, shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a as-new condition following
such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.
19.1.18
PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions. All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his
representative before shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the
specifications.
19.1.19
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-10/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which
the plant or work shall be ready for testing.
The Consultant shall signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates
in original to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.
19.1.20
The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals along with the softcopy indicating
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
19.1.21
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings, which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.
Three sets of hard copies drawings along with the softcopy shall be submitted after
approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.
19.1.22
PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Plumbing System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date, the Completion Certificate is issued, also where
longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or
materials such longer terms shall apply.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.
In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-11/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
19.2.00
MATERIALS
a) All pipe located at roof, shafts and risers, tanker filling pipes hot and cold
water pipes shall be Copper pipe to BS 2871 part 1-1971 Table X, fittings to
BSEN 1254-3 : 1998. All tubes and fittings shall be stamped with the British
Standard kitemark and copper alloy fittings shall carry a CR Mark.
b) Infrastruction tie-in connection External cold water supply pipes/fittings from
infrastructure tie in connection of 63 diameter HDPE pipe with 40 diameter water
meterage as indicated in infra for potable water and fire services dwg #
GQ626/3001/CP1- SHT.020 Rev 15. Exact location/pipe material of the house
connection from the main line up to the capped end one meter inside the plot
boundary including isolation valve shall be verified on site.
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope This section specifies high density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) and fittings
for water utility use as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified herein.
a. Furnish, Install, and Test HDPE pipe as indicated and specified in this
section, and as referred to in related sections, and as shown on the
drawings.
b. The means and methods, including the testing for acceptance shall conform
to all applicable standards as noted herein with the intention of providing a
leak-free system to the piping network.
1.02 REFERENCES
a. ANSI/AWWA C651
b. AWWA M55
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-12/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
c. PPI TR-34
d. ASTM F 714
e. ASTM F905
f.
ASTM F 1055
g. ASTM F 1290
h. ASTM F 2164
i.
ASTM F 2620
PART 2 HDPE FOR 3 INCH AND SMALLER PIPE PER AWWA C901
2.1 PIPE
A. Polyethylene pipe shall be made from a HDPE material having a minimum
material designation code of PE 4710 or PE 3608. The material shall meet
the requirements of ASTM D 3350 and shall have a minimum cell
classification of PE445474C for PE 4710 and PE345464C for PE 3608. In
addition, the pipe shall be listed as meeting NSF-61.
B. The pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C901
C. Approved manufacturers are: (As per Engrs approved material and/or as
per vendors list)
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Butt Fusion Fittings - Fittings shall be made of either PE4710 or PE 3608, with
a minimum Cell Classification as noted in 2A.01A. Butt Fusion Fittings shall
meet the requirements of ASTM D3261. Molded and fabricated fittings shall
have a pressure rating equal to the pipe unless otherwise specified in the plans.
B. Electrofusion Fittings - Fittings shall be PE4710 or PE 3608, with a minimum
Cell Classification as noted in 2A.01A.
Electrofusion Fittings shall have a
manufacturing standard of ASTM F1055. Fittings shall have a pressure rating
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-13/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
3.0 TESTING
A. Hydrostatic leakage testing is recommended and shall comply with ASTM F
2164, ASTM F 1412, AWWA Manual of Practice M55 Chapter 9, and PPI
Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe Chapter 2 (2nd Edition). If the test section fails
this test, the Contractor shall repair or replace all defective materials and/or
workmanship at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Pneumatic (compressed air) leakage testing of HDPE pressure piping is
prohibited for safety reasons.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-14/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
PIPING SPECIALITIES
A. Water Hammer arresters: Bellows type with stainless steel casing and bellows
pressure rated for 250 PSI tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH 201
B. Relief valves: Provide proper size for relief valves in accordance with ASME
Boiler and pressure vessel codes, for indicated capacity of the appliances for
which installed.
19.2.02
All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and due allowance made for thermal movement.
All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from one manufacturer only,
who shall be nominated by the contractor in writing and approved by the Consultant
prior to ordering any materials. Materials from different manufacturers shall not be
incorporated into the system. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be stored in
properly ventilated well-supported racked storage sheds.
All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance arranged to
or at right-angles to the structural member of the building, giving maximum
headroom and not obstructing window or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers,
projections and into recesses forming part of the structural works whether so
indicated on the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a
minimum of 50 mm clear below to the finished floor level and at least 25 mm clear to
the finished wall face.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-15/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The pipeworks, which are to be insulated, contractor shall allow space for each pipe
around its whole circumference. Adequate clearance shall be provided between
insulated pipework running together and adjacent to walls and floors. Clearances
between insulation and floor and insulation and wall shall be as for bare pipework.
No joints shall be formed in the thickness of walls, floor slabs or roof slabs. No
pipework shall be chased into floor slabs, roof slabs or walls. During the installation
period open ends of pipework shall be capped off using purpose-made plugs or
blank counterflanges. Pipework shall be kept free of dirt and other foreign debris at
all times.
All pipework fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipework in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.
All pipework shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.
All low points in the system shall have draincocks fitted and high points shall have air
bottles or automatic air vents.
19.2.03
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-16/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other
fittings requiring maintenance.
All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at centres
as detailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support, the
spacing shall be of a shorter interval.
All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unless
otherwise indicated, pipe hangers shall be spaced as follows.
a. 20 to 32mm Not over 2.4m apart b. 40 to 100mm Not over 3.0m apart c. Over 100mm Not over 3.6m apart -
10mm rods
15mm rods
22mm rods
Horizontal steel pipes on the roof shall be supported to prevent sagging or swinging.
The pipes supports spacing shall be as follows.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4m
3.0m
3.6m
4.5m
Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or
distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be
supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum
of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are
removed.
All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc. necessary for fastening of hangers shall be
furnished by the Contractor. Alll hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be
supported. Oversized hangers shall be permitted. Details of hangers and supports to
be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
fitting. All hangers shall be provided with locak-nuts and have provisio for vertical
adjustment of pipes.
Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trpeze type hangers of G.I
construction. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by the hangers
consisting of malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type
hangers or roller hangers where specified. Pipe standard with base flange and
adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipes supported form the floor. Vertical
piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel clamps securely bolted on the pipimg
with the end extention bearings on the building construction.
Piping shall be achored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue
strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and
shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design.
Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have tongue and groove design rubber
support inserts of approved make or high density insulation capable of withstanding
the compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal to
metal contact.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-17/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
All internal pipe supports, hangers and achors etc. are to be painted with two coats
of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of
enamel paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.
All external pipes supports including ground floor pump room and plant room at loft
area etc. shall be finally painted with two coats of enamel paint of grey colour or as
approved by the Engineer.
19.2.04
PIPE SLEEVES
Pipe sleeves shall be supplied where pipework passes through walls, floors, footings
and waterproofed membranes. Sleeves shall be built in the correct locations at the
time required by the main contractor. The inside diameter of all sleeves shall not be
less than 15 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through.
Where pipes pass through buried walls or footings, sleeves shall be 25 mm larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. The space between the pipe
sleeve shall be neatly packed using asbestos string or rope to prevent the passage
of noise, vermin or smoke. Sleeves shall not protrude beyond the finished surface.
Where pipework is exposed to view and passes through wall or floor, chromium
plated copper pipe flanges of the correct pipe diameter shall be fitted.
19.2.05
All valves and stopcocks shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of
Electricity and Water, Water Department and shall be dezinctification resistant.
Valves shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed below or similar
approved and shall conform to BS 5154 made of gun metal,non rising stem,screwed
bonnet,one piece wedge type and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure. All valves
shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval obtained in writing prior to ordering.
All valves shall be fitted in readily accessible positions. They shall be of even
thickness throughout, clean and smooth from scale. All stuffing boxes shall be
packed with material specially selected and recommended by the manufacturer for
the particular service in which each valve is used.
Non-return valves shall be screwed BSPT or flange BSEN 1092- 2 : 1997 in
accordance with the valve schedule in this specification. All non-return valves shall
be suitable for both vertical and horizontal mounting and shall be fitted in readily
accessible positions.
Shall be installed in discharge line of pumps and other locations directed by the
Engineer to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of gun metal,
swing pattern, metal to metal seats and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure
conforming to BS 5154.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-18/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.2.06
SECTION 19
All strainers shall be fitted in a readily accessible position and adequate access shall
be allowed for maintenance and cleaning of strainer basket. All strainers shall be
manufactured by specialists and have a stainless steel 80 mesh screen basket.
Automatic air vents shall be fitted at all high points in the system and other points
where necessary. Shall be made of high pressure type made of DZR brass.
All air eliminators shall manufactured by specialists and a discharge pipe shall be run
from the automatic air vent to a convenient position to drain.
All draincocks shall be of the same manufacture and be in accordance with BS 2879.
Generally draincocks shall be provided at all low points in the system and other
points where necessary and as directed by the Consultant.
19.2.07
Float ball valves on the mains shall be of equilibrium type, full bore, 6 bar
medium/high pressure to BS 1212 Part 1.
Float switches sitted to the water tanks shall be a mercury switch in a plastic casing
suspended from its own cable.The float switch casing shall be made of
polypropylene cable shall be sheathed with PVC compound. It shall be suitable for
water temperature up to 50C.
19.2.08
TRENCH EXCAVATION
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-19/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Granular Bedding
Pipework shall be laid on a granular bed with a minimum cover above the crown of
the pipe as follows:
1. Pipe lines 600-mm cover when there is no traffic on the ground above the
pipeline.
2. Pipe lines 1000-mm cover when there is traffic on the ground above the pipeline.
The granular bedding shall comprise grave, stone chippings or crushed stone to
pass 12 mm sieve and be retained on a 5 mm sieve mixed with free draining course
sand, in the ratio of two parts crushed stone or gravel to every one part of sand.
Bedding material shall not contain more than 0.3% sulphate nor shall it be obtained
from locations where 0.1 % sulphate is present in the ground water.
Bedding shall be laid 150 mm deep along the length of the trench and compacted
prior to work commencing on the pipe laying. After pipe laying, inspection and
testing, a further 300 mm of bedding material shall be compacted by hand above the
uppermost crown of the pipeline along its entire length. The bedding material shall
span the entire width of the trench and shall be laid in not more than 150-mm deep
layers, each layer being compacted by hand.
Backfilling Excavations
After compaction of granular bed and surround, the trench shall be backfilled using
selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard objects and builders
debris of greater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the
specified operations proceeding it have been completed and shall be in layers of 150
mm, each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and
vibrators shall be used compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe
exceeds 0.5 meters.
19.2.09
PIPEWORK INSULATIONS
All thermal insulation shall comply with British Standard BS 5970: 1981 and BS 5442:
1981.
All domestic hot and cold water pipes which are exposed to sun shall be insulated.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-20/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
19.2.10
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-21/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Access opening for tank shall be provided. Support for tanks shall be structural steel
strap legs welded to lower tank head or adjustable jacklegs.
Tank shall be sandblasted internally to white metal, and then coated with 8-10 mils
DFT epoxy polyamide. The exterior surface shall be cleaned and coated with 2-3
mils DFT rust resistant primer.
Upper distribution system shall be of the baffle type to evenly distribute the water
over the entire tank area.
Lower distribution system shall be of a proven design constructed with individual fine
slotted non-clogging polyethylene strainers arranged for even flow distribution
through the resin bed.
The main operating valve shall be an industrial Automatic Multiport diaphragm type,
slow opening and closing, free of water hammer. The diaphragm assembly shall be
fully guided on its perimeter when pressure actuated from one position to another to
assure a smooth reliable shut-off without sticking. There shall be no contract of
dissimilar metals within the valve and no special tools shall be required to service the
valve.
The manufacturer of the equipment shall manufacture the main operating valve.
Single units shall have an internal automatic by-pass of untreated water during
regeneration. Valve shall have a treated water sampling cock.
An automatic flow controller shall be provided to maintain proper backwash and flush
rates over wide variations in operating pressures and require not field adjustment.
A factory-mounted and wired cycle controller shall incorporate an adjustable time
switch with multiported pilot valve to control all steps of automatic regeneration.
Provision for push-button initiated regeneration shall be included.
An electrical signaling device shall initiate regeration with 240V / 1 ph / 50 Hz power
supply.
All filter media shall be of good quality possessing characteristics of durability, long
life and resistance to attribution and shall not impart taste, odor or colour to the water
being treated. Filter media shall be selected for removing particulates down to 10micron size.
The filtration unit shall be supplied to remove suspended matters, dechlorination and
organic removal and odor removal.
The granular media (multilayered) shall consist of three distinct filter layers in
addition to a support layer. Each layer shall be of selected density and particle size
to stratify in the same order following a backwash. The filters layers shall be
stratified with the coarsest layer at the top and the finest layer at the bottom. Particle
retention shall be 10 micron or larger.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-22/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.2.11
SECTION 19
All pipework, fittings, and storage tanks shall be sterilized starting with the external
water supplies, storage tanks and finally the water distribution system. Sterilization
shall be done by contractor who specialized and certified by the water department to
perform such works.
No sterilization shall be carried out until the system has been flushed out and
approval received in writing from the Consultant to commence sterilization.
The following procedure shall be adopted for sterilization of the water distribution
systems:
a. Flush out all tanks, pipework, etc.
b. Recharge all water systems adding sufficient sterilization chemical at the roof tank
(loft area) to a concentration of 1-2 parts per million. The concentration shall be
confirmed by using a measuring instrument approved by the water department.
c. Starting with the draw-off point nearest the cold-water storage tank, each draw-off
point shall be opened until chlorine odour is present at each draw-off.
d. When all draw-off points have discharged chlorinated water, the cold water
storage tanks shall be recharged adding sufficient sterilization chemical to give
the correct concentration of 1-2 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall
then remain charged for a minimum period of one hour.
e. The water shall then be chemically analyzed. Should no residual chlorine be
found, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Drain down all storage tanks and pipework, flushing out tank and pipework, and
run the system clean prior to retesting of the water to ensure no residual chlorine
is present.
g. Finally a sample of tank water shall be taken to the Water Department for testing.
The results of these tests shall be forwarded to the Consultant for his approval.
19.2.12
The plumbing contractor shall take connections from the proposed main water
supply to the main electronic water meter cabinet, which shall be located at internal
boundary wall of the project, as per the tender drawings. The water meter and
cabinets shall be supplied and installed by the contractor and all meters and cabinets
to be as per QCS Section 19.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-23/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.2.13
SECTION 19
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-24/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The contractor shall carry out his own test first to ensure there are no leaks prior to
requesting the Consultant to witness the test. The witnessed test shall be maintained
for a minimum of 4 hour without measurable loss and without further pumping.
Pipework main laid in ground shall be tested for 24 hours and leakage shall be
measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main under test. Leakage shall
not exceed five litres per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 1750 metre length of pipe for
33 metres head pressure in a period of 24 hours.
The Consultant shall witness all pipework tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner of each pipework section to be
tested.
19.2.14
PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS
Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable
racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be
supplied by the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components
are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could be
damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the consultant.
19.2.15
All items of Plumbing Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and as per
the requirements of the Water Department.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-25/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.2.16
SECTION 19
SECTION 1
SOLAR WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B. Product Data: Size, dimensions, capacity, pressure rating, accessories and
special features and operating characteristics of all equipments.
C. Shop Drawing: Detailed equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each
field connection.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring diagram for each item of equipment with electric
power supply.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for solar heater,
control and accessories, including trouble shooting maintenance guide. Include
this data and product data in maintenance manual in accordance with the
requirements.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-26/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement and
framework requirements are to be coordinated with respective civil work.
2.0 GENERAL
Supply, deliver and install where indicated numbers of solar water heaters, Solar
hot water systems shall comply with Australian Standard AS2712 or equivalent to
American, and manufactured under a Quality Assurance System complying to
ISO 9001. Technical design, construction quality and measurement of
performance (accelerate ageing, continuous control) all shall be done as per AS
2712 or equivalent.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-27/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
34 NOS
1.94m (L) x 1.02m (W) x 0.77m (H)
2 m2 (nominal) 1.86 m2 (actual)
Copper
Copper
S-19-28/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Surface
Absorbtance
Emitance
7000 Liters
180 LPM
50 kPa
1200 kPa
3.5 Fluid
Only Anti scaling, Anti-corrosion and Anti-freeze liquid shall be used on the
primary closed circuit. Water shall not be used in the primary circuit.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-29/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
3.8
Solar Controller
Description: Solid state differential temperature thermostat with capacity for up
to 12 low resistance platinum resistance thermometers, solar pump contactors
and overload protection. It has relay outputs to be connected to diverter valves
and pump contactors.
a. Functions
Standard: When collector outlet temperature exceeds storage temperature,
close contacts to start solar pump and pump the primary fluid to flood the
collector array.
Over Temperature Protection: When collector temperature is less than 3 deg C
differential with stored primary fluid, open contacts shall switch off the pump to
allow primary fluid to drain back into Heat Store Cylinder/Tank.
Freeze Protection: When no solar gain is available, open contacts shall switch
off the pump and allow primary fluid to drain back into Heat Store Cylinder thus
.preventing freezing
High Limit Off: When Heat Store Cylinder/Tank temperature rises above
required set point, user defined between 55 85 degrees C, open contacts.
Primary fluid shall drain back preventing over-heating.
Back up for Solar: Air source heat pump is provided as back up to Solar heat
store instead of conventional electric elements in order to be energy efficient.
The heat pump circulation pump shall switch if the tank temperature falls below
52C. The circulation continues till the set temperature 65C is achieved in the
tank. Heat pump provided should be capable of provided hot water at 60C. Heat
pump shall have inbuilt controls and shall ON/OFF based on water flow detection
by the flow switch and temperature difference.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-30/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
4.0 GENERAL
Supply, deliver and install where indicated Air to water heat pumps as a backup
to Solar hot water systems shall comply with Australian / European or equivalent
American standards, and manufactured under a Quality Assurance System
complying to ISO 9001. Heat pump provided should be Eurovent / AHRI certified.
4.1 Manufacturers
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Rheem - USA
Climaveneta - Italy
Accent Air - Australia
Viessmann Germany
Jacques Giordano France
Ecotherm - Europe
TECHNICAL DATA
Compressor Make
Type
Number Per Unit
No of Refrigerant Circuits
Fan
Type
Copeland or equivalent
Scroll
2 min
2 min
Ziehl-ebm or equivalent
Axial
Plate
AISI 316
65C
20 kPa
1000 kPa
GENERAL INFORMATION
Water Connections
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
1 Copper
S-19-31/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Drain
Voltage / Phase/Frequency
20mm PVC
415V / 3P / 50Hz
Cabinet Construction
Condensing Coils shall be special fin guard silver treated / epoxidic treated for
longer life in marine or high polluted atmospheres. Should pass 10,000 hours
salt spray test ASTM B 117 in marine environment and 3000 hrs in acid salt
spray test ASTM B 287 for Urban environment.
Structure
Specific structure for outdoor installation, with hot galvanised steel sheet base
painted with polyester powder coat, perimeter frame made from aluminium section
bars or equivalent. Fan compartment separate from the compressor compartments.
Specific aluminium alloy panelling for outdoor installation, completely weatherproof,
easily removable, designed to allow total access to internal components for
inspection and maintenance (removal of front and side panels). Ventilation of
compressor compartments.
Refrigerant Circuit
Main components of the refrigerant circuit:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-32/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
i.
j.
k.
l.
Compressor
Hermetic rotary scroll compressor with vapour injection, complete with sump heater,
electronic thermal protector with centralised manual reset, two-pole electric motor.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-33/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
h. Electrical panel for outdoor installation, with two doors andseal gaskets,
i. Electronic controller.
Unit power supply voltage: 415V/50 Hz/3N.
Certification
Unit compliant with the following directives and amendments:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Tests
Checks performed throughout the entire manufacturing process according to the
procedures specified by ISO 9001.
Performance or noise emission tests should be conducted by highly qualified
technical personnel within the factory.
Performance tests involve measuring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Electrical data
Water flow rates
Operating temperature
Power consumption
Capacity delivered
Pressure drop on the water-source heat exchanger at both full load (in rated
conditions and at the most critical conditions for the condenser) and at part
load.
During performance testing the main alarm conditions can also be simulated. Noise
emission tests verify the units sound power levels according to ISO 3744.
Controller
The controller is the device designed especially for heat pump applications with
incorporated logic for high temperature hot water production. The keypad features
function controls and a complete LCD display for viewing data and activating the unit,
via a multilevel menu, with settable display language. The controller provides
temperature control for the heating and cooling systems in the domestic hot water.
These different temperatures are managed automatically based on the different
conditions in which the system operates, with the possibility to assign specific levels
of priority to domestic hot water production, depending on the needs of the
application. Diagnostics include complete alarm management, with black box
functions (via PC) and alarm log (display or PC) for best analysis of unit behaviour.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-34/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
5. Installation
Solar hot water collectors must be installed with tilt and exposed to direct sun
(without shadowing). They should be tilted towards equator (south direction) with
angle of 25. Single unit or multiple units can be connected together in parallel and
connected to common Headers (CWS, HWS, HWR) to cover the desired daily hot
water load and shall be as per the design of specialist solar manufacturer.
The system shall also be equipped with all necessary safety devices that guarantee
the system shall function in a satisfactory way. Such safety devices shall involve cold
inlet relief valve and Pressure & Temperature relief valves. A pressure reduction
valve should also be fitted to maintain the incoming pressure less than 850 kPa. The
Pressure & Temperature relief valve shall be set to relieve water at 1000kPa and/or
99C
The piping between the solar collectors and the storage shall be of brazed copper
with proper insulation with a continuous slope towards the heat store tank to avoid
air-locks. No compression fittings shall be used in the primary circuit.
The storage tank shall be equipped with all necessary fittings on cold and hot water
side, in order to connect with piping network (by the specialist contractor).
It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that all civil, electrical, mechanical
(piping etc) and all work related to solar water heater system are done according to
the specifications. All hot water piping shall be adequately insulated to ensure
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-35/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
minimum heat losses during re-circulation. A hot water circulation pump set (with 24
hrs timer) shall be provided to ensure continuous hot water availability in the ring
main.
6.0 Warranty
The complete solar system shall be Manufactured and Supplied by a Single
Manufacturer who should extend their Warranty on the complete HW System, with a
5-year comprehensive warranty covering Parts and 1 year for Labor. And the heat
pump need to be manufactured by the recommended manufacturers and should be
with 2 years complete warranty. The local agent shall only assist the manufacturer in
the installation of the system.
A. INSTALLATION AT SITE
1. Each building zone shall consist of 1 set of central solar heating system
supplying hot water through a common manifold to all the hot water outlets.
2. The bottom of the collectors shall be a minimum of 1 Mts above the top of the
heat store to enable the Natural Drain Back of close circuit fluid to take place.
3. Hot water circulating pump set to be installed in the return line to ensure
continuous hot water availability
4. The solar collectors shall face south with an inclination of 25 deg and shall be
mounted on a stand or plinth.
5. A 2-core cable from the hot sensors in the panels to the each heat store to be
conduited.
C. COMMISSIONING
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
2. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-36/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Description
Solar storage tanks
Solar collectors
Solar controller
Solar circulating pump
Air to water heat pump
Heat pump circulating pump
Type
7000 Liters
As per above
1D+1S
25 KW
1D+1S
Quantity
1 No
34 Nos
1 No
1 Set
1 No
1 set
19.2.17
Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following
tank shall be used:
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-37/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-38/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
19.2.18
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-39/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage,
conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in
temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm and shall be
suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.
The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to provide
sequence control.
Interconnecting pipework headers and manifolds shall be fabricated from copper tube
fittings as previously described. PVC and galvanized mild steel shall not be permitted.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-40/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
head in conjunction with the equipment being offered and submit the same for
Engineers approval.
19.2.19
Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractors
responsibility to provide the system - pressure reducing valve(s) if the distribution
system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressure requirement
being offered.
This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arise due to
over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in different levels
throughout the building.
19.2.20
SNG SYSTEM
General
This specification is to be read in conjunction with the drawings. The complete
installation shall be carried out by a WOQOD approved Specialist Contractor and
shall comply with the current B.S. codes and codes of practice, NFPA 58. The
Contractor shall ensure that the materials and installation are suitable for local
conditions and comply with local regulations(Civil Defence Department).
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and execution of the
works described in these specifications for the SNG system to produce a complete,
tested, commissioned and fully operational installation including all necessary labor
and materials whether or not specified in details.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-41/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
SNG System
The Contractor shall provide a fully functional system comprising of all components
whether or not mentioned in the drawings. The complete SNG gas detection system
installation shall be carried out by approved supplier cum installer.
The schedules of equipment /accessories in the tender drawings are tentative and
are intended as a guide and therefore is the contractors responsibility to crosscheck
the allowable pressure in conjunction with the approved shop dwgs and submit the
same for Engineers approval.
The design consideration for AL SENDIAN TOWER ON PLOT COM-49 Proposed
Office Building GAS LOAD, internal network pipe run and pipe sizing calculation for
pressure and flow is provided in the SNG dwg, where 21 millibar is considered as the
residual pressure on the farthest outlet (applicance), using G.I. steel schedule 40 to
ASTM A53, grade B seamless piping material was considered in the design and
encased within a Black Steel sch 40 to ASTM A53, Grade B pipe. Pipe pressure drop
was calculated relative to the pipe size being considered from the following:
a. The considered design residual pressure from the farthest gas appliance (21
millibars).
b. Pipe routing from the appliance to the outlet pipe of the 2
station (27th floor), calculated to be 21.632 millibar.
th
nd
stage reduction
nd
c. Pipe routing from the 27 floor gas pipe riser to the inlet of the 2 stage
pressure reduction station, calculated to be 22.587 millibar using 1/2G.I. pipe
diameter.
st
th
d. Pipe routing entering the riser at 1 basement high level to the the 27 floor
gas riser, where inlet pressure to the 1st basement riser was calculated to be
34.1 millibar using a 2 dia.(77.9mm G.I.
Internal pipe diameter), and where this value is less than 75millibar (as
prescribed by Lusail Development to be allowed to have the gas and as per
ASPE fuel Gas Piping system) piping to run internal of the building thru the
nearest available shaft.
e. Pipe routing from the outlet of the 1st reduction station to the pipe routing
entering the 1st basement high level. 34.1 millibar was calculated pressure
available at 2 dia.G.I.pipe. The infrastructure having available pressure of 2
bars, thus determines the 1st stagePRS. The detailed calculation is provided
as part of the SNG schematic dwg. The details of the PRS as shown on the
SNG standard details dwgs.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-42/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
of horizontal main lines and not from the bottom. Compression fittings shall not be
allowed on gas pipework.
All pipe encasement shall be black steel pipe sch 40 to ASTM A53 GRADE B.
Isolating Valves
Valves shall be of lever operated ball type with an indication of ON and OFF
positions. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated type and constructed of non-ferrous
materials. The valves shall be designed for capillary joint connections to the pipe
lines. Where screwed connections are provided for pipe line connection, they should
have I.S.O. metric thread in accordance with BS 3643. The valves shall be of
wrought copper or bronze. Details of the valves shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval. Valves shall be Malleable iron to ASTM A47 and or Ductile Iron to
ASTM A395. Rating as specified in table 5.9.4.1, as per NFPA58.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-43/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.2.21
SECTION 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be read in conjunction with the contract material
specifications, contract drawings and installation details and it includes but not
limited to the following:
A. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The
Main line, Laterals, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, Irrigation
Controllers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, Bubblers and flush valves.
B. The contractor shall submit for client approval the technical information and
samples of the material he intends to use which should be in accordance with the
material specifications of this project.
C. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the work
and then shall be handed over.
D. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the client with four
original sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works and
installation details.
E. The contractor shall upon completing the works provide the client with detailed
Operation and Maintenance Manuals (With applicable Arabic translations) in four
originals. The manuals shall include but not limited to; complete and marked
literature of all products used on the project and its reordering part numbers. It
shall also include a list of the recommended spare parts for a period of 5 years. It
shall include original print of the As Built drawings.
F. The client prior to issuing the Project Handing Over Certificate shall approve the
As-Built Drawings and the Operation & maintenance Manual.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-44/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
1.04
ISO R 161
SASO 14&15
BS: CP312
BS: 1780
BS: 3505
BS: 4346
BS: 5150
Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves
for general purposes.
BS: 5154
BS: 8010
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - The contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in 6 sets
which to be approved by the client representative prior to commencing
installation work. The shop drawings shall show but not limited to valves, control
wires route and numbers and controllers location
B. Products The contractor shall submit for client approval prior to commencing
installation works; the products he intends to use with all technical details and
literature in accordance with the specifications below.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the
detailed Operation & Maintenance Manual with equipment reordering codes and
literature.
D. As-Built Drawings- The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the complete project asbuilt drawings reflecting the actual site installation.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-45/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. All primary distribution pipe work shall be Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC)
to Class 5
B. All primary distribution pipe fittings shall be solvent welded uPVC 16 bar
C. As an alternative to the Specifications in items A&B, uPVC pipe work confirming
to BS 3505 Class E and fittings to BS 4346 of equivalent pressure rating may be
used.
D. Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes:
1. All pipes shall be manufactured to SASO 14, Class V or BS 3505, Class E.
All couplings and fittings for uPVC pipes shall be manufactured of materials
conforming to BS 4346: Part I.
E. Flexible Piping for on line drippers:
1. Flexible Pipes for irrigation on line drippers shall be in the required sizes as
shown on the drawings and B.O.Q extruded from linear low density
polyethylene version raw material. Pipes shall be resistant to algae and
ultraviolet deterioration with Carbon Black content not less than 2.25 %.
2.02
APPLICATION DEVICES
a. POP-UP SPRAY
The sprinkler shall be equipped with an adjustable arc (1-360 ) nozzle discharging
4.3 gpm, for the full circle and it shall be available in sizes to cover up to a radius of
17 feet at a pressure of 25 psi.
The sprinkler nozzle shall automatically adjust the flow depending on the arc setting
in orderto have a matched precipitation rate. It shall be an integral part of the riser
assembly that can not be removed, and has the ability to open fully to allow flushing.
It shall have grooveon the inner surface to allow dirt to go out of the nozzle easily.
The sprinkler shall have radius reduction capability by means of a stainless steel, arc
and radius adjustment screw. It shall also be possible to adjust arc and radius from
the top of the riser assembly, using an adjustment key. This adjustment shall be
possible in all the phases of installation (before and after installation, while static and
while operating).
The sprinkler shall have an inlet screen of length not less than 100 mm. It shall have
30 mm exposed diameter after installation. The body and riser of the sprinkler shall
be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy duty A.B.S The sprinkler shall accept a
drain check valve, installed in the field from in the base of the riser to prevent
drainage.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-46/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-47/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The dripper shall have a uniform flow rate at a pressure range of 7-60 psi and shall
have no flow emission spike at start up low pressure of 7 PSI.
The dripper shall have a built in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction of
external impurities with the need of dust cap. It shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism
to prevent water draining out of the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI.
The dripper shall have a nipple outlet with color coded cap to identify flow for each
type.
It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.
The dripper shall have a Coefficient Of Manufacturing Variation (CV) 0.03 less.
BUBBLERS
The bubbler shall be of the pressure compensating type having a fixed flow under a
pressure range of 20 to 90 PSI. It shall be constructed of corrosion and UV resistant
plastic material.
The bubbler shall have an integral electrometric flow bushing to maintain a constant
flow at different pressure range.
The bubbler shall have a plastic screen filter to protect it from debris that could be
available in the water. It shall have a inch female threaded inlet (FNPT) for
connection to a inch male threaded riser.
The bubbler shall be available in 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 GPM flow rates. The bubbler
shall carry a two years warranty
VALVES
Electric Solenoid Valves
The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed,
electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.
The valves body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced
nylon, rated at an operating pressure of 200 PSI. The body of the valve shall have
brass inserts, with through holes, which shall accept the bonnet Stainless steel bolts.
The diaphragm shall be of molded construction, reinforced with nylon fabric. A
heavy-duty removable seat shall be available to protect and support the diaphragm.
The valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well with a self-cleaning
metering rod, so only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter cleaning
system ,that continuously cleans the filter when the valve is operating, shall be
available.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-48/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an accurate set
pressure regulator, to keep the downstream pressure constant after setting it. The
regulator shall be of the top dial model with clearly shown pressure values in bars
and PSI. It shall regulate the flow at a pressure range of 20 to 100 PSI.
The valve shall be available in 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 inch size and it shall have a BSP
female thread inlet and outlet. It shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.1 gpm
(1size) to 200 gpm (2size)
The valve shall have a 24 volts 60 cycle solenoid with a 370 mA in-rush current and
190 mA holding current.
The solenoid shall be an encapsulated, one-piece unit with a captive plunger. The
Valve shall be equipped with a manual internal bleed only giving the capability to
release the upper chamber water to the down stream piping, allowing the valve to
open. No external bleed shall be available
The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-49/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The valve shall close slowly as the network pressure drops in order to prevent shock
to the system and the on/off cycling of the pump.
The valve shall also be available in sizes 3, 4, 6, and 8 with flanged connections.
Check Valves
The valve shall be of constructed of Aerospace quality composite and stainless steel
(SAE 303) materials, 100% non-corrosive. It shall allow flow in one direction by the
action of a spring loaded flap which closes against a rubber seal. The spring and the
flap shall be connected via a moment arm in order to ensure that the spring pressure
is maximum when the valve is closed.
The valve shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars. It shall have an external position
indicator that may be made electric for signaling a control system.
The valve shall be available in 3, 4, and 6size.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-50/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
Gate Valves
Gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar and
water operating temperature of 45 C.
Valves shall be the same size as the incoming line size with a clear waterway equal
to the full nominal diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning
counterclockwise.
The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in valve indicating the direction
of opening.
Valves smaller than 3 shall be all bronze or brass conforming to BS 5154 with
screwed and connections. Valves 3 and larger shall be cast iron body, and shall
conform to BS 5150 with flange end connections.
Valve Boxes
The valve boxes shall have enclosures, which are injected molded polyofin plastic
with ultra violet additives, according to ASTM-D-V1248. It shall be light in weight with
reduced side angles and increased break resistance.
The valve box shall be non-conductive or sparking.
The valve boxes shall be available in sizes 910, 1015, 1320, 1324 depending on
installation requirements as per scope of work, specifications and drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-51/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The wires shall be of the solid or stranded construction with soft bare copper
conductor. They shall have extra heavy thickness of special polyvinyl chloride
insulation highly resistant to the saline, acid or alkaline contaminants.
The copper conductors of the wires shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-3, B-8.
The thermoplastic insulation shall meet ASTM D-2219. All irrigation wires shall have
surface printing on insulation.
Irrigation Controllers
The controller shall be of a modular design with a standard 8-station model. There
shall be an insert able add-on 4 station and 8 station modules that enable the
controller to be customized from 8 stations up to 48 stations in 4 or 8 stations
increments.
The controller shall have three independent programs (A,B,C) with 8 start times
per program and one program (D) that can run concurrently with the other
programs. Watering time shall be available from 1 minute to 2 hours in 1-minute
increment per station in programs A, B and C and from 1 minute to 12 hours in
program D.
The controller shall have 4 weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day
calendar, 31 days calendar, odd days programming and even days programming.
The controller shall also have a 365 days calendar clock to accommodate true odd
even watering. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a programming
dial and selection buttons with user feed back by LCD display.
The controller shall be equipped by a rain sensor.
The controller shall have a cycle and soak scheduling capability that allows a cycle
to be programmed for up to 60 minutes and a soak period up to 60 minutes.
The controller shall have a seasonal adjust feature that allows for station run times
to be changed from 10% to 150% in 10% increments to compensate for weather
changes.
The controller shall have automatic short circuit detection.
The controller shall be equipped with a programmable pump circuit that can
activate the pump start relay by zone. It shall have a programmable delay between
valve stations.
Programs backup shall be provided by a non-volatile memory circuit that shall hold
the program, time and date indefinitely.
The controller shall have a Stainless Steel cabinet and it shall be pedestal
mounted. The pedestal shall be stainless steel.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-52/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
The controller shall be compatible with a programming kit (SRP) that transfer the
irrigation program from a personal computer and upload them into the memory of
the controller.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PROTECTION
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-53/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
their entirety. All non-metallic materials shall be handled carefully and stored
under cover to avoid damage. Pipes that have been damaged or dented shall not
be used in this work.
C. In addition to the provisions for the protection of non-metallic components,
special attention shall be given to the protection of the control system components; protection shall be provided as per the manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D. Openings into the system, apparatus and equipment shall be securely covered,
both before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and
the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus or equipment.
E. Barricades, guards, warning signs and lights as necessary or required, for the
protection of the public and the work force shall be provided.
F. Utilities: The location of existing underground utilities shall be determined and the
works performed in a manner which shall avoid possible damage. Hand excavation, as required shall be carried out to minimize the possibility of damage to
existing underground utilities.
3.02
PERFORMANCE
3.03
INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before
installation. Any products that are found to be damaged or not in accordance with
the specifications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-54/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
3.04
INSTALLATION
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-55/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
G. Plastic Pipes
Plastic pipes shall be installed in accordance with BS 8010: Part 1 and the
Manufacturer's recommendations. Pipes with threaded joints shall be snaked
from side to side of the trench to allow for expansion and contraction.
All main and branch piping to BS 3505, class E.
H. Jointing
1. Pipe joints of uPVC shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of
the manufacturer. Excess jointing material shall be removed.
2. uPVC male adaptors with specified threaded joint compounds to make
connections between plastic pipe and valves shall be used as detailed, and
tightened with light wrench pressure.
I.
J. Irrigation piping from the remote control valve boxes to the end of the irrigation
drip lines shall be buried to the depths as shown on the Drawings.
K. Closing of Pipe and Flushing Lines:
1. Closing: Openings in piping systems shall be capped or plugged, leaving
caps and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of the
installation. Dirt and debris shall be prevented from entering pipe or
equipment.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-56/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
2. Flushing: All pipes and tubing shall be thoroughly flushed out before
installation of the emitter control valves. Butt joints, fittings and connections
shall remain visible.
L. Tagging and Identification: All remote control valves, motor-operated valves,
pressure reducing valves, manually-operated gate valves and controllers shall be
tagged and identified. All identifying numbers shall be consistent with like
designations indicated on the irrigation controller schedule.
M. Site Equipment Installation
1. Isolation Valve/Gate Valve: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated
on Drawings.
2. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Shall be installed in the positions as
indicated in the details, remote control valve assembly comprising gate valve,
remote control valve with pressure regulator , and all appurtenances. Valve
boxes containing the assembly shall not be placed closer than 300mm to
paved areas. When the pressure gauge has been properly attached, the
outlet pressure shall be set as required during coverage tests.
3. Valve Boxes: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.
All valves and valve assemblies shall be mounted in boxes as detailed.
a. The top of all boxes shall be set parallel with the grade and as detailed in
a neat and orderly fashion.
b. Shall be placed parallel to paving, kerbs, walls or similar structures and
where more than one box, parallel to each other.
c. All box locations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation of
valves.
d. Valve boxes shall not rest on or come in contact with the valve, piping,
hose or conduit.
e. Valve circuit number of the remote control valve shall be painted on rim of
box, such that:
i.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-57/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
N.
Control System
1. Irrigation Controller
a. An irrigation controller shall be installed in locations approved by the
Engineer, with the control cables, clearly marked with identification
markers, attached to the appropriate terminals in the approved manner.
b. Shall be secure to a concrete pad with approved anchor bolts. Chipping,
cracking, or otherwise marring the finish of enclosure when securing to the
concrete pad shall be avoided.
c. Programming of Irrigation Controller: Using the controller schedule
provided on the drawings, as a guide, the irrigation controller shall be
programmed to correspond with the initial irrigation sequencing and
duration of the cycles for each zone. The Contractor may find that during
establishment and maintenance the schedule has to be modified to
achieve a correct irrigation regime in accordance with good horticultural
practice.
O. Irrigation - Electrical
1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission all items of
electrical equipment associated with the irrigation systems.
2. All electrical works shall be in accordance with the BS and IEC, and as
further specified in Sections under Division 16.
3. The irrigation system shall commence at the controllers which shall be fitted
into a dwarf type distribution cabinet with solar shade and shall have a bolting
down foot for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base. All incoming and
outgoing cables shall be from below ground level. The cabinet shall have a
hinged lockable opening door to provide full front access to the controller and
equipment and shall be sized according to the equipment being installed.
4. All equipment, conductors, termination, etc., within the pillar and throughout
the irrigation system generally shall be fully insulated such that there are no
live parts or connections exposed and shall be to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.
5. The irrigation pillar shall have sufficient free space for fitting a kWh meter
together with any additional equipment or accessories required to complete
the equipment.
6. Each irrigation pillar shall have permanently fixed on the inside of the door, a
distribution diagram showing all circuits connections, ratings, cable sizes,
etc., together with a current controller schedule.
7. All terminals shall be of the crimped spade type with insulated grip. At all
connection locations 150 mm of "slack" shall be provided.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-58/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
8. Conductor markers shall be used throughout which shall clearly indicate the
circuit reference or number. These shall be white plastic with black letters or
numbers and of the type which acts as a sleeve over the conductor insulation.
9. Connections onto valves shall be made in a below ground PVC resin filled
molded waterproof connector with integral wire clamp.
Q. Concrete Pads
1. Installation as detailed and where shown on the Drawings.
2. The exact location shall be confirmed to the Engineer prior to pouring.
3. Specified non-metallic conduit shall be provided as required to penetrate
boxes and enclosures as approved by the Engineer.
4. The anchor bolts shall be set in coordination with enclosure hole locations.
R. Pumps
1. Installation
a. Installation shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein.
2. Fabrication:
a. All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer
shall be interchangeable.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-59/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-60/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
4. Water shall be introduced into lines to be tested at full operating head and
the water flow at end discharge point, and observed until all air and residual
debris has been expelled from the line.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-61/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
10. During the tests, all exposed couplings, fittings and valves shall be carefully
examined for defects and leakage. Leaking pipes, couplings, joints, fittings
and equipment shall be repaired or replaced and the section retested as
previously specified.
11. Upon receipt of approval of the Engineer to proceed, the remaining backfill
shall be placed and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry
density. For further details refer to Section 02221 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, COMPACTION AND GENERAL GRADING.
C. Final System Test: The tests as specified above shall be repeated for the entire
network after pipelines have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected. Each test
shall be restricted to pipes of one class and particular care shall be taken to
isolate air valves, etc. and not to apply higher pressures than specified at any
point on the pipeline and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored
before any test is carried out.
D. Test Results: Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested section
of the pipe together with time of test and name of testing engineer in tabulated
format shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer upon
completion of the tests.
3.06
FLUSHING
A.
B.
Operation Test: After the hydrostatic test, emitters shall be installed and the
system completed and tested to demonstrate functional efficiency. This shall be
prior to covering the laterals with mulch.
C.
The lines shall be operated for a period of 24 hours, not necessarily in one
continuous period, and all emitters checked for satisfactory operation. Any
faulty/blocked emitters shall be replaced.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-62/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
19.2.22
SECTION 19
MANUFATURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
1. Copper Pipes
KME
WEDNESBURY
YORKSHIRE
EUROPE
UK
UK
2. Copper Fittings
KME
YORKSHIRE
WEDNESBURY
EUROPE
UK
UK
3. Valves
CONEX
MARLEY
PEGLER
UK
UK
UK
HAKAN PLASTICS
POLOPLAST
KOPEX
ARIETE
AQUATHERM
UAE,TURKEY
GERMANY
UK
ITALY
GERMANY
5. Thermal Insulation
KIMMCO
ARABIAN FIBREGLASS
ARMAFLEX
KUWAIT
KSA
UK
CRANE
ZURN
NIBCO
GRINNELL
UK
USA
USA
USA
TOLCO
HELTI
GRIPPLE LTD
USA
GERMANY
UK
8. Water Pumps
ITT LOWARA
NOCCHI
SPP
WILO
ITALY
ITALY
UK
GERMANY
KIMMCO
AFICO
ARMAFLEX
UK
GRINNELL
TYCO FLOW CONTROL
POTTOR ELECTRICS
USA
USA
USA
INTERFIT
ANVIL
VICTAULIC
FRANCE
USA
USA
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-63/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 19
NIBCO (PRV)
GRINNELL (PRV)
KITZ
USA
UK
JAPAN
FTC
BRIDGESTON
HITANK
UAE
JAPAN
KOREA
GASCO
JAMCO
QATAR
QATAR
SOLAHART
RHEEM
CLIMAVENETA
ACCENT AIR
VIESSMANN
ECOTHERM
AUTRALIA
USA
ITALY
AUTSTRALIA
GERMANY
EUROPE
TERRAIN
MARLEY
HUNTER
UNION PIPES(UPI)
UK
UK
UK
UAE
CULLIGAN
AQUA SEA
INNOVA
METITO
USA
NETHERLANDS
ITALY
UAE/USA
NIPPON
DALMINE
NKK CORPORATION
TUBOS REUNIDOS
JAPAN
ITALY
JAPAN
SPAIN
SENSUS
GERMANY
HUNTER
FITCO INDUSTRIES
RAINBIRD
USA
UK
USA
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-19-64/64
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 20
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
SL. NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
20.1.00
DRAINAGE GENERAL
20.1.01
Site
20.1.02
Site Conditions
20.1.03
Definitions
20.1.04
Scope of Works
20.1.05
20.1.06
Drainage System
20.1.07
Programme
20.1.08
Contract Drawings
20.1.09
Working Drawings
20.1.10
Co-ordination of Drawings
20.1.11
Material Submittals
20.1.12
Material Inspection
20.1.13
Alternative Materials
20.1.14
20.1.15
Safety
20.1.16
Contractors License
20.1.17
Permits
20.1.18
20.1.19
Protective Finishes
20.1.20
20.1.21
20.1.22
As Built Drawings
20.1.23
Period of Maintenance
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-1/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.2.00
20.2.01
20.2.02
20.2.03
20.2.04
20.2.05
20.2.06
Manholes
20.2.07
20.2.08
20.2.09
Oil Interceptor
20.2.10
20.2.11
Drains
20.2.12
20.2.13
20.2.14
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-2/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.1.01
SITE
20.1.02
SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Drainage Materials & Equipment shall be capable
of withstanding the following site conditions:
1. Maximum Ambient
Temperature
2. Altitude
Sea Level
95 %
5. Prevailing Wind
6. Storms
7. Annual Rainfall
20.1.03
DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:
Site
BS
CP
Tender Drawing
QCS
Working Drawings
As Built Drawings
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-3/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
Works
Approved
Submitted
Accepted
Provide
Install
Furnish
Concealed
Exposed
20.1.04
SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works consists of furnishing, installing, commissioning and testing the
complete foul, waste and storm water drainage systems along with all associated
manholes, catch pits, square top heavy duty parking structure floor drains, sand trap
chamber, oil interceptor, and storm holding tank as indicated on the contract
drawings, and in accordance with this specification and the requirements of section
20 of the QCS and shall be installed to BSEN 752-3 : 1997.
The contractor shall provide all supervision, labour, materials, equipment, machinery
and any other items necessary to complete the systems in all respects.
The drainage system shall include the following:
1. uPVC buried system as shown on drawing and specified elsewhere.
2. uPVC soil, waste, vent, rainwater pipes as shown on drawing and specified
elsewhere.
3. Toilet/Pantry Floor drains, 300x300 size square top heavy duty carparking
structure floor drains and with heavy duty cover, overflows/underflows pipes,
bottle traps for below pantry sinks and lavatories shown on drawings and as
mentioned in the specifications.
4. Manhole, Manhole Covers, Steel Grating, Steps, oil interceptor, sand trap
chamber with heavy duty cover, submersible pumps, sumppits,
overflow/underflow drain pits, storage tankss drain sump pits, sump pumps.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-4/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.1.05
The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition.
The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labour to
complete the works in accordance with the program of works.
The installations shall comply with the following regulations:
i.
The installation of works shall be as per the latest edition and publication of
Sewerage Division, Civil Engineering Department, Ministry of Public Works, State
of Qatar.
ii.
The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of
practice (current editions including all amendments).
iii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipment other than
the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval
from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right
for such approval/s.
iv. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready
for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or
carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.
Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases
at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the consultants decision shall be final and binding on all such
matters.
20.1.06
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
The Drainage system includes various uPVC pipeworks including all the necessary
fittings and fixtures for the safe and sanitary disposal of Soil and Waste from the
building, along with the provisions of various Manholes, finally discharge to the
Infrastructure Sewer Manhole (FS/MD/3/10/1) via House Connection (HC-M-CO 050)
as shown on the Site Development Sewer Layout dwg D-A0-0001.
uPVC Storm/rainwater network drainage piping discharge from the building are
directed (by gravity flow) to the Storm water holding tank located at the third
basement floor level and are constructed to have double storage height extending up
to the whole level of 2nd basement to provide enough volume for storage. Storm /rain
water holding tank access manhole is located at 1st basement level. A dedicated
(duty/standby) submersible storm water sumppit pumps are installed and operation
shall be automatically controlled through float switches installed in the storm
collection pit. The submersible sumppit pumps operates to discharge finally the
storm/rainwater to the nearest infrastructure road gulley from the vicinity as shown
on the Site Development Storm Water Layout dwg D-A0-0001A.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-5/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
The scheme for the drainage system is detailed and provided in the Contract
drawings for handling and disposal of:
a. Soil Water
b. Waste Water
c. Rain/Storm Water
20.1.07
PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over
20.1.08
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Drainage tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general
arrangement required for the project.
These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractors
responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative
and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings.
Any
discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of
tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Floor Gullies, Drains and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with
these drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-6/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.1.09
WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 for
details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultants approval. The
contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:
i.
Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.
ii
20.1.10
CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Drainage systems.
The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.
20.1.11
MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary
review and approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in
the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.
In case of items involving aesthetic, like Floor Gullies, Floor Clean Outs, Manhole
covers (if located Inside of Building) etc., samples must be submitted for approval
along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-7/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Drainage Materials & Equipment in the following proforma
to the consultant:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Submittal Number
Type of Material
Manufacturer / Local Agent
Date of Approval
Date of Order / Order Number
Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
ETA on Site
Status as on date of Report
a. Equipment Supply
All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).
In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the consultant specifically.
c. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the
Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the
Consultants advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed
to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-8/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
20.1.12
SECTION 20
MATERIAL INSPECTION
The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used
at site, which is not approved earlier specifically, shall stand rejected without notice.
Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or
the sample submitted will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall
make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any
time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractors account.
The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
Materials Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the
materials at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that
on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective
finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be
strictly as per QCS, section 20 Part 6.1.5.
20.1.13
ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipment and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the
equipment or material for the Consultants consideration. Only in case if the
specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the
alternatives will be considered by the Consultant, before the tender is accepted and
the Consultants decision will be final regarding the matter.
In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed
in writing by the Consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractors expenses etc.
20.1.14
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-9/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
20.1.15
SECTION 20
SAFETY
The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipment at
any point of time.
20.1.16
CONTRACTORS LICENSE
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes
necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the
old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site.
In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years
local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be
rejected by the consultant.
20.1.17
PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of
7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for
obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for
any connected works to others.
20.1.18
Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used
in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the
attention of the consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the
necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from
the consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a as-new condition following
such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-10/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
20.1.19
SECTION 20
PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipment used in this
contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic
conditions.
All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before
shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.
20.1.20
20.1.21
The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents for the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals along with the softcopy indicating
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
20.1.22
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-11/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
Three sets of hardcopies drawings along with the softcopy shall be submitted after
approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.
20.1.23
PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Drainage System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date, the Completion Certificate is issued, also where
longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or
materials such longer terms shall apply.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.
In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-12/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.2.00
20.2.01
All uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured under a BS 5750 and BS 5572, to
BS 4514 for Internal above ground, and BS 4660 for the internal under ground
installations, and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same
manufacturer allowing the easy plumbing of an installation.
All external under ground pipes shall be uPVC and manufactured under BS
standards. The system shall comply with appropriate British Standards and bear the
Kitemark.
Applicable sub-sections of Section 20 of Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS)
shall be applied to all drainage works.
20.2.02
: 1973
Materials and colour: pipes and fittings shall be in uPVC in gray, white or rustic
brown.
Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain ended pipes.
expansion joints shall be provided where required.
Seal ring
The system shall be compatible with buried drain system. Weathering Apron
(solvent-weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil, waste, vent pipes for
weather flashing around pipe at roof.
Adjustable, plastic coated steel holderbats shall be used to support pipes or secure
fittings. Galvanized mild steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used for
horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated
steel brackets.
Floor gully inlet shall be in uPVC with stainless steel / bronze covers.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-13/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
BSEN 12056-2-2000
(Formerly BS 5572 : 1994)
20.2.03
The uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 1401-1:1998(formerlyBS 4660)
and BS EN1401-1:1998(formerly BS 5481), comprising complete drainage system,
compatible to soil waste and rainwater system and where appropriate shall bear the
Kitemark.
Materials and Colours : buried drain system pipes and fittings shall be uPVC with
polypropylene seal retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden
brown, approximately to BS 381 C : number 414. Seal retaining caps and seal rings
are black. Rodding eyes shall be provided where required.
uPVC solvent weld socket seal / lip and lip seal / lip seal shall be used. Where
necessary, lip seal / lip seal slip coupling shall be used.
Solvent Cements
Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non pressure pipework or BS
4346 : Part 3 for pressure pipework.
Sealing Rings
Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS
2494.
20.2.04
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-14/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.2.05
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-15/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
galvanized steel. Double angle iron braces shall be installed on both single and
double angle iron supports at 6 metre centres of vertical and horizontal runs of
pipework and anchored as necessary.
B. Rodding Eyes
Rodding and cleaning eyes shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings
and as required.
C. Roof Termination
All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300 mm above the point of exit from the
services duct.
D. Jointing
Jointing of uPVC and high temperature PVC shall be "O" ring and solvent welded.
Prior to jointing all pipework fittings and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Pipework shall be cut square, end chamfered and swarf and dust removed. Prior
to jointing pipes and fitting should be checked for correct position and alignment and
marked to ensure accurate assembly.
Where 'O' ring joints are to be used pipes shall be marked for insertion depth "O"
ring placed in ring seal prior to application of small quantity of lubricant or petroleum
jelly around the chamfered spigot end. The pipe shall then be inserted into the
socket joint finally adjusted to the correct insertion depth.
Where solvent joints are to be used, special care shall be taken to ensure both
spigot and socket are free from all dirt, grease and swarf. Solvent cement shall then
be applied liberally and evenly to both socket and spigot prior to inserting spigot into
socket. The joint shall immediately be cleaned of surplus solvent with a dry cloth
around newly formed joint.
Jointing of W.C outlet to UPVC pipework shall be by means of either a straight or
bent connector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection
for W.C spigot outlet.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-16/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
permit the pipes to be worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true
line and level. Sufficient space should be left to enable the joints to be made tested
and inspected but the contractor shall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe
length is fully supported. After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the
Consultant the trench shall be carefully filled to 300 mm above the crown of the pipe
with granular material.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-17/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
INSPECTIONS
Written notice on prescribed form shall be given for the purpose of inspection,
measurement and testing for each of the following cases:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
20.2.06
MANHOLES
Cement
All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works whether
above or below ground level shall be sulphate resistant cement complying with BS
4027.
Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by
volume in suitable boxes in the proportions given in Section 20 of QCS.
Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No. 1.
The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or
shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous
in colour. Water shall then be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no
more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.
Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked
up again after it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be
removed from the works.
Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12 mm thick layer of approved
epoxy mortar.
MANHOLES
A. General
Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction gradient or diameter.
The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings
and fully comply with CED regulations and QCS Section 20.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-18/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
B. Blockwork Manholes
Blockwork manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to
the dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Consultant.
The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate
resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1.
Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.
Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25
concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound
material. If the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be
coated with an approved waterproofing material.
Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be
of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of
concrete Grade SRC 30.
Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick
SRC mortar rendering Class 1.
All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel
fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen
coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.
All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge
polythene membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.
Where indicated on the Drawings, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solid
precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.
Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole accesses opening are less
than the internal dimensions of the manhole chamber.
The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron manhole covers and frames
of the quality specified. The covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set
on precast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.
Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half
section vitrified clay channel branch bends shall be used for branch connections.
Benching in manholes shall be carefully formed according to the number, diameter
and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes
shall have vertical sides extending from the vitrified clay channels at least to the level
of the crown of the highest pipe. The benchings shall be sloped towards the
channels at a gradient of 1 in 10 or as otherwise detailed on the drawings.
The benching shall be rendered with a 12 mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering.
The ends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-19/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes, and shall project through on the
inside, the benching being continued round the pipe to form a fillet.
C. CATCH PIT
Catch Pit shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to the
dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Consultant.
The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate
resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1.
Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.
Each catch pit shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25
concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound
material. If the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be
coated with an approved waterproofing material.
Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be
of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of
concrete Grade SRC 30.
Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick
SRC mortar rendering Class 1.
All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel
fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen
coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.
All exterior faces of catch pit chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge polythene
membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.
Where indicated on the Drawings, catch pit cover frames shall be supported on solid
precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.
Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where catch pit access opening are less
than the internal dimensions of the catch pit chamber.
The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron heavy duty grating covers
and frames of the quality specified. The heavy duty grating covers in roads and
paved areas shall be accurately set on precast concrete brick-work to the level and
slopes of the roads or pavements.
Testing of catch pit chambers shall be as detailed in Part 6 of Section 20 surface
water drainage.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-20/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.2.07
SUMP PIT
The construction of Sump Pit shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All
cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced
concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete
and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985.
The Sump Pit shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly
in accordance with the structural engineering details.
Sump pit shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats) and
externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm access
manholes shall be provided at the top, with heavy duty manhole covers as detailed in
the schedule of manholes. If the pit is more than one(1) meter depth, it is shall be
provided with galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be provided at 30 mm
centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm below cover level. The
Sump Pit height shall be governed by the following:
a. height between the top of the slab and the bottom of lowest drainage pipe
drained to the sump pit
b. height between the bottom of lowest drainage pipe and the sump pump
switch on level.
c. minimum storage height of waste water.
d. height between the sump pump switch off level and the height of water
required to submerge the pump discharge.
As shown on the drainage standard detail drawings, the pit height varies due to the
above factors, therefore It shall be the contractors responsibility to fully check and
verify as per site requirement for the height needed to suit the site condition.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-21/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
cable to avoid distortion of the gland rubbers and to prevent kinking of the cable
adjacent to the cable entry.
Motor shaft shall be stainless steel and mounted on robust pre greased rolling
element bearings. The shaft seal assembly shall comprise of two independent
mechanical face seals mounted in tandem with an interposing oil chamber to cool
the seals and to act as an additional leakage barrier. Seal combination shall be high
wear resistant tungsten carbide.
Motor and pump casing constructed of cast iron.
Pump casing shall be smooth profiled volute geometry for clog free operation fitted
with replaceable inlet wear rings.
Impeller shall be dynamically balanced screw depending on the pump selection and
duty specified.
Pump set shall be supplied with a control panel complete with breakers, fuses
starters duty/standby pump selector switch, pump on/off/fault indicator lights, auto
change over facility etc. Panel enclosure shall be to IP 65.
Pump operation shall be automatic controlled through level switches installed in the
storm/rain collection pit.
Pumps shall be supplied with all accessories including foot bends, guide rails
stainless steel lifting chains, switches etc.
20.2.08
Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 and shall be of the sizes
and types as shown on the contract drawings.
In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of three types, as follows unless
otherwise specified.
Heavy Duty to BS 497 Grade A
Medium Duty to BS 497 Grade B
Light Duty to BS 497 Grade C
Heavy Duty
All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy to BS 497
Grade A. Reference M.A 60.
The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the
loosely-bolted double triangular type with three point suspension to provide stability
under load.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-22/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
Medium Duty
All manholes installed external to buildings, but not in roadways or trafficked areas,
shall be medium duty to BS 497 Grade B1.
The over and frame shall be of grey or ductile iron and the cover shall be either
rectangular or circular as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shall
incorporate a single seal between cover and frame. Following flushing out and
testing of the drainage system, the sealing groove shall be filled with grease to
provide an airtight seal.
The cover and frame shall be made from grey iron and shall incorporate a double
seal between cover and frame. Following out and testing of the drainage system,
the sealing grooves shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.
In those areas where it is required to accept a tilled floor finish, the manhole covers
shall be of the recessed type. In kitchens or other areas subject to washing-down
manhole covers and frames shall have stainless steel edging and trim. Double cover
units shall be provided where specified in the Manhole schedule.
The contractor shall provide two sets of lifting key for each type of manhole.
Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.
Step Irons
Step irons shall be manufactured from galvanized malleable cast iron and shall
comply with BS 1247 3 : 1991 - BSEN 13101 : 2002 and be of the general purpose
or precast concrete manhole pattern as applicable.
The tail length shall be 230 mm for both manhole types.
22.2.09
OIL INTERCEPTOR
The construction of Oil Interceptor shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All
cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced
concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete
and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985.
The oil interceptor shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions,
strictly in accordance with the structural engineering details.
Oil interceptor tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2
coats) and externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm
access manholes shall be provided at the end, with heavy duty manhole covers as
detailed in the schedule of manholes. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall
be provided at 30 mm centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm
below cover level. The inlet shall be via a uPVC inlet tee complete with access cap.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-23/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
The Oil interceptor shall be installed in the waste line leading from carpark where oil
may be introduced into the drainage system in quantity that can effect line stoppage
storm/rain water disposal. Oil interceptor material shall be concrete with minimum
compressive strength of 4000 psi and shall have two compartments. Access to
grease interceptor shall be provided by a manhole cover over the inlet and a
manhole over the outlet. Oil interceptors shall be maintained in efficient operation
condition by periodic removal of the accumulated oil.
Oil interceptor shall be as per Drainage Department requirement refer to the details
as shown on the design drawings.
22.2.10
The construction of holding tank shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All
cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced
concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete
and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985.
The tanks shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly in
accordance with the structural engineering details.
Holding tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats)
and externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm access
manholes shall be provided at the end, with heavy duty manhole covers as detailed
in the schedule of manholes. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be
provided at 30 mm centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm
below cover level. The inlet and outlet storm/rain water shall be uPVC and have a
puddle flange located within the holding tank wall. The inlet shall be uPVC inlet tee
complete with access cap.
A scum board shall be located at the outlet end of the tank as detailed in the
drawings and a 100 mm cast iron holding tank vent, complete with insect guard, shall
be provided.
22.2.11
DRAINS
Floor drains in car parking areas on the 1st-2 basement parking and ground level
adjacent drop off driveway as well as 4th-5th level car parking shall be square
top(300x300 cast iron grate cover) heavy duty parking structural floor drains, shall be
oven cured acid resistant epoxy coated aluminum body with 100 bottom outlet, top
membrane clamping collar, anti-ponding slots sediment bucket and heavy duty anti
tilt hinged slooted grate, steel hinge pins, grate open area 0.019 m2(30 inch square)
typical to Z-535(reference p108 Zurn catalog)/or equivalent to approved vendors list.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-24/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
20.2.12
The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as
indicated on the Contract drawings.
Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75 mm blinding of
concrete Grade 25 shall first be laid over the full width of the trench.
The pipes shall be laid jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks which shall
be separated from the barrel by 25 mm thick timber packing.
After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Consultant the top of the
concrete bed shall be thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20
carefully placed and compacted under and around the pipe to a height of at least 150
mm above the crown of the pipe.
Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded 13 mm thick fiberboard or
polystyrene sheets shall be fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full cross
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-25/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
section of the remaining concrete bed and surround, and accurately cut to fit the
profile of the pipe.
C. Trenches
All trenches excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of QCS
Section 20-2 and this specification,
Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the installation of the required pipe
bedding, granular or concrete as specified. Generally the depth of cover shall not be
less than 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.
Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table:
Nominal
Pipe Bore
mm
100
150
200
Minimum
Width
mm
430
490
560
Maximum
Width
mm
630
690
760
The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300
mm above the crown of the pipe.
Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of
the Consultant. The contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required
depth with concrete or other such materials as the Consultant may direct.
In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or
within 5 metres of buildings the contractor will be required to execute the works so as
to minimize damage and disturbance. Vertical trench side will generally require
support by timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides will not
be permitted.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-26/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
E. Backfilling Excavation
After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete
surround, the trench shall be backfilled using selected excavated material free from
all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm.
Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it
has been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm. each fully compacted over the
full width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact
backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 metres.
20.2.13
All drain pipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and
the requirements of Section 20 5.3.1 of the Q.C.S.
The Consultant shall witness all drainage tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each drain section to be tested.
The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.
After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Tests shall be in accordance with British Standard BS 6700: 1987.
The tests shall demonstrate:
a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is
of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.
b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet the
specified requirements.
c. That all instruments protection and control devices etc. are correctly calibrated
and accurate:
d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-27/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Engineer. The Client's representative and the Consultant shall be at liberty to be
present at tests and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.
The contractor shall make all records during the tests and on completion thereof
shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The
contractor shall also provide all test instruments together with skilled supervision and
adequate labour for carrying out the tests.
A. Proving Tests
All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down
and thoroughly flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipework system.
After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the
drainage, soil and waste system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow.
Particular attention shall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory
flow when a number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any
trap.
B. Water Test
All drains shall be tested before backfilling immediately after the drain has been
properly laid on the correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to
set. A water test pressure of 1.3 m head above the soffit of the drain shall be
applied at the high end, but not more than 2.4 m head at the low end. The test shall
be carried out on lengths of drain not less than half the distance between manholes,
all to be agreed with the Consultant on site. The lower end of the drain shall be
plugged and the higher end shall have a stand pipe not less than 1.2 m high. The
drain shall be filled, taking care to eliminate trapped air. After repair of leakage due
to defective pipes, joints and plugs the drain under test shall be left for one hour to
allow water absorption by pipes and fittings. The loss of water over a period
measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and noting the quantity of water
required to maintain the original level in the stand pipe. For drains up to 300 mm
diameter, the water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06 litre per hour per 100 linear
metres per millimeter of nominal bore of the drain under test.
All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding
cover and selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface
complete.
C. Air Test
A gauge in the form of a "U" tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of
the length to be tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall
be plugged. Air shall then be pumped in from the other end of the drain under test
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-28/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 20
until a pressure equal to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further
pumping the pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during a period of five minutes.
Air tests shall be carried out after 3 p.m. and all pipework shall be shaded from the
sun at all times. Should an air test fail a water test shall be carried out as described
in this specification.
D. Profile Test
A hardwood ball of an approved profile shall be drawn through all foul drains from
manhole to manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and
W.C's are filled. The diameter of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal
internal diameter of the pipe by not more than 6mm or by not more than 45% of the
nominal internal diameter of the pipe whichever is the greater difference.
During commissioning all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall
be carried out to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and
that they are free of debris.
E. Manhole Test
All manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and
the requirements of Section 20 of Q.C.S.
The Consultant shall witness all manhole tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contract shall also provide
test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each manhole to be tested.
All concrete manholes cast in situ and precast concrete manholes shall be water
tests by plugging all necessary connections and filling the manhole with water to a
minimum height of 600 mm above the top of the benching. Water shall be added at
ten minute intervals until absorption has ceased. No change of water level shall
occur for an uninterrupted period of three hours.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-29/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
20.2.14
SECTION 20
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
1. uPVC Pipes
HEPWORTH
TERRAIN
MARLY
SD QATAR
UAE/UK
UK
UK
QATAR
2. uPVC Fittings
HEPWORTH
TERRAIN
MARLY
SD QATAR
UAE/UK
UK
UK
QATAR
TERRAIN
HUNTER
HEPWORTH
ZURN
UK
UK
UAE
USA
4. M.H. Cover/Grating
SAUDI CAST
GLYNWED
ST GOBAIN
PAM ACCESS
KSA
KSA
FRANCE
UK
WADE
ACO
F.C.FROST
ZURN
USA
UK/GERMANY
UK
USA
6. Sump Pump
ITT LOWARA
NOCCHI
FLYGT
HOMA
GRUNDFOS
ITALY
ITALY
SWEDEN
GERMANY
DENMARK
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-20-30/30
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.0.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
21.1
General
21.1.1
Site
21.1.2
Site Conditions
21.1.3
Definitions
21.1.4
Scope of Works
21.1.5
21.1.6
21.1.7
Program me
21.1.8
Contract Drawings
21.1.9
Working Drawings
21.1.10
Co-Ordination of Drawings
21.1.11
Material Submittals
21.1.12
Material Inspections
21.1.13
Alternative Materials
21.1.14
21.1.15
Safety
21.1.16
Contractor's License
21.1.17
Permits
21.1.18
21.1.19
Protective Finishes
21.1.20
21.1.21
21.1.22
21.1.23
As Built Drawings
21.1.24
Period of Maintenance
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-1/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.25
Connection Fee
21.2
21.2.1
Transformers
21.2.2
MV Panels
21.2.3
21.2.4
21.2.5
21.2.6
Distribution Boards
21.2.7
21.2.8
21.2.9
21.2.10
Fuses
21.2.11
Motor Starters
21.2.12
21.2.13
21.2.14
Cables
21.2.15
Conduits
21.2.16
21.2.17
Electrical Ducts
21.2.18
Light Fittings
21.2.19
Wiring Accessories
21.2.20
21.2.21
Emergency Lighting
21.1.22
21.2.23
21.2.24
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-2/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.25
21.2.26
21.2.27
21.2.28
21.2.29
21.2.30
21.2.31
21.2.32
Spare
21.2.33
21.2.34
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-3/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
21.1
SECTION 21
GENERAL
21.1.1 SITE
For site location, refer to the Project Drawing and Specifications.
21.1.3 DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:
1. Site: The Locations where the works are to be carried out.
2. Contractor: The Contractor to be appointed for the works covered by this
section of the specification.
3. Consultant: The Clients appointed representative and advocate with regards
performance of these works and the Author of this specification document.
4. QGEWC: Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation
5. OOREDOO: Qatar Telecommunication Company
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-4/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-5/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-6/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
8. HVAC Plant: Provide the power & controls wiring to all the items of HVAC
plant within the development as described within this specification and as
shown upon the drawings.
9. Lighting & Power: Provide the lighting & power installations within the
development as described within this specification and as shown upon the
drawings.
10. Emergency Lighting: Provide the Central Battery Emergency Escape
Lighting installations within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.
11. Wiring Containment: Provide the Wiring Containment for all the electrical
systems within the development as described within this specification and as
shown upon the drawings.
12. Fire Detection & Voice Alarm: Provide the Fire Detection & Alarm Systems
within the development as described within this specification and as shown
upon the drawings.
13. Security System: Provide the CCTV, Access Control & Intruder Alarm
installations within the development as described within this specification and
as shown upon the drawings.
14. Audio-Visual System: Provide the Audio-Visual System installations within
the development as described within this specification and as shown upon
the drawings.
15. Telecom & Data: Provide the Telecom & Data networks and installations
within the development as described within this specification and as shown
upon the drawings.
16. Standby Generation: Provide a complete Standby Generator installation
within the development inclusive of the change-over switch gear and
essential power distribution within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.
17. Uninterruptible Power Supplies: Provide the UPS units, power distribution
and connections installations within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.
18. Earthing & Lightning Protection: Provide the earthing networks,
conductors, connections & bonds for the complete Earthing & Lightning
Protection systems within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-7/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-8/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
NOTE:
All the equipment and accessories shall be fully rated and compatible with the above
Qatar electricity supply parameters. No other variants will be permissible i.e.,
220/380 V or 115/220 V etc. equipments will be summarily rejected.
Throughout this specification and on the drawings references are made to the
ranges of nominal voltages (rms values for ac) and these are defined as follows:
1. Extra Low Voltage (ELV): Normally not exceeding 50 V between the
Conductors or to Earth.
2. Low Voltage (LV): Normally exceeding Low voltage but not exceeding 250 V
between Conductors or to Earth.
3. Medium Voltage (MV): Normally exceeding 250 Volts but not exceeding 650
Volts, whether between the Conductors or any conductor and Earth.
4. High Voltage (HV): Normally exceeding 650 Volts between conductors or
between any Conductor and Earth.
21.1.7 PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on the CPM (Critical Path
Method or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations
to complete the project on time. The following construction milestone dates shall be
highlighted in the Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Distribution Equipment
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Light Fixtures
9. Testing
10. Power-on dates for each phase of the works for both temporary and
permanent power supplies.
11. Commissioning and Handing Over.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-9/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-10/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the QGEWC Regulations.
Submittal Number
Equipment / Model Number
Manufacturer / Local Agent
Date of Approval
Date of Order / Order Number
Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
ETA on Site
Status as at the date of the Report
b. Equipment Supply
All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The Contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. 3. above).
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-11/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
In case of any item/s required to be purchased direct from outside the country (only
for valid reasons) then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and
obtain prior and specific written approval from the consultant.
d. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, that require
amendments or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., then the
contractor shall discuss the matter with the Consultant and obtain an approved
readily available alternative. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal
based on the Consultants advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed
to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-12/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.1.15 SAFETY
The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary safety procedures at site to protect
manpower and machinery. Temporary electricity supplies either generated on-site or
obtained from supply authorities shall be effectively earthed and protected with
suitable earth leakage circuit breakers.
The socket outlets used for construction shall have enclosures and construction with
ingress protection rating IP67, and shall be of the industrial type with suitable plugs
etc. to comply with BS EN 60309. The cables and socket outlets shall be protected
against mechanical damage at site. The assembly of the socket outlets shall be
properly wired and mounted on purpose made racks fabricated out of sheet steel
and angle iron. These racks shall be securely fixed on the wall at convenient places
and shall also be earthed. Wooden racks will not be allowed to be used for this
temporary supply.
The cables shall also be properly supported on the wall. Only those wires used for
the final connections from the socket outlets to the tools will be allowed to lie on the
floor preferably protected against mechanical damage.
The Contractor shall provide single line wiring scheme for the construction site
temporary power supplies for the approval of the Consultant and carry out the works
strictly in accordance with QGEWC Regulations.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-13/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.1.17 PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the relevant authorities, a
minimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully
responsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site
as well as for any works in connection with others.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-14/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The Contractor or his representative shall before shipment inspect all materials and
equipment to ensure that the finishes are in accordance with the specifications and
protected against deterioration.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-15/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2.
3.
4.
5.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-16/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.00
21.2.01
TRANSFOMERS
1) SCOPE
a. This specification details about the requirements for design, manufacture,
testing, transporting, and delivery of 11/0.433KV Cast Resin (Dry Type)
distribution transformers,
b. The transformers shall be two winding, cast resin, natural air cooled (without
any forced ventilation) with metallic enclosure, and connected through
bushings in cable boxes.
c. The transformers are intended to be installed in Indoor Applications, in nonair conditioned rooms. These transformers need to withstand the harsh
ambient and climatic conditions prevailing in the state of Qatar, as specified
in subsequent sections.
d. The rated capacities of the transformers shall be 1600KVA for continuous
service at 50 Hz to transform energy from 11kV (nominal) to 415/240V
(nominal).
2) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The following conditions prevail throughout in the State of Qatar
a. Altitude - low lying, generally close to sea level, no part exceeding 100m
above sea level.
b. Maximum air temperature 50oC ( 46oC typical).
c. Minimum air temperature 0oC ( 10oC typical)
d. Mean maximum summer air temperature, 45oC typical.
e. Mean maximum exposed sunlight temperature, 75oC
f. Solar radiation- peak, 1030 Watts/sq.m.
g. Humidity - 100% humidity is common throughout the year and may occur at
air temperature of 30oC or more.
h. Rainfall - very low on average. The winter season may bring infrequent very
heavy rainfall.
i. General atmospheric conditions: A hot atmosphere containing very fine,
highly penetrating dust particles. In parts the atmosphere contains a highly
corrosive salt laden sea mist. Prevailing winds generally from the north west,
mostly light but occasionally gusting in excess of 30 knots
3) SYSTEM CONDITIONS
The 11kV system has three phase, 3-wire system with star point earthed through
earthing transformer at 66/11KV primary sub-station.
1. Nominal Voltage
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
11kV
S-21-17/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Maximum Voltage
Maximum Symmetrical fault level
Limited earth fault current through earthing transformer
Impulse Voltage
Rated Frequency
12kV
25KA
4.5KA
75kV
50 Hz
The LV System has 5 wires i.e. 3 Phase + Neutral + Earth. Neutral and earth is
directly shorted at the Distribution Substation end. A consumer earth terminal is
provided.
1. Nominal Voltage
2. Highest Symmetrical fault level
3. The highest fuse rating(at LV Distribution Feeder Pillars)
415/240V
44kA
400 A
4) APPLICABLE STANDARDS
This Specification makes reference to the following documents:
Transformers
IEC 60076-11
IEC 60076
IEC 60076-10
IEC 60905
BS 2562
BS 6435
ISO 8501-1 to 4
and r
BS 381C 1980
BS EN ISO 1460
BS EN ISO 1461
ISO 2081
ISO 2063
BS 2569-2
ISO 4628-1 to 5
ISO 9227
ISO 1519
ISO 2808
ISO 2409
ISO 1520
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-18/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
ISO 6272
ISO 6270
ISO 11997
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-19/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
e. The surrounding air may contain very fine, highly penetrating, sand dust with
highly corrosive salt laden sea mist.
f. The maximum temperature rises of the windings shall not exceed by 850K
over an ambient temperature of 500C, when fully loaded inside in the
specified enclosure (along with vermin screen), without forced ventilation.
2) Ratings
a. Rated Power of Transformers : 500KVA/1000KVA/1600KVA
b. IP protection of Enclosure : IP23D + Vermin screen (not less than 2mm
aperture)
c. IK protection of Enclosure : not less than IK7 (2.0 joules)
d. Ventilation : Natural air cooling-AN (no forced ventilation)
e. Th. Insul. class of windings(HV/LV) : Class F/F
f. Winding material (HV/LV) : CU/CU
g. Voltage ratio : 11000/433V
h. No. of phases : 3-Phase
i. Connections : Delta- Star, as per vector group Dyn11
j. Rated frequency : 50HZ
k. Rated voltage (U) : 11kV
l. Maximum flux density : 1.6 Tesla at normal voltage and frequency
m. No-load current : 1% of transformer rated current
n. Tapping range & steps : +5% to -5%, in 4-steps each of 2.5%
o. Rated Insulation Levels
Parameter Name
Rated Voltage(U)
Rated Highest
Withstand Voltage(Um)
Rated Lightening Impulse
Withstand Voltage (peak)
Rated Power frequency
withstand voltage
HV Side
11KV
12kV
LV Side
433/250V (at no load)
1.1kV
75Kv
28kV
3kV
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-20/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-21/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b) The maximum values of sound pressure and sound power levels, measured
at a distance of 1 meter from the principal radiating surface, are as
mentioned below
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Dry-Type transformer
Compliance standards reference
Manufacturer Name
Manufacturers serial number
Month & Year of manufacture
KM Contact/Tender number
Insulation system temperature of each winding
Number of phases
Rated frequency
Rated voltage including tapping voltages
Rated current
Connection symbol
Short circuit impedance at 750C
Type of cooling
Insulation Levels
Degree of Protection
S-21-22/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
q.
r.
s.
t.
Environmental class
Climatic class
Fire behavior class
Total mass with and without enclosure
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
The core shall be pressed and banded and shall be clamped and bolted at
the top and bottom in such a manner as to ensure that no distortion shall take
place when the transformer is subjected to magneto motive forces equivalent
to those which would be present in the event of a total short circuit being
applied across the low voltage terminal with an infinite power supply at
normal voltage and frequency available, at the high voltage terminals.
S-21-23/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
g. All bus-bars shall be made of hard drawn high purity electrolytic copper with
electro-tin plating.
2) Windings
a. The HV windings of the transformers shall be made of high purity electrical
grade copper wire and shall be totally encapsulated in a glass-fiber reinforced
resin-cast insulation. The casting shall be made under vacuum in such a
manner that all air shall be totally evacuated from casting.
b. The casting shall be such that the composite structure shall have sufficient
resilience strength against stresses developed due to differences in coefficient of thermal expansions between insulation materials and copper.
c. Laying pattern of HV winding wires shall ensure to achieve superior linear
lightening voltage distribution characteristics
d. LV windings shall be made of copper foil with impregnated type interlayer
insulation. The interlayer insulation shall be made of solid polyester foil with
impregnated fiber glass film which thermo-sets by curing, or by an equivalent
process having same or higher performance levels.
e. Sufficient numbers of cooling channels shall be provided in both the LV and
HV windings to restrict the temperature rise of the windings within the
specified values and thereby minimizing the damage due to hot spot. The
cooling channels are arranged in a vertical manner and all coils have even
surface to minimize dust accumulation and to give maximum cooling
efficiency.
f.
The completed winding stack assembly and connections shall have sufficient
mechanical rigidity to ensure no distortion or movement of any one winding,
or to any other winding or section of windings, shall take place when the
transformers is subjected to the short circuit stresses created by a total short
circuit at the low voltage terminals with an infinite power supply at normal
voltage and frequency available for two seconds at the high voltage
terminals.
g. Sufficient barriers shall be provided between windings and core, and between
HV and LV windings.
h. The winding insulation shall be such that the transformer may be operated at
155 C with no deterioration of the insulation properties as per IEC 60076-11
requirements. It shall comply with the requirements of Class F/F insulating
materials.
i.
The high voltage and low voltage connections shall be brought out on
opposite sides of the transformer
j.
The windings shall be connected Delta Star in accordance with Vector Group
reference Dyn11.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-24/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
k. All leads or bars from windings to the termination points, shall be rigidly
supported. Stresses on coils and connections must be avoided.
l.
3) Enclosure
a. The Transformer shall be contained in a sheet steel ventilated enclosure
suitable for indoor service. The overall limiting dimensions of the enclosure
and fittings attached there-in shall not exceed the values specified below:
i. Length: 2300 mm
ii. Width : 1500 mm (excluding cable boxes)
iii. Height: 2300 mm.
b. The enclosure degree of protection shall not be less than IP 23D including its
bottom surface.
However, all ventilation louvers and other openings (if any) at top, sides, or
bottom of enclosure should be closed with strong non-corrosive metallic
vermin screens (aperture size not more than 2mm dia). If so desired, number
of ventilation louvers may be increased to take care of ventilation
requirements, but these must be closed with vermin proof metallic screens.
c. All side panels and top of the enclosure shall be removable type using
standard metric spanners. No handles or other aids to easy removal of
panels shall be employed. All bolts & nuts shall be electro-plated to prevent
from corrosion.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-25/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-26/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-27/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
6) Cable Boxes
a. 1)-generally comply with the requirements of BS 2562 and, where applicable BS
6435. The details are as explained in APPENDICES-A, B & C.
b. 2)- High Voltage and low voltage cable boxes shall be mounted on opposite sides
of the transformer.
c. HV & LV Cable boxes shall be suitable for vertical bottom entry of cables.
However LV cable box shall also have suitable facility (in addition to this bottom
cable entry) for top entry bus-bar connections, when required. [Note: Busconnections shall be made through cable box only, they should not be made
through top of enclosure directly]
d. The bushing heights of HV and LV shall be 1320 mm from the enclosure base to
centre of bushings assembly.
e. The construction shall be such that the accumulation of water is avoided and the
box is effectively sealed against weather and insects
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-28/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
f.
SECTION 21
The minimum size of any fixing stud or bolt for securing a front cover plate shall
be M10 mild steel. All bolts used in assembly of cables boxes or enclosure shall
be electroplated for corrosion protection
g. Gaskets, where applicable shall be of nitrile rubber-bonded cork and shall not be
less than 5mm thick. [Note: Neoprene based cork gaskets are not to be used]
7) QUALITY CONTROL
The manufacturer of the equipment specified shall possess certification, issued by a
body authorized to do so, which indicates that the manufacturing unit operates to a
standard equivalent to ISO 9001. Copies of valid ISO 9001 certificates need to be
submitted along with tender documents.
8) TESTS
1) General
a. Manufacturers shall submit copies of test certificates, as prescribed below,
issued from reputed independent testing laboratories. All type tests & special
tests are to be carried out on representative specimen transformers
essentially of the same design & ratings.
b. KM reserves the right to verify the original test certificates & reports, if
required.
c. Special tests for climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes shall be
carried out as per the tests specified in clauses# 26, 27 and 28 of IEC 6007611. A transformer is considered to be passed these tests, when all the
prescribed tests are conducted on same transformer in the sequence as
given in table-5 of IEC 60076-11.
d. Each transformer shall be subjected to all routine tests prescribed below, and
one set of routine Test report shall be attached with the body of transformer
in a strong water-proof envelope, at the time of delivery.
2) Type Tests & Special Tests on Transformer
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-29/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-30/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
between manufacturing date and delivery date should not be more than 6months.
10) WARRANTY
Manufacturers need to provide a warranty of minimum 5 years from the date of
delivery, or 4 years from the date of installation (whichever is earlier) for each unit
supplied, against any design, manufacture, or material defects.
Any Transformer unit failed while in service, with-in the warranty period, need to be
replaced with new unit free of cost. Further, the manufacturer/supplier need to
arrange for fault or abnormality analysis of any units(s) by reputed independent
agencies, when required by Kharamaa and respective abnormality and fault-analysis
report(s) to be submitted.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-31/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.2 MV PANELS
a. General
Main MV switch board [MV Panels] shall be provided for the connection of incoming
mains and / or standby electrical power supplies and subsequent mains distribution
as shown on the single line drawings. The Switchboard shall be provided complete
with all the necessary functional, protective and control devices and be fit for
purpose.
The MV panels shall be constructed to comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and the
internal separation shall be of Form 4B, Type-6 . The panel shall have facilities for
bottom entry of the incomer cables and top entry for outgoing cables. The Panel
manufacturer shall take the above matter into consideration during panel
construction.
The main horizontal bus-bars shall be so positioned within the panel to account for
the most efficient and safe connection of the functional units and shall be segregated
from all other parts by a separate enclosure. The outgoing functional units shall only
be tapped from the branch bus-bar sections.
The panel shall have adequate space for the termination of the cables and facilities
shall be made from connecting parallel cables to the outgoing MCCBs where this is
required. All cables shall be terminated direct onto extension bus-bar sections
appropriately routed, supported and braced from the circuit breaker terminals.
The electricity supply shall be 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz alternating current.
The switchgear and bus-bar system comprising of three phase and neutral shall be
of fully insulated tinned copper bus-bars, including heavy duty shrouds or boots to all
connection joints and terminations. incorporating withdraw able motorized and
manual main Air Circuit Breakers and MCCBs shall be of cubical type having a
minimum fault rating of 44 kA for 3 seconds. The ratings shall apply to the whole
switch board including main air-circuit breaker, main bus-bars, MCCBs etc.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-32/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. Switchboard Enclosures
The Construction of switchboards shall be in the form of multiple cubicles or sections
each manufactured from a rigid steel frame work and clad with steel plates. Each of
the sections will be further partitioned or segregated to achieve the specified form of
separation. The partitioned spaces shall be segregated into:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enclosure.
Main and distribution bus-bars.
Functional units (circuit breakers, metering & protection relays).
Chambers for the induction and routing of cables.
Terminals for connection of external conductors.
The switchboard sections shall be floor standing and modular in construction and
assembled into a single block that can readily be dissembled at the manufacturing
plant and shipped to site for reassembly. These operations shall only be performed
by the manufacturers own trained and skilled factory and field operatives.
Separate sections shall be provided for the devices that follow:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The assembled switchboard dimensions shall not exceed those shown on the layout
and details drawings but in any event the height shall be limited to no more than
2200 mm above finished floor level. As a minimum the installed switchboard shall
have front and rear clearances from nearest walls / columns of 900 mm from the
outer edge of the largest hinged access panel which is fully in the open position. In
addition the minimum clearances at the switchboard ends and nearest walls /
columns shall be 1900 mm as this dimension includes 1000 mm for possible future
extensions. (refer to the approval civil substation).
All panels provided for front and rear access shall be installed on robust hinges
which can be readily demounted by use of a hand tool if so required. The size and
weight of each access panel shall be limited to minimum sizes for adequate access
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-33/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
and be split into twin doors where possible in order to reduce the necessary
clearances specified above.
The switchboard shall be made to be extensible at both ends and be provisioned
with facilities and features to readily accomplish this without the need to remove
sections for modifications in a workshop. At a minimum the bus-bars will terminate
just short of both ends of the panel and be provided with adequate pre-drilled holes
for coupling and extending the bus-bars. The necessary bus-bar coupling plates
shall be provided and fitted in place. The end panels shall also include a bolt on steel
plate cover in line with the bus-bar ends to permit unimpeded extension of the busbars without the need to cut or further modify the switchboard.
Each switchboard shall be provided with a made to measure supporting plinth
designed to adequately support and stabilize the unit where it over-laps the cable
trenches.
Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with removable heavy duty
threaded lifting eyes installed in position on the top at each corner. The lifting eyes
shall be designed and installed to comfortably withstand the dynamic weight of the
MSB section spread over all four lifting points with a safety factor of x2 or more.
The MSB enclosure and framework shall be manufactured of hot dipped galvanised
mild steel channels and plates. The minimum thickness of mild steel used shall be as
follows:
1. Plinths and base framework 3.0 mm.
2. Framework 2.0 mm.
3. Covers and doors 3.0 mm.
It is an important requirement for the MSB framework and enclosure to be designed,
selected and constructed to be rigid and resist distortion or the visible deflection of
mild steel plates caused by reasonable force or pressures. If thicker steel than
specified is required to achieve this then it should be utilised and included for in the
bid price.
All the enclosure and frame metalwork shall prior to painting be first cleaned and
degreased before being primed with zinc spray ready for the application of acrylic
stove enamel paint coats. Two paint undercoats shall be applied before final cover
with a finishing coat. Between each coat the surfaces shall be rubbed down and
washed ready to receive the next coat. Surfaces within the enclosure interior shall be
coloured white while the exterior surfaces shall have a Green finish to BS 4800,
shade 14E53. Minor damage caused to paint surfaces during transit or installation
may be repaired at site by the manufacturers own skilled site operatives. Damage to
large areas of paint or denting of metal plates will require either the switchboard or
the steel plates (if removable by undoing set screws or bolts) to be returned to the
manufacturer for repair at cost to the contractor.
c. Cabling Facilities
Each cubicle shall include cabling and termination chambers for all the cables
connecting to devices to be housed within that cubicle plus any specified spare
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-34/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
capacity. Cables shall not be permitted to gland or terminate at one cubicle en-route
to another cubicle.
All switchboards shall be arranged for both front and rear access for cabling and
maintenance operations.
All switchboards shall be arranged to allow for both top and bottom entry for each
cable plus top and bottom glanding facilities to give full flexibility during cable
installation operations on site.
Cable gland plates provided for the incoming and outgoing cables shall be made of a
non-ferrous material. The gland plates shall be pre-drilled to accept the appropriate
number and sizes of cable glands for the actual cables to be installed at each cubicle
plus the spare capacity.
Where outgoing cables are to be connected to the terminals of circuit breakers then
this shall be achieved by HDC bus-bars extended to the designated integral cabling
and termination chambers where the bus-bars shall include sufficient pre-drilled
holes and space to readily terminate the number of cable cores specified including
multiple cables to be connected in parallel.
All cable connections to bus-bars shall be made via compression type cable lugs
secured to the bus-bars by nut, spring washer & bolt fixings through the pre-drilled
holes. Screw down clamp connections or cable terminal blocks shall not be
permitted.
d. Anti Condensation Heaters.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each compartment in strategic
positions, these shall be controlled by an internally mounted humidistat and an
external overriding ON/AUTO switch
e. Conductors
The switchboard bus-bars shall be fully rated for the maximum incoming circuit
breaker frame size to be provided and subject to a 2500 Amp minimum rating.
The fault-withstand capacity of each switchboard and the assembled components
shall be as follows:
1.
2.
Bus-bars shall be made of tinned hard drawn copper [HDC] bars of the appropriate
cross-section rated for the maximum design and fault currents to be expected.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-35/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
All main bus-bar sections and subsidiary sections and connectors shall be
adequately braced and rigidly supported throughout the entire lengths as
appropriate. No signs of distortion, deflection or creepage shall be visible through the
effects of physical or thermal stress or strains once all cables are connected.
All circuit breakers shall be connected to the bus-bars by HDC bus-bar link sections
and not cables.
f.
Earthing
Each switchboard shall be provided with an externally mounted earth bar made of 50
mm x 6 mm tinned hard drawn copper bar and provided along the full length of the
board fixed to the topside and adjacent the front edge.
This earth bar shall be connected to the neutral bar by means of a bolted and
removable test link positioned on top of the mains incomer switchboard section. This
link is required for the star point earthing of the associated distribution transformer
and should suitable constructed for this purpose. A permanent engraved warning
label is to be provided alongside the test link in a normally visible position to read
IMPORTANT STAR POINT EARTHING DO NOT REMOVE. Label to have red
foreground and white text.
It is important that the test link is installed in position at the manufacturers works to
link the earth and neutral bars.
A combined neutral and earthing bar will not be accepted.
The top mounted earth bar shall be extended into the cabling compartments of each
switchboard section to be provided for the termination of circuit protective conductors
for each of the functional units.
Throughout the entire length of the earth bar a selection of M6, M8, M10, M12 predrilled holes shall be provided in the appropriate locations for termination of all the
cables planned plus 20% extra provision.
An adequately designed and constructed coupling piece shall be supplied to link the
earth bar on top of each section to the neighbouring sections.
g. Operating handles
All moulded case circuit breakers shall be housed in individual cubicles with hinged
front opening doors. The circuit breaker shall be operated by means of specially
designed and robust moulded plastic rotary handles in conjunction with steel shafts
and spring loaded mechanisms. The action of opening or closing the circuit breaker
shall be smooth and precise and the service status positively indicated: Open
/Closed/Tripped.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-36/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The hinged cubicle doors shall be prevented from opening while the circuit breaker is
in the closed position by means of an interlock that cannot be readily defeated with
or without a tool.
The rotary handles shall all be provided with mechanisms that can be padlocked in
both in the open or closed positions.
h. Labels
The switchboard shall be provided with a full complement of labels, tags and plates
that will assist the permit the safe and informed switching or maintenance operations
to be performed throughout the service life.
All such labels, tags and plates shall be permanent in nature and meet the minimum
quality requirements outlined here.
The labels shall all comprise high quality durable traffolyte plaques with substrate
layers revealed by the process of engraving to form the intended label text or
graphic. The material and finish shall be resistant to discolouration and degradation
through the effects of the environment. The labels shall be a minimum of 3.0 mm
thickness and the edges of each shall be neatly chamfered.
Labels shall be fixed to the panel by countersunk brass set screws neatly and
accurately fixed to the switchboard fascia. The use of adhesives for fixing shall not
be permitted.
Prior to ordering any labels the contractor shall present the Engineers for approval
with a schedule to identify all labels that will be produced with proposals for the
information to be included, letter height and colours of the label foreground and the
text.
As a minimum the contractor will be deemed to have included in the bid for 3
foreground and 3 text colours offered in any combination. The label text should be of
a size to be clearly read from a distance of up to 3 metres in front of the switchboard.
i.
Each switchboard may be covered by a type testing report issued by LOVAG (ASTA,
KEMA OR ASEFA) registered test house. The report must unequivocally
demonstrate the proposed switchboard will comply fully the type of construction and
required performance specified. Where such a report has not been commissioned
for the type of switchboard intended to be supplied then the manufacturer must
commission such a report from an ASTA or KEMA test house on either the actual
switchboard to be provided or another of the same type. If this route of compliance is
chosen then it must have no detrimental effect upon the construction programme or
incur additional charges to those contained in the manufacturers bid for the project.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-37/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Polarity.
Earth continuity.
Insulation.
Flash and impulse.
Operation of protection relays, indicator lamps and metering.
Operation of residual current devices to verify compliance with BS EN
7671:2008.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-38/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
documents along with the completed and signed PDI checklist are to be
placed inside the switchboard section within a durable Perspex wallet.
TRIPPING BATTERY
A 30 D.C supply is required for tripping of the MV ACBs through a DC shunt trip of a
restricted earth fault relay. The Contractor to provide for this unit complete with
trickle charger and long life batteries.
The unit shall be designed to operate on 240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz A.C supply and for
continuous duty at an ambient temperature of 50oC and 98% relative humidity.
The capacity of the unit is to be determined by the manufacturers and based on
number of trip units.
One DC supply unit shall be provided per switchboard.
21.2.03
The Bus-bar risers including the accessories, used for the project shall conform to
BS EN 60439-2 (IEC 439) and with the relevant provisions of the 16th edition of the
Wiring regulations BS 7671.
The 5 bar 3-phase Bus-bar risers shall be constructed to the British standards
requirements; with Extruded aluminium housing and side flanges and be suitable for
both Horizontal and Vertical Installation The trunking shall be of the ventilated totally
enclosed type to provided a degree of protection not less than IP 54 for vertical runs
and IP65 for horizontal runs.
All the Phase and Neutral conductors shall be of copper and of same size and rating
as mentioned in the drawings and shall be supported individually within the housing
of the riser and insulated by high di-electric strength sleeves. Class F
The minimum certified short circuit ratings of the bus-bar trunking shall be as follows:
Rating
200A-630A
800-1250A
1600A2500A
kA / 1 Sec.
44
50
60-70
kA Peak
74
105
132-150
kA, N & PE
21
30
36-44
The busbar trunking shall be of the totally enclosed sandwiched insulated type
provided with busbars and with suitable tap-off positions as specified in later clauses.
The moulded bus bar insulation and insulating supports will be made from insulation
possessing flame retardant and self-extinguishing, die-electric and non-hygroscopic
properties.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-39/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Tap-off Points
1. All lengths of trunking shall be provided with tapping positions at not greater than
600 mm center.
2. Each tap-off position shall be provided with covers or shutters to screen entry to
live busbars when the position is not occupied with a tap-off unit.
3. The tap-off positions shall be arranged so that the plug- in connectors self align
with the busbars.
4. Tap-off positions shall be suitable for tap-off units to be plugged in either below
or above the busbars.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-40/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. Tap-off boxes shall be constructed of sheet metal and shall be complete with
hinged lids and entry gland. The boxes shall house MCCB and neutral link and
have polarity and rating as detailed in the schedule.
3. Where tap-off boxes are to be inserted into live busbar trunking, they shall be
designed and constructed so that current carrying metal is not exposed during
insertion or removal and that the box in connected to earth before contact is
made with live busbars. The box shall remain earth during removal until all live
connections are disconnected. The design shall ensure that the tap-off can only
be inserted to give the correct polarity.
4. Where change of direction or termination occurs in a busbar run, the
manufacturer's purpose-made bends, tees pieces, cross-overs, reducers, and
end covers shall be used.
5. Where switches are connected to the busbars through tap-off points an interlock
shall be provided to prevent removal with the switch in the 'ON' position. These
switches shall comply with the requirement in the LV switchers section of the
Specifications.
6. Each tap-off unit shall be fitted with terminal blocks in order to hook up the
outgoing cables. The size and rate of these terminal blocks shall be chosen
according to the prospective outgoing cable size as indicated in the drawings.
FACTORY TESTING
The manufacturer on each piece of busbar trunking shall carry out the following tests
before it leaves the factory:
3.5kV Dielectric Test for 4 seconds.
1000V Meggar Test
A Factory Certificate of Testing and Inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer.
SITE TESTING
1. Before installation each piece of busbar trunking shall be Meggar tested at
1000V
2. On completion of the installation each busbar run shall be Meggar tested at
1000V
3. A temperature heat rise test in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendation/procedure shall be carried out on site.
All test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-41/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. Submittals
The Contractor shall be required to make submittals of the following:
1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions;
shipping, installed, and operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or
elements; and data on features, ratings, and performance.
2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection. Show access and workspace requirements and
required clearances.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Provide Details of both internal and interconnecting wiring.
Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of products compliance with specified
requirements.
5. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
6. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals.
Include lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for
storage at the project site.
7. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and
abnormal conditions.
c. Quality Assurance
Comply with IEEE 18, IEC 60070A and NEMA CP 1.
d. Co-ordination
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with B.M.S data network for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in
this Section.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-42/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
e. Capacitors (General)
Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase
groups and mounted in metal enclosures.
Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallic-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be
encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside plastic container.
Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.
Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in
each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the
following:
1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A, minimum.
2. Fuse Ratings
manufacturer.
and
Characteristics:
As
recommended
by
capacitor
3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has
opened, but is still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the
enclosure.
4. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.
5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid
leakage from Capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets
suitable for type of mounting indicated.
6. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.
f.
Fixed Capacitors
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-43/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
the power factor on circuits being corrected and, when the power factor differs from
the target setting for more than 10 seconds, operate a contractor to switch a
capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are opened or closed as required
to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting. Switch only one
capacitor bank at a time.
Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:
1. Under voltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects
capacitors for power supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. Advance and Retard push buttons on the control panel to permit manually
controlled capacitor-bank switching.
Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty of the
capacitor application.
Buses: Tinned hard drawn copper.
Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting
wiring, and capacitors.
Inductors: Air-core type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching
surges to within contactor ratings.
Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum
fault current to which they may be exposed.
Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel.
Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with
controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.
1. Indicated target and actual power factors.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
3. Mounting: Flush or semi flushes in unit door.
Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting
conditions.
Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit and
the Operating handle can be padlocked.
1. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication
modules, and network interface units, matched to and compatible with B.M.S.
Communication module transmits data to remote monitoring devices. Data
includes actual corrected power factor number of capacitor steps connected.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-44/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
i.
3. The contractor shall employ a specialist and use suitable power monitoring
equipment at each of the main LV switch room locations to monitor and
record power quality. Upon completion of assessment of harmonic distortion
the contractor shall prepare and present a detailed report of the findings to
the contract administrator.
4. If appropriate, the contractor shall select and install active harmonic filtering
equipment to meet with the requirements of the local wiring regulations.
Companies such as Group Schneider or ABB shall be considered for this
work.
5. The contractor shall include within his tender for a provisional sum of QR
360,000 for the supply, installation and commissioning of the active harmonic
filtering equipment only, to correct any main power supply distortion as a
result of installed equipment within the building.
Active harmonic filtering equipment shall be connected to each main LV switch panel
via a spare way as detailed on the LV Distribution schematic drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-45/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The switch board shall be of panel board type suitable for Wall mounting as
indicated upon the drawings and comprise of both an incoming and outgoing
moulded case circuit breakers as indicated on the drawings. The switchboard shall
comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and as a minimum the internal separation shall be
of Form 2b plus ingress protection to IP32.
The sub-main switchboard shall incorporate all the items detailed on the drawings
and as detailed in this specification. The sub-main switchboards shall be installed so
as no operating handle is placed at a height that exceeds 2100 m from the finished
floor level.
The main incoming isolator shall form an integral part of the unit and be of the
moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) type with adjustable thermal and magnetic
settings complying with BS EN 60947-2:2006.
The bus-bars shall be of tinned hard drawn copper type and insulated with PVC heat
shrink sleeves, supported on non-hygroscopic insulating material conforming to BS
159 and suitably de-rated taking into account insulation applied to the bus-bars and
connections.
The equipment current ratings that have been indicated are the minimum acceptable
but the manufacturers standard items may be utilized provided that they are not
lower ratings than those specified.
The switchboard shall contain a suitable earth bar to at which all circuit protective
conductors, cable glands and required bonded metalwork shall be connected. The
minimum cross sectional area of this earth bar shall be not less than the csa of the
feeder cable conductors. Similarly the neutral bar shall be provided of the same
cross section as the live bus-bars. The neutral and earth bars shall remain
electrically isolated from each other.
The manufacturers blank insulated fillers shall be securely fitted to fill and shield all
unused outgoing circuit breaker spaces plus bus-bar connections. In addition the
circuit breaker sections shall be provided with a hinged metal cover complete with
locking mechanisms.
The switchboard shall be constructed to conform to the specified requirements of
KAHRAMAA and the relevant British Standards. The drawings of proposed
arrangements should be forwarded by the Contractor to the Consultant and
KAHRAMAA for approval prior to commencement of manufacture.
The contractor shall be responsible for checking access plus builders work details in
order to confirm that the switchboard is constructed and installed as required by the
KAHRAMAA regulations and the relevant British Standards.
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (ICS) of all outgoing MCCB shall be
equal to or greater than 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.
All outgoing MCCB in the sub-main switchboards shall be of the selective type to
provide full discrimination with the downstream circuit breakers and conform to BS
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-46/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-47/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3 x 240/415 Volts
07Un - 1.3 Un
50Hz + 5%
< 8VA
-25OC to 55OC
-40 C to 70 C
<85% RH
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-48/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
the drawings / circuit schedules. The manufacturers purpose made blank shields
shall be provided and securely fitted to the blank spare circuit ways.
Distribution boards located remote from the Main Panel, or sub-main boards shall be
mounted at a height of not less than 1200mm to the center of the board from the
finished floor level and the maximum height from the finished floor level to the top of
the board shall be 2200mm.
Where single phase distribution boards are specified, they shall be complete with
double-pole incomer isolator and where 3 phase distribution boards are specified,
they shall be complete with triple-pole incomer Isolator and removable / demountable
neutral link. An ELCB shall not be accepted or used as the DB main disconnect
switch for any distribution board.
Earth and Neutral bars located in distribution boards shall have the same number of
connections as there are for phase connections.
All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full rated current of the
associated protective device and shall be of the flat tinned-copper type rigidly
mounted, supported on shock resisting, non-hygroscopic, high-grade insulators with
high resistance to tracking, not subject to mold growth or termite attack with
adequate space and clearances.
Connections from the bus-bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular
conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each
connection to or from the phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing screws,
washers and locknuts. Each distribution board shall be fitted with an identification
label on its front cover.
The label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution boards reference number
/ rating in volts and amperes and the number of ways in both English and Arabic.
In addition to the above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board
giving details of each circuit, MCB size, cable size, the SMDB to which it is
connected and the location etc., The reference cards shall be fixed to the inside of
the distribution boards door within a protective transparent plastic envelope.
All live terminals and parts shall be shrouded with insulating materials in the form of
shields, barriers and applied insulation to ensure that it is impossible for any live part
to be touched while withdrawing or replacing the MCBs. All distribution boards
should conform to a minimum ingress protection of IP 30.
Outgoing circuit breakers shall generally be MCB that comply with BS EN 608982:2006. The circuit breakers with the indicated ratings (calibrated for an ambient
temperature of 50oC) but the rating must never exceed the declared current carrying
capacity of the final circuit conductors.
All distribution boards and the circuit breakers shall be selected and sourced from a
single manufacturer and the same range throughout the whole of the works.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-49/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-50/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
f.
Adjustable Earth fault protection up to 40% of frame size with adjustable delay
between 0.1- 0.4 seconds.
g. Time delay and over ride Instantaneous discriminator
h. Short time delay to be adjustable in steps of 2-10 Times Sensor rating
with settable or adjustable time band between 0.1 and 0.4 seconds.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-51/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.10 FUSES
High rupturing capacity (HRC) cartridge fuses shall be used for overload protection
and short circuit protection only where indicated upon the drawings.
The contractor shall include for the provision of HRC fuses of the maximum rating of
all equipment, in compliance with BS 88 for AC 46 Category of Duty and Class Q1
fusing factor.
Confirmation of fuse ratings shall be obtained from the Consultant before placing any
order. HRC fuses provided on this contract shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer and be of the same class or type to ensure adequate discrimination
and grading throughout the distribution system.
Exposed or Semi-enclosed fuse elements shall not be provided or used. Cartridge
fuses for use in conjunction with lighting and small power accessories shall be
comply with BS 1362.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-52/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
11 kW and below
> Direct on-line starting
11 kW to 37.3 kW
> Star-Delta starting.
37.5 kW and above
> Reduced voltage electronic soft-starter.
REFER TO POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
All motor starters shall be grouped and housed with motor control centre (MCC) panels
as indicated upon the drawings. Each MCC panel shall be provided with a main
incoming MCCB capable of carrying the full-load current.
Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:
1. On load triple-pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed
auxiliary switches. The MCCB shall be mechanically interlocked with the starter
component door and capable of breaking the motor starting current and of
making onto a fault located at the motor terminals. Provisions shall be made for
padlocking the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.
2. Four-pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally
closed auxiliary contracts. All the auxiliary contacts shall be wired down to the
starter terminal block.
6. One triple-pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current (with
adjustable trip settings), phase sequence and lost phase protection. An
external panel fascia mechanical hand reset button is also to be provided.
7. An appropriately rated (6 A) MCB and one copper link provided to protect the
controls power circuit.
8. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a
local/remote/auto selector switch (hand/off/auto) as required. Each starter
control wiring terminal block shall include terminals for connection of remote
push buttons, automatic control circuits and local / remote emergency stop
push buttons.
9. Where more than one motor with a duty/standby (duty/backup) function are
used, the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change duty
upon a fault condition tripping the manually selected duty motor. A duty/standby
sequence selector switch shall also be provided for automatic timed (hours run)
duty sharing between the selected motors.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-53/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
10. Each starter shall be fitted with transformer operated lamps indicating
i.
Motor running (green)
ii.
Motor stopped (red)
iii.
Overload tripped (amber)
11. Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors of
rating 3 kW and above.
12. Each starter to be equipped with labels both in English and Arabic giving drive
designation, plant number and control operation.
13. Each starter shall include the wiring terminals and control relays as necessary
to achieve electrical interlocking as may be specified elsewhere.
Starter units that include manual operation facilities shall have push buttons provided
for both starting and stopping operations, together with auxiliary contacts for remote
indicator lights where specified. Starter units arranged for automatic operation shall
have hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons.
All Star-Delta starters shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks
between the star and delta contactors to prevent short circuiting. Star-Delta starters
shall also be provided adjustable time-delay devices for the automatic change-over
from star to delta.
b. Enclosures
MCC Panels enclosures shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electrogalvanized coated steel plate with a high quality solid polyester enamel electrostatic
spray paint finish.
Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP54.
All MCC panels shall be arranged for front access for cabling and maintenance
operations to be carried out and be equipped with robust hinged lift-off doors (only by
means of a tool). Dust and damp proof gaskets shall be provided around the door
panel edges. Each access door with MCCB located behind shall be fitted with lockable
cam type chromium plated handle that shall be mechanically interlocked with the
starting MCCB to require electrical isolation before the door can be opened.
All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws into tapped
holes and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP2X.
The minimum short circuit withstand rating for the different components shall be 25 kA
for 3 seconds duration. However, the contractor shall forward a short circuit calculation
and upgrade the components if found necessary.
c. Internal Wiring
The MCC panels shall be fully wired internally at the manufacturer works to terminal
strips.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-54/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The control panel internal wiring shall accord with BS 7671:2008. All internal wiring of
the control panel shall utilize 600/1000V grade single core, circular Tri Rated PVC
(heat resistant) insulated cables of appropriate current carrying capacity complying with
BS 6231.
The control circuits live conductors shall be wired using white colour insulation while
the neutral conductors shall have black colour insulation.
All cabling within the panel shall be run within appropriately sized purpose made
slotted, plastic trunking, fitted with appropriate retaining clips and arranged to run
continuously around inside the panel. Cables to items of control gear shall then leave
the trunking slots adjacent to their location, with any quantity of cables from the
trunking to control item being formed into a loom using flexible plastic loom wraps.
d. Fixings
No item of equipment secured within the control panel shall incur penetration of the
main cabinet enclosure for riveting, bolting, etc.
All fixings shall be achieved with adequately sized brass bolts and nuts (or threaded
inserts).
Any fixing bolt visible from the front face of the panel shall be mushroom headed and
bright chromium plated with similar sized visible bolt heads generally used, with the
possible exception of main panel fascia plate retaining bolts which may be larger.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-55/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The intended labeling diagram, text and format shall in all cases be submitted to the
Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing.
f.
Compensated Equipment
Any motorized valves and damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be
arranged such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated
selection and enable manual opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any
compensator unit mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the manufacturer's
purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
The panels shall contain all the necessary devices for the automatic restart of units
after power failure where required.
a. Overload Relays
These are to be used in conjunction with motor starters to provide protection against
overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage
conditions.
The relays shall be selected such that the full-load current of the equipment protected
falls at the centre of the relays adjustment range.
For Star-Delta starting, the overload relays shall be placed on the mains supply
contactor.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-56/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. Control Relays
Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate positive visual indication that
the operating coil is energized. Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally, to
ensure relay is vertical above the base when the control cabinet is in its intended
location. Cable terminals shall be of the screw type, suitable for receipt of spade type
crimped/soldered lugs.
Adjustable time-delay relays used for Star-Delta starters shall ensure precise tolerance
for the timing function. The relay shall have a linear setting scale over a 350o rotation
by means of a knurled knob with calibrated timer setting marks. The relay shall be
equipped with two electrically separated time-delayed contacts, one normally open and
one normally closed.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-57/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.14 CABLES
a. Trunking and Conduit Wiring
Wiring to general purpose lighting and power circuits shall be via PVC insulated
single core cables with stranded copper conductors which shall be contained within
adequately sized cable Trunkings and conduits. The cables shall be of 450/750 volts
grade conforming to BS 6004:2006 and be sized and configured for each circuit as
described upon the drawings and in conformance with the KAHRAMAA regulations.
The number and sizes of cables drawn into the conduit / trunking shall not exceed
than that given in the appropriate tables of the KAHRA MAA regulations. In all
cases, it must be possible to draw-in and withdraw any cable(s) without incurring
damage to the remaining cables. The cables to be used shall be colour coded
insulation - Red, Yellow and Blue for the respective phase wiring. Black shall be
reserved for the neutral cables and Green/Yellow stripe for the earth conductor. The
cables shall be installed on the ' loop-in' system (no through wiring), no joints being
made anywhere in the installation.
Cable ends shall be stripped with purpose made cable stripping tools correctly
adjusted to suit the conductor size. All terminations to fittings and accessories
subject to a temperature rise in excess of 130oF shall be carried out with conductors
insulated with heat resisting material such as Butyl Hypalon or Equal and approved.
Within distribution boards the wires comprising each circuit shall be bound together
and neatly wired into position in an approved manner in-line with good workmanship
practice.
When cables are installed in trunkings the conductors of each circuit shall be bound
together in an approved manner at 600 mm. intervals. In vertical trunkings, cables
shall be supported by means of racks to prevent stress caused by the weight of the
conductors. The overall cross-sectional area of all conductors installed shall not
exceed the 45% space factor permitted by KAHRA MAA.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-58/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
To identify the wires, each phase wiring insulation shall be of the designated color
and provided with cable marker ferrules to identify the circuit number.
No more than two cable conductors shall be joined in a terminal of any lighting or
small power accessory including light fittings. The minimum conductor size to be
used for lighting circuits shall be 2.5 mm2, and for 13 A socket ring circuits it shall be
2
4 mm .
The cable core identification ferrules or sleeves shall be made of a heat resistant
elastic insulating material which shall be white with a gloss finish. The cable marker
ferrules shall not be adversely affected by contact with oil or moisture. Text
characters shall be suitably and indelibly marked in black.
b. Surface Wiring
Wiring for sub-main wiring and large items of plant shall in general be by multi-core
armoured cables run exposed on the surfaces of cable ladders / trays or fixed and
cleated direct to the building fabric as indicated upon the drawings. The cable
conductors shall be sized to comply with the following:
1. Derating regulations of KAHRA MAA.
2. Switch rating of the load.
3. Allowance for 2.5% maximum voltage drop from the transformer secondary
terminals or KAHRA MAA supply point to the furthest most circuit load.
The contractor shall provide armoured cables where-ever specified. These cables
shall be designed for 600/1000 V systems and shall be either PVC/SWA/PVC or
XLPE/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/LSOH type as indicated on the drawings.
Any armoured cable being used at site must bear the manufacturer's name on the
outer sheath and the voltage rating for which it is manufactured.
1. PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 6346.
2. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 5467.
3. XLPE/LSOH/SWA/LSOH cables shall comply with BS 6724.
Cables carrying 3 phase and neutral loads shall be 4 cores, the neutral conductor
having the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductors.
The minimum internal radius of bends in cables shall not be less than that given in
the appropriate Table of the BS 7671:2008.
Parallel cable runs comprising more than one cable shall be fixed by suitable sized
nylon cable cleats at an interval not to exceed 1500 mm along the cable tray or cable
ladder.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-59/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Cables shall be installed as indicated upon the drawings. The arrangement of cables
and the methods of drawing and laying down shall be approved by the Consultant
prior to commencing installation. Where cables are installed in areas or locations
that may be subjected to direct sunlight, the contractor shall provide suitably
approved sunshield made of an inverted 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet and fixed
in position with approved nut and bolt fixings.
Cables indicated on the drawings to be installed in floor trenches shall be provided
with adequate cable racking / tray / ladder supports appropriate for the quantity and
weight of cables to be installed. Cables shall be run neatly and arranged to make the
most efficient use of the space provided within the cable trench.
Cables indicated upon the drawings to be buried direct below ground shall be laid at
a minimum depth of 600 mm below the finished grade. The cables shall be laid as a
single layer on a cushion of graded and washed fine builders sand of 200 mm depth
and shall be covered with another layer of 200 mm depth above it. Cable marking
tape shall be installed on the top layer of sand throughout the cable route. A
minimum horizontal clearance of 50 mm shall be maintained between the cables.
Where indicated upon the drawings cables installed below ground shall be drawn
into concrete encased duct banks to cross below roads, paths and paved / concrete
areas. Concrete encased duct banks shall comprise circular PVC ducts of minimum
150 mm diameter buried at a depth of 800 mm. below ground level and surrounded
by a concrete layer of 100 mm. thickness from all sides, unless otherwise specified.
Cable route and joint marker posts of an approved type shall be provided along the
route of buried cables as instructed by the Consultant. Markers shall be installed at
all cable joint positions and all places where the route changes direction and on
straight routes at distances not exceeding 100 m. The provision and installation of
cable markers shall be included in the schedule of rates for excavation and
reinstatement.
Where any part of the cable is buried in the ground, the armouring shall not be used
as the earth and instead a separate PVC sheathed earth conductor shall be provided
and buried alongside the power cable. The size of the earth conductor shall not be
less than half the associated phase conductor but not less than 16 mm2.
The Contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing of all cable trench
covers, free of charge, during the execution of his work as directed by the
Consultant.
All single core and multi-core main power cables shall be installed with cleats or
saddles when fixed along vertical routes. Small power cables, those having
2
conductor areas of 16 mm and less, shall be installed on trays but segregated from
other cables on the same tray by a space of at least 30 mm. All multi-care / pair
control cables shall also be installed on trays dedicated to controls cables.
All cable terminations shall be carried out using compression type cable glands
designed to adequately and firmly secure the steel wire armouring. All armouring
and all faces of armour clamps making contact with them shall be thoroughly
cleaned during installation and all clamps shall be adequately tightened to ensure
good electrical contact. The installation shall be such that there will be no electrical
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-60/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
discontinuity along the armouring and no local hot spots or high resistances. The
means of earthing the armouring to the earth bar at either end shall be provided by
means of an approved metallic bond of adequate conductance and the bonding
connection shall be as short and straight as practicable. All terminations are to be
fitted with PVC shrouds so as no exposed cable armouring exists.
c. Fire Barriers
Where cable ladders, trays, conduits or trunkings pass through fire-resistant
structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings
made shall after installation be sealed or fire stopped according to the appropriate
degree of fire resistance of the breached fire wall. In the case of cable trunkings or
conduits an approved internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent
the spread of fires.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-61/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensure that
pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried in the
structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and its protection
channel have been covered.
While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable
run in order to take up possible expansion movements.
21.2.15 CONDUITS
a. General
Polyvinyl Chloride Conduits and accessories shall be used for lighting and small
power circuit wiring unless otherwise specified. These shall be concealed in cast
within the slabs, walls and floor screeds,. In areas external to sealed voids where the
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-62/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
conduits are exposed then galvanised (GI) steel conduits and accessories shall be
used. The use of black enamel (BE) conduits shall not be permitted.
b. UPVC Conduits
The plastic conduits (uPVC) shall be manufactured from heavy gauge, rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride compound of the high impact grade. The impact
strength shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 61386. No conduit smaller than
20 mm in diameter shall be used.
The minimum wall thickness for the conduits shall be as follows:
20 mm dia.: 1.8 mm
25 mm dia.: 1.9 mm
32 mm dia: 2.5 mm
38 mm dia.: 2.5 mm
50 mm dia.: 2.5 mm
All PVC conduit accessories shall be manufactured from rigid uPVC of the same
manufacturer as that of the conduits.
Where a solid fixed joint between a conduit and accessory is required, use shall be
made of an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic conduits
selected. When making a joint, care must be taken to ensure that the plastic conduit
is thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure good adhesion.
Flexible joints shall be made using a non-hardening adhesive and shall be used in
conjunction with approved expansion couplers. Conduit installations that become
distorted or flexed through thermal expansion will not be accepted.
Where bends or off-sets are required, these shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturers instruction without altering the section of plastic conduit/s. For plastic
conduits up to 25 mm diameter, cold bends shall be acceptable. The bends shall be
formed with the use of a bending spring obtained from the plastic conduits
manufacturer.
For large sizes of conduit/s, bends shall be formed by pre-heating the tube before
inserting the spring to prevent shrinking. Pre-heating shall be done with a suitable
electrically heated and powered blow lamp (NOT a naked flame) and sufficient care
shall be taken to avoid physical damages of the conduits (deformation). Any other
method of bending can also be considered subject to the approval of the consultant.
Deep circular boxes shall be used where more than 10 nos. of 2.5 mm2 cables are
crossing within the box. Plastic conduits shall not be installed in situations where the
continuous ambient temperature exceeds 50oC or where, for intermittent periods, the
ambient temperature exceeds 70oC; badly formed or damaged plastic conduits shall
not be permitted to be installed. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight
runs of plastic conduits exceeding 6000 mm in length. The plastic conduit shall be
free to slide within saddles to if used in a surface mounting application..
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-63/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-64/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
d. Methods of Installation
Conduits buried in concrete shall have 37 mm depth minimum of cover over the
entire length; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth minimum of cover
over its entire length. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete
with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by
means of corrugated steel saddles and secured by hardened steel pins at 1200 mm
centres. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the joints between
the beams unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.
In the case of cast in-situ applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequate
precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of
all conduits and boxes during the construction operation. These conduits and fittings
must also be suitably plugged to prevent the ingress of foreign matter in order to
prevent the conduit system from becoming blocked during the building construction.
Any additional costs resulting from blockages or damage to conduits due to
negligence or lack of attendance shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Female brass bushes shall be fitted on to all free ends of the conduit system.
Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight
after the installation is completed.
Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until
dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthing system.
Separate circuit protective conductors shall be installed within the conduits in all
cases.
All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted
with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection boxes
must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by the Consultant.
No more than one right angle bend or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs
between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted after
each second conduit length.
Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the section
or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radius of less
than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be machine
made.
The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and
free from burrs and other defects. Exposed GI conduits shall be painted with two
coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-65/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-66/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copper straps
shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, tees etc. The
copper straps shall be fixed on the external faces of the trunking to be visible.
All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at
intervals not greater than 1200 mm dependent upon the size of the trunking and
number of cable contained.
The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material which
shall be secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head
screws spaced not greater than 450 mm.
Where trunking terminates at
switchboards, distribution boards and equipment enclosures, a proper-flanged
coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the enclosure.
Solid end stops shall be a manufacturers purpose made steel sheet terminal piece.
In case of trunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut
edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will
not be permitted and under no circumstance either will gaps be accepted.
Where trunkings passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be
permanently fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends a minimum of 50
mm. beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.
The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of the
manufacturers own clips or bars fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of
trunking, with separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the
trunking.
Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected
to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they
shall be distinguished by separating the cables and binding with insulated tape at
intervals of 1200 mm together with an approved means of identification sleeve
adjacent to each binding that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference.
All connections between trunking and/or bus-bar chambers and to each item of
switch, switch-fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and without
intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom glanding plates of
the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to
be cut to accommodate passage of all the cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with
similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A
laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and
trunking and bus-bar chamber with a slot 6 mm to be smaller all around than the slot
cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.
All covers shall be easily removed with a hand tool and the trunking shall be properly
spaced away from any surface which may prevent this.
Dimensions obtained from site shall determine the shape of purpose-made pieces of
trunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be
provided in trunking runs where they cross building expansion joints and as required.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-67/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity minimum for the installation of any
future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor
of the fully loaded trunking is provided.
Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever
possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with
the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top
and sides of the assembly.
The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure
and below the concrete soffit.
Conduits shall be used to complete the final containment of each circuit from the
general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated and
shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and
rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall then be taken through the
structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various lighting,
power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.
For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used
with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed
on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables
shall be terminated with glands of appropriate type and size.
The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a skilled workman like fashion so that it
presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is
maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.
b. Cable Trays
The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges
manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel.
Aluzink is a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating consisting
of Silicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and zinc (43.4%)
safeguarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A, AZ150 in
conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215.
Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and
spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and
nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the
part of the tray upon which the cables are laid.
The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind
to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be
spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shall ensure that
overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for all the cable trays
necessary to complete the works and as indicated upon the drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-68/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and
shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present
requirements. Cables shall be run as a single layer: Stacking will not be permitted.
Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards or
downwards respectively to suit and shall be anchored with an approved fixing with
spacing and washers such that the tray is spaced at least 25 mm from the surface of
the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each section of
cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the nearest earth
continuity conductor.
Each section of tray shall be securely bolted to the next with sufficient overlap to
prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bends of not less than 450 mm radius shall be
used.
The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant prior
to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the structure
of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shall be approved
by the Consultant before installation.
The manufacturer shall confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable trays
against any corrosion in the Qatar climatic conditions.
Wherever tees or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No
cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be properly
painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviation from the straight shall,
if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose made bends cannot
be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site to the approval of the
Consultant.
All the supports shall be fabricated out of appropriately sized galvanized steel
channels.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-69/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
uPVC pipe ducts shall be installed for the incoming Qatar Telecom(QTel) cables in
accordance with the configuration and methods detailed QGEWC (Electricity)
standard drawing for road crossings and elsewhere as described on the drawings.
uPVC pipe duct continuous pathway systems shall be installed in accordance with
Qatar National Telephone Service (QNTS) publication, with which the contractor is
deemed to be familiar.
Electrical Ducts used for Cables etc., shall be of the following types, as per QGEWC
regulations & Q-Tel standards and supplied by an approved manufacturer.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-70/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
For light fittings fixed direct to conduit systems the cables shall loop-in to the light
fitting via a neoprene bush provided to protect the cables. The cables shall then be
terminated in the light fitting terminal block. No through wiring shall be permitted in
light fittings and the cables that do enter shall be kept as short as possible and be
fitted with heat resistant sleeves. All metal work shall be bonded to earth.
Where surface mounted light fittings are installed, conduit boxes, either of the loop-in
type or standard type shall be installed above each fitting position. Extension rings
shall be fitted as necessary so that the bottom of the ring is flush with the underside
of the ceiling. White break joint rings shall also be provided between the fittings and
conduit box to mask the joints as shall be deemed necessary by the Consultant.
In areas where the ceiling is of the suspended type, the weight of the conduit and
light fittings shall under no circumstance be carried by this type of ceiling and
suitable independent suspension fixings shall be provided and installed by the con
tractor to carry the weight of the fittings.
All lamps throughout the installation shall be supplied and fixed in position as per this
contract. They shall be of the sizes and types specified. All lamps over 150 W shall
be of the Edison screw-cap type. The lamps shall be supplied complete with end
caps compatible with the fittings into which they are to be inserted.
Fluorescent lamps shall be of correlated colour temperature of 3000oK unless
otherwise specified.
Each and every light fitting shall be fitted with power factor correction capacitors to
raise the power factor to 0.9 lag or better.
All lighting luminaries shall comply with BS EN 60598.
The contractor shall ensure that fluorescent fittings are connected to the three phase
distribution boards such that there is no stroboscopic effect.
With the exception of certain light weight domestic and commercial pendant types of
light fittings, no fittings shall be suspended by means of flexible cables. Where light
fittings are suspended they shall be by means of purpose made metal supports.
The contractor shall supply and install all necessary materials and equipment to
provide external lighting as shown on the drawings.
All excavation of cable trenches shall be carried out by the Main Contractor with the
Contractor in attendance. The Contractor shall supply all the electrical cable ducts,
warning tapes and marker posts required to complete the works. The electrical
contractor shall include for the necessary liaison with the Main Contractor in the
instruction and execution of this work. Before excavations are backfilled the
Consultant shall be notified by the Contractor in writing that the cable installation is
complete in order that an inspection may be made of the exposed cable installation.
All cables serving the luminaries shall loop in and out of the designated fittings and
joint boxes. No other intermediate cable joints shall be permitted.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-71/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
An efficient and durable earth connection shall be made between the metalwork of
the luminaries and the wire armour of the cables.
All cables used for the external lighting installation unless otherwise detailed, shall be
of PVC/SWA/PVC sheathed type supplied and installed in accordance with the
relevant clauses of this specification and the details indicated upon the drawings.
b. 13 A Socket Outlets
All 13 A socket outlets shall be of the switched type with 240 V, 13 A rated 3-pin
socket. The socket outlets shall comply with BS 1362-2:1995. Twin socket outlets
shall be used wherever two adjacent sockets are indicated together unless otherwise
mentioned.
All socket outlets shall be adequately earthed, the circuit protective conductor shall
terminate direct and a flying lead shall be installed between the outlet earth terminal
and outlet box. For switched socket outlets exposed to external environmental
conditions or internally in damp areas shall be weather proof (IP65 rated) and
corrosion resistant.
The switched socket outlets shall be provided with integral neon indicating lamp to
indicate the 'ON' status of switch, unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.
All switch socket outlets shall be connected in ring circuits unless otherwise specified
and no spurs shall be permitted.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-72/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
c. Connection Plates
All connection plates shall be provided flexible cable outlets and shall be installed
adjacent the equipment served such as fan coil units, water heaters and exhaust
fans. The connection plates shall be of a suitable rating having 3-way terminal
blocks and brass screws for direct connection of the flexible heat resistant cables.
They shall be of robust construction, of approved finish and of very high quality. All
flex outlets shall conform to BS 5733:1995.
d. Ceiling Roses
Ceiling roses shall be of an approved manufacture and be constructed from plastic
with a white finish conforming to BS 67:1999. All ceiling roses shall be fitted with an
integral 3-plate (high capacity) terminal block with earth terminal to comply with the
KAHRAMAA regulations. Where ceiling roses are mounted direct to recessed
conduit boxes they shall be fitted with a break joint ring (halo).
e. Double-Pole Switches
The switches for window A.C s. water heaters, hand dryers units etc., shall be
double-pole, rated for either 20/30/50 A as appropriate and the selection made
based on the connected load. The switches shall have indicating lamps and the face
plates to match the finished required for the area concerned. These switches shall
conform to BS EN 60669-1:2000.
f.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-73/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection
and testing of the microprocessor controlled and intelligent network fire alarm
systems components required to form a complete, operative, coordinated
system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm
notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control
devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for
Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by
this specification and/or the AHJ. The system shall be electrically supervised and
monitor the integrity of all conductors.
C. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by one of the specified
manufacturers.
D. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed
under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm systems
and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL 864 9th Edition listing.
E. The installing company shall employ factory trained technicians on site to guide
the project commissioning, ensure the system integrity, and to prepare the
system for inspection and turn over to the owner. The installing company shall
employ qualified and factory trained project management to ensure the above.
1.2
SCOPE
A. General
1. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system
shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.
B. Basic Performance
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices
shall be employed on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part
of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y)
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-74/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Eight copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
review.
2. All references to manufacturers part numbers and other pertinent information
herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, function and
quality of a UL-listed system and equipment.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-75/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
B. Shop Drawings
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine
compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power
requirements, battery calculations, equipment layout, device arrangement,
complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, riser diagrams, conduit layouts, and
sequence of operations.
3. Show system layout, configurations, and terminations.
C. Manuals
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and
maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical
data sheets.
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the
interconnections between the items of equipment.
3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the
information required to properly operate the equipment and system.
D. Software Modifications
1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform
all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of
the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.
2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation
necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes
addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system
operation and custom label changes for all system points. The system
structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software
modifications on-site.
E. Certifications
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a letter of certification from the
manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the
proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative in
Qatar. Include names and addresses in the certification.
1.4
GUARANTEE
All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-76/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year
from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials
required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the
submittal bid. A (4) year additional service/maintenance contract shall be quoted
separately per section 1.5 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE of this document.
1.5
A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be
available from the factory trained authorized representative for this project for a
period of four (4) years after expiration of the guarantee per item B below.
B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide
all maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for
unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained
on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance
period. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs
C. will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of four (4)
years after expiration of the guarantee.
D. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the
AHJ and/or local fire codes and regulations. A preventive maintenance schedule
shall be provided by the contractor describing the procedures for preventive
maintenance. The schedule shall include:
1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual
fire alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, water-flow
switches and all accessories of the fire alarm system.
2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually.
3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 72 Chapter 10.
1.6
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-77/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
No. 72
No. 70
No. 101
1.8
B. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of the UL 864 9 Edition
standard (Control Units) for the following types of listed service:
Local commercial protected premise: Automatic, manual, water- flow, sprinkler
supervisory, Auxiliary Service (local energy), and Central Station Service
(DACT).
The Fire Alarm system shall be Qatar Civil Defence Directorate (QCD) approved.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-78/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
B. Wire
1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. All exposed wire shall be Mineral
Insulated Cable (MICC).
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NFPA70NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm
system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire
alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating
Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for
Notification Appliance Circuits.
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-79/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
A. General
Main FACP or network node shall be a fire alarm control panel and shall contain a
microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply. The CPU
shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make
up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors,
addressable modules, annunciators, expansion accessories, and other system
controlled devices.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-80/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
B.
Operator Control
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-81/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-82/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
fire alarm event entry through all currently active fire alarm events, keeping the
originating event concurrently displayed. The system will automatically continue
to categorize and display alarm events as they occur in real time.
12. Numeric/Arrow Navigation Buttons:
The numeric arrow buttons shall be used by the system technician and/or other
appropriate personnel to enter the Access Level 2 or 3 menu structures. From
these menus personnel can perform programming functions, disablements, set
system time, device parameters, printers, maintenance alerts, etc. The Access
Level 2 menu functions are for standard user functions and system operation.
The Access Level 3 menu functions are for system programming and higherlevel administrator operations.
13. Question Button (?)
The Question button shall be used by the system operator or technician to
provide help to describe the particular menu or level the operator is currently in.
Example, by pressing the help button when the panel is in alarm mode will
explain to the operator what is occurring and suggest appropriate action. Fire
alarm systems that do not provide dynamic onboard front panel help via menu
function shall not be acceptable.
C. System Capacity and General Operation
1. The control panel or network node shall provide, or be capable of, SLC
input/output capacity of 800 addresses and sub- addresses at full panel
expansion.
2. The control panel or network node shall support (2) or (4) SLC loop
configurations.
3. The
control
panel
or
network
node
shall
support
(127)
sensors/detectors/modules and (127) addressable sounder bases per loop
totaling up to 254 addressable points per SLC loop. Systems that are not
capable of this SLC capacity shall not be acceptable.
4. The control panel or network node shall include five (5) onboard
programmable Form-C relays with default operation for Common Fire 1,
Common Fire 2, Common Trouble, Common Supervisory, and Auxiliary
functions rated at a minimum of 1.0 amp @ 30VDC.
5. The control panel or network node shall include four (4) onboard Class B
(NFPA Style Y) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits rated at 2.5
amps @ 24VDC.
6. The control panel or network node shall include three (3) onboard additional
programmable supervised reverse polarity voltage outputs (common fire,
common trouble, and programmable) rated at 500mA @ 24VDC.
7. Each FACP NAC, voltage, and relay output (except for Supervisory) may be
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-83/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-84/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-85/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Rapid alarm reporting with digital fire detection protocol supporting 1.5
second alarm response reporting worst case on any given SLC. All
system nodes shall meet NFPA 72 requirements for alarm activation from
initiation to notification within 10 seconds. Systems that do not meet this
requirement and ability shall not be acceptable.
j.
One Man Walk test mode with optional Cause & Effect driven macros for
automated multi-zone One Man Walk Test mode operation.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-86/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
n. Advanced auto-learn feature that learns all SLC loop devices and
addresses, internal control panel and expansion structure, and network
relationship to other nodes. The default learned configuration assumes
safest UL864 and NFPA 72 compliant settings and attributes for all
system components such that the system will not need further
programming to operate in General Alarm mode. This allows the system
to operate out-of-the-box after an auto-learn is performed. Systems that
do not employ an advanced auto-learn function in this manner shall not
be acceptable.
22. The FACP shall be capable of coding control panel notification appliance
circuits in March Time, Temporal 3 (per NFPA 72/ANSI), and Continuous
patterns for notification appliance devices.
23. Network Communication
a. The network architecture shall be based on a communications package
that utilizes a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative highly secure format
and protocol. A node may be an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel
(FACP) or Network Remote Annunciator/Control Station (RNA). The
network shall be capable of expansion to at least (64) panels and/or
nodes.
b. Each network node address shall be capable of storing up to (500)
events. Any network node can serve as a reporting or control node for
another node if necessary by programming the necessary network
routing attributes.
c. The network shall be capable of communicating via wire. A wire network
shall include a fail-safe means of isolating the nodes in the unlikely event
of complete power loss to a node. Loss of a network node, cable shortcircuit, cable open-circuit, or fault of network communications shall
activate a trouble signal on the network nodes (panels and network
annunciators) programmed with the necessary network routing attributes.
The wire network shall include and employ (2) RS485 network ports
configured in a Class A ring topology for high integrity operation. The
Class A ring topology network operation shall communicate in both
directions over both ports and not be degraded by a single break
anywhere on the network. The network wiring shall be a minimum (20)
gauge twisted shielded pairs suitable for RS485 style communications.
The network transmission shall be capable of (4000) feet between each
node. The overall network wire length shall be capable of (256,000) feet
in the maximum network configuration. Systems that employ a single
RS485 port or Class B 2-wire network or that do not perform in the above
manner shall not be acceptable.
d. Network Fire alarm panels or nodes shall be capable of up to (500)
software zones that may be assigned network-wide. Panels and network
nodes shall not be restricted to unique zones. Any zone may be used by
any combination of panels and network nodes. Systems that do not
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-87/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Fire
Supervisory
Trouble
Pre-Alarm
Emergency
Auxiliary
Security
Disablements (Bypass events)
Test (Walk Test events)
Status & Control (system status/panel controls)
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-88/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
annotation of system displays, printer, and history log. The time-of-day and
date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail.
The real-time clock shall have an option for Daylight Savings Time. The real
time clock shall also control panel functions such as Day/Night mode,
Calibration, Alarm Verification, AC Failure Delay, Sounder Timeout, and I/O
timer functions per their respective programmed settings.
4. Microprocessor shall utilize system protocol for efficient
communications with addressable analog addressable devices.
reliable
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-89/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
a. Control buttons: Panel Sounder Silence, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, Reset,
Re-Sound Alarm, Fire Drill, Programmable Function and Lamp Test.
b. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED) indicators: AC Power On, (2)-Fire Alarm,
Pre-Alarm, Fire Output Active, On Test, Panel Sounder Silenced, Delay
Active, More Events, Point Bypassed, General Trouble, Power Trouble,
System Trouble, NAC Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm. Systems that do
not include these indications are not acceptable.
c. Menu navigation and programming buttons: Exit, Enter, More Events,
More Fire Events, numeric/navigation, and help (?) buttons.
d. The system user interface shall feature an easy (5) point navigation
system with built in "help" button with the capability to command all
system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and
field programming. Two different password levels (three Access Levels
total, Level 1 being no password used) shall be provided to prevent
unauthorized system control or programming.
e. The system shall support easy entry of password codes via navigation
system or key switch to easily access level 2 or level 3 command menus.
F. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC)
1. Each FACP or FACP network node shall support up to (4) SLC loops. Each
SLC loop shall provide power to and communicate with up to (127) analog
addressable sensors/detectors (ionization, photoelectric, duct, and/or
thermal) and addressable modules (input monitor, addressable pull-station,
output relay, conventional zone, and/or supervised output), along with (127)
addressable sounder bases for a loop capacity of up to (254) SLC devices.
The (2) loop panel shall be capable of supporting (508) SLC devices and
when the two-loop expander is used the (4) loop panel shall potentially be
capable of (1016) devices by loop architecture, however the panel memory
maximum will limit this total to (800) addresses and sub-addresses for the (4)
loop panel.
2. Individual panels can be networked up to (64) nodes to provide a maximum
of (51,200) addresses/sub-addresses within the (85,000) total system points
possible. Each SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7
(Class A or B) wiring.
3. FACP shall receive analog information from all analog addressable
sensors/detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, prealarm, or trouble conditions exist for each sensor/detector. The software shall
automatically maintain the sensor/detector's desired sensitivity level by
adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation
of dust in each sensor/detector. The panel will assess the sensor/detector
analog data to determine when the fire condition is reached and the alarm
must be generated. The analog information shall also be used for automatic
detector testing/calibration and for the automatic determination of detector
maintenance requirements. See Drift Compensation and Calibration portions
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-90/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-91/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
4. The notification circuit terminal of the panel shall be UL Listed for use with up
to 12ga. AWG wiring.
5. Notification circuits shall be fully programmable for variable use. The outputs
may be activated by common alarm, general event categories, zoned, point,
or logic triggered operation. NAC shall support silence-able and strobe output
options, as well as audible patterns for horns. NAC shall have optional
settings for non-NAC operation such as continuous, door holder, and resetable power functions.
I.
J.
Enclosures
1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface
or semi-flush mounting. The cabinet and door shall be corrosion, rust, and
vandal resistant.
2. The cabinet and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel with
provisions for and electrical conduit connections into the sides, top,
and bottom of the cabinet.
3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other
transparent opening for viewing of all LCD indications. The opening shall be
protected by a plexi-glass or acrylic transparent cover. For convenience,
the door may be removed to facilitate installation of system wiring or ease of
use. The removable door shall have a hinge pins to facilitate quick removal
without damage to system electronics. The bottom hinge pin shall be longer
to allow easy guided re- installation of the door after removal.
4. The cabinet shall include a designated earth ground stud identified with a
label containing appropriate earth ground symbol per UL864 9th edition,
NFPA-70, and applicable building and safety electrical codes.
5. The cabinet shall include a grounding block to receive shielded drain wires
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-92/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Device status
Device type
Custom device label
View analog detector values
S-21-93/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-94/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
d. Walk Test mode shall have the option to have audible or silent operation
of system notification outputs during test modes.
8. Water-flow Operation
An alarm from a water-flow detection device shall activate the appropriate
alarm message on the system display and turn on all programmed
notification appliance circuits.
Water-flow inputs shall have the option of not being affected by the alarm
silence switch.
9. Supervisory Operation
An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on
the system display, light a common supervisory alarm LED, but will not cause
the system to enter the trouble or fire alarm mode.
10. Alarm Silence Operation
The panel shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification,
relay, voltage, module, etc) to deactivate upon depression of the alarm
silence switch. The alarm silence operation shall only operate when the
system is placed in Access Level 2.
11. Non-Alarm Input Operation
Any input in the system may be used as a non-alarm input to monitor
normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority
than fire alarm initiating devices. The following optional secondary input event
types shall be available:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Emergency
Auxiliary
Trouble
Pre-Alarm
Security
Test
Disable
Transparent
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-95/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-96/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-97/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-98/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-99/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
8. The LSA shall have 24VDC power input that can be supplied via the control
panel or an auxiliary UL864 or UL1481 listed power supply such as the of
auxiliary power supplies and NAC boosters.
9. It shall be possible to connect up to (15) LSA units to a single panel or
network annunciator.
10. The LSA shall connect to the dedicated multi-drop RS-485 slave port of the
panel. This port shall be a Class B two-wire serial connection and shall be
capable of distances up to 4000 feet.
11. The LSA shall have throughput wiring provisions for 24VDC Power and serial
connections.
12. Each LSA shall mimic the main controls, LED indicators, and LCD display of
the panel it is connected to.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-100/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. The IOM shall communicate via two wire Class B multi-drop RS485
capable of distances up to 4,000 ft. The IOM shall connect to the panel or
network annunciator slave RS485 port.14. The IOM shall have terminals
capable of receiving 12 AWG wire. E.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-101/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1. The ETR shall be a UL-listed trim ring suitable to support semi- flush
mounting of the control panel. The ETR shall be corrosion, rust, and vandal
resistant.
2. The ETR shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-102/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
H. Dialer (DACT)
1. The Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) is an interface for
communicating digital information between a protected premise fire alarm
control panel and an UL-Listed central station.
2. Five (5) reporting formats shall be supported: Modem IIIa2, Contact ID,
SIA110, SIA300, and 4/2.
3. The DACT shall have LED indicators for Heartbeat, System Trouble and
Phone Line Trouble (one per line).
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-103/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2.5
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-104/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
2. Addressable devices shall be simple to install and not require mechanical DIP
or rotary address switches. Devices shall be digital and able to be addressed
electronically via a hand held programmer.
3. Addressable devices, which use a mechanical address setting method, such
as a DIP-switch, or decade dial (rotary) switches shall not be acceptable.
4. Addressable detectors/sensors shall be intelligent, analog, addressable, and
shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line
Circuits.
5. Addressable detectors/sensors shall provide dual alarm and polling LED
indicators. The indicators shall flash red under normal conditions, indicating
that the detector/sensor is operational and in regular communication with the
control panel. The indicators shall be placed into steady red illumination by
the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An
output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external
remote alarm LED indicator.
6. The fire alarm control panel shall permit addressable detector/sensor
sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system or by using
the software. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust and
alternate sensitivity between Day and Night modes.
7. The addressable detectors/sensors shall automatically compensate for dust
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their
performance via intelligence and control from the panel per calibration and
drift compensation functions. The detectors/sensors and control panel shall
meet the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72,
Chapter 10, section 10.4.3.2.4.
8. Addressable detectors/sensors shall include a separate twist- lock base. The
bases shall permit direct interchange with the ionization type smoke sensor,
photoelectric smoke sensor, and the heat sensor. The vandal-resistant,
security locking feature shall be used in those areas required by the
application and implemented per the manufacturers instructions. The locking
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-105/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
feature shall be optional and can be implemented when required. Both 4-inch
and 6-inch model electronics free bases shall be supported.
9. Addressable detectors/sensors shall provide an integral test means whereby
an internal fire test of the chamber or sensor shall be performed by the
control panel automatically during each 24 hour calibration cycle. This
operation shall guarantee every detector/sensor in the system is operational
with each calibration cycle and any detectors/sensors that do not pass this
test method shall indicate a trouble and maintenance alert on the control
panel.
10. Addressable devices shall also store an internal identifying type code that the
control panel shall use to identify the type of device specifically. The panel
shall identify the exact type of detector/sensor, module, etc. Addressable
devices of different types or variant models shall not use the same type code.
11. Addressable detectors/sensors shall operate in an analog fashion, where the
detector measures its environment variable and transmits an analog value to
the control panel based on real-time measured values of the ambient
conditions. The control panel, not the detector/sensor, shall make the
alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each
detector/sensor to be set and monitored by the control panel. The system
operator shall have the ability to view the current analog value of each
detector/sensor.
12. Addressable modules shall mount in a standard 4-inch square electrical
construction box. Mini-Modules shall fit inside a standard 4-inch square or
single-gang box.
13. Addressable devices shall be capable of accepting up to 14- gauge wire
sizes.
14. Addressable devices shall be UL listed and
analog/addressable control panel employing Protocol/.
compatible
with
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-106/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-107/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3. The ASB shall be programmable to operate from any global event category,
zone, point, or Cause & Effect logic. The flexible programming and operation
shall allow multiple trigger sources for fire alarm, supervisory, and other logic
to support hotel and high-rise apartment style applications, all from intelligent
addressable output control from the panel.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-108/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
4. The sounder base shall include support for a remote alarm LED indicator as
an option.
5. The ASB shall be self addressing based on the host sensor address it is
attached to, not requiring any special device address programming. The ASB
shall automatically add 127 plus the detector address to obtain its
independent address. The addressable sounder base shall operate in the
higher SLC address range from 128 to 254. Systems which cannot
automatically address the sounder base, sounder bases that are not fully
programmable, or SLC that do not support 254 addresses shall not be
accepted.
6. The plastics shall be a PC/ABS blend and shall be resistant to yellowing from
prolonged UV exposure. The color shall be bone.
G. Addressable Manual Pull-Station (AMS)
1. Manual pull stations shall be single or dual action and shall be made of 14
AWG CRS and painted with Red enamel. The words Fire Alarm shall be in a
contrasting color and be embossed text 1/2" tall. The electronics shall be fully
integrated into the manual pull station requiring only connection to the SLC
loop of the control panel. Programming of the manual pull station address
must be possible with the manual pull station fully installed.
2. Manual pull stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed, CSFM
Approved, and be installed within the limits defined in the American
Disabilities Act.
3. The AMS shall have the following features and options:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-109/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3. The CZM shall provide an address point for a conventional initiating zone
(IDC) of up to (25) conventional smoke detectors depending on the model
and brand. Conventional devices with a N.O. dry contact output may also be
used and do not have a restriction of (25) devices. UL 2-wire compatibility is
required on all conventional zone powered devices used on the IDC of the
CZM module. Devices with N.O. dry contact output shall not require UL 2wire compatibility.
4. The CZM shall have a bi-colored LED indicator that flashes green when
polled and latches on red (controlled by panel) when activated for alarms.
5. The CZM shall require a 24VDC auxiliary power source to provide IDC power
for the conventional zone of detectors.
I.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-110/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
8. Systems that do not meet the SOM performance criteria shall not be
acceptable.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-111/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
point control, silence-able option, two output delay options, and Cause &
Effect logic control.
2. The R2M shall only occupy one (1) SLC address. The two (2) outputs shall
be sub-addresses that operate under the single SLC address of the module.
An SLC using R2M shall be capable of (254) outputs when all (127) SLC
addresses are used.
3. The R2M shall operate on Style 4, 6, or 7 SLC. The outputs shall be two (2)
Form C relay contacts rated at .5 Amps @ 125VAC or 1 Amp 30VDC. The
R2M shall not require a
4. 24VDC auxiliary power supply source.
5. The R2M shall have 16 different control states for multi-state programming.
The operating parameters for the R2M shall be maintained in the module
after device initialization and will not require individual control commands
from the control panel during fire conditions to operate. The control panel
shall instead broadcast system-wide commands on the SLC and the R2M or
group of R2Ms will respond based on individual programming allowing
simultaneous group device activations from a single control panel command.
The R2M shall also have the ability to receive individual commands (nongroup commands) from the control panel along with the group command
broadcasts. Systems that do not meet this requirement shall not be
acceptable.
6. The R2M shall be programmable to operate from any global event category,
zone, point, or Cause & Effect logic. The flexible programming and operation
shall allow multiple trigger source options for fire alarm, supervisory, and
other
7. logic to support elevator recall, fan/damper control, door holder/lock control,
and other building control functions, all from intelligent addressable output
control from the panel.
8. The R2M shall have a bi-colored LED indicator for displaying device polling
and control status.
9. Systems that do not meet the R2M performance criteria shall not be
acceptable.
M. Short Circuit Isolator Module (SCI)
1. The SCI shall be provide automatic isolation of wire-to-wire short circuits on a
Class A (Style 6 or 7) SLC or Class B (Style 4) SLC trunk and/or branch
circuits. The isolator module shall prevent addressable devices from being
rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC when used in a NFPA
72 Style 7 configuration. When used in Style 4 or 6 hybrid configurations (i.e.
not fully Style 7 compliant), the isolator module shall limit the number of
addressable devices from being rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault
on the SLC.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-112/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically opencircuit (disconnect) the segment of the SLC that is shorted. When the short
circuit condition is corrected, the SCI shall automatically reconnect the
isolated segment.
3. The SCI shall not require address-setting or an SLC address. The SCI
operation shall be completely automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace
or reset an SCI after its normal operation. The SCI shall have the ability to be
placed anywhere on the SLC and shall not have a limit of how many can
placed on a given SLC.
4. The SCI shall provide a single yellow LED that shall illuminate steadily to
indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated.
2.6
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-113/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3. All water-flow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series.
The electrical properties of the flow switch output shall be a N.O. dry contact
(when in normal non-water-flow condition) rated at a minimum of 1 Amp
resistive.
4. Water-flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but
installed by the mechanical contractor.
5. Where possible, locate water-flow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a
fitting which changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet
from a valve.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-114/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2.7
BATTERIES
A. The fire system standby batteries shall have sufficient capacity to provide power
to the fire alarm system for not less than twenty- four (24) hours in standby and
five (5) minutes of alarm upon a failure of normal AC power and shall comply with
UL864 9th Edition and NFPA72 criteria.
B. Batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid
level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.
C. Battery sizes up to 60AH shall be acceptable and sized per fire alarm system
demands and capacities of the individual control panels, network nodes, NAC
boosters, auxiliary power supplies, and/or external battery chargers and supplies.
D. If necessary to meet standby requirements system wide, external battery and
charger systems may be used. All power supplies and chargers must comply
with UL864 9th Edition and/or UL1481 standards, as applicable.
E. All loading for batteries, standby power, and alarm power for the fire alarm
system shall be calculated and provided for compliance to this specification.
Appropriate battery calculators for applicable control panels, network nodes,
NAC boosters, auxiliary power supplies, external battery chargers and supplies,
and/or other power sources shall be included with this submittal.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation shall be in accordance with the Codes and Standards outlined earlier
in this specification, as well as with all local and state codes, per AHJ
requirements, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
2. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in
finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall
not be installed prior to the system commissioning, programming, and test
period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to
protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage, including
using the manufacturers device dust covers.
3. All fire detection and system devices, control panels, network nodes, remote
annunciators, etc. shall be flush mounted where possible when located in
finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
4. Manual pull-stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi- flush
mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches
(1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor. Manual
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-115/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
pull-station installation shall comply with ADA requirements and all local building
codes.
5. All equipments exposed to weather such as Manual Call Point, Sounders,
Strobes, etc shall be weather proof or installed in a weather proof enclosure.
3.2
TEST
The service of a competent, factory-certified/trained for the fire alarm equipment
shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the
adjustments and tests for the system, during initial commissioning, as well as with
post installation service and maintenance testing, as applicable. All testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 10.
1. Before energizing the system, cables and wires, check for correct
connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and
insulation failures.
2. Close each sprinkler system monitor valve and verify proper supervisory
operation at the control panel.
3. Verify activation of all water-flow switches and verify proper fire alarm
operation at the control panel.
4. Verify all trouble signals for SLC, NAC, system network, system devices and
accessories to ensure proper trouble signal actuation and operation.
5. Verify operation of system ground fault detection to ensure proper trouble
operation and to prove the fire alarm system is clear of all grounds.
6. Check all notification appliance device operation by performing fire drill tests.
Verify proper audibility, synchronization, and tone patterns. Check and
confirm proper strobe operation, synchronization, and light intensity.
Audible/visual notification appliance installation and operation shall comply
with UL864 9th Edition, UL464, UL1971, NFPA72, local codes, and AHJ
requirements.
7. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all alarm zones using the
walk test function.
8. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be
introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing
of the signal at the control panel and the correct activation of the control
points. The system sequence of operations and logic supplied with the
submittal of the fire alarm system per this specification and as required by the
local plan check division of the AHJ, shall be tested and verified during final
commissioning of the system.
9. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's
documentation shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures.
This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by
individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-116/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
functionality and similar. In general, test methods shall comply with the
manufactures instructions and recommendations for the equipment under this
specification.
3.3
FINAL INSPECTION
A. At the final inspection, a factory-certified/trained representative for the equipment
shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
B. The system shall be demonstrated satisfactorily and comply with local AHJ
requirements for Temporary Certificate of Occupancy (T.C.O.) and/or Permanent
Certificate of Occupancy (C.O.).
C. The final inspection performance and documentation shall comply with local AHJ
and NFPA72 requirements.
D. System operating instructions placard or signage shall be installed at AHJ
designated locations for the control panels and annunciators in the system per
UL864 9th Edition and NFPA72. The manufacturers system operating
instructions shall be used for this purpose.
E. As-built drawings and programming shall be provided upon completion.
3.4
INSTRUCTION
A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on
demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system
including program changes and functions shall be provided.
B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a
typewritten "Sequence of Operation."
C. Appropriate quantities of installation and operation manuals shall be provided
and used for instructional purposes.
3.5
CABLES INSTALLATION
A. Fire Barriers
Where cable ladders, trays, conduits or trunkings pass through fire-resistant
structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings
made shall after installation be sealed or fire stopped according to the appropriate
degree of fire resistance of the breached fire wall. In the case of cable trunkings or
conduits an approved internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent
the spread of fires.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-117/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-118/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-119/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
E. Methods of Installation
Conduits buried in concrete shall have 37 mm depth minimum of cover over the
entire length; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth minimum of cover
over its entire length. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete
with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by
means of corrugated steel saddles and secured by hardened steel pins at 1200 mm
centres. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the joints between
the beams unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.
In the case of cast in-situ applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequate
precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of
all conduits and boxes during the construction operation. These conduits and fittings
must also be suitably plugged to prevent the ingress of foreign matter in order to
prevent the conduit system from becoming blocked during the building construction.
Any additional costs resulting from blockages or damage to conduits due to
negligence or lack of attendance shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Female brass bushes shall be fitted on to all free ends of the conduit system.
Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight
after the installation is completed.
Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until
dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthing system.
Separate circuit protective conductors shall be installed within the conduits in all
cases.
All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted
with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection boxes
must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by the Consultant.
No more than one right angle bend or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs
between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted after
each second conduit length.
Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the section
or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radius of less
than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be machine
made.
The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and
free from burrs and other defects. Exposed GI conduits shall be painted with two
coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-120/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.6
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-121/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at
intervals not greater than 1200 mm dependent upon the size of the trunking and
number of cable contained.
The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material which
shall be secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head
screws spaced not greater than 450 mm.
Where trunking terminates at
switchboards, distribution boards and equipment enclosures, a proper-flanged
coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the enclosure.
Solid end stops shall be a manufacturers purpose made steel sheet terminal piece.
In case of trunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut
edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will
not be permitted and under no circumstance either will gaps be accepted.
Where trunkings passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be
permanently fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends a minimum of 50
mm. beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.
The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of the
manufacturers own clips or bars fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of
trunking, with separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the
trunking.
Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected
to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they
shall be distinguished by separating the cables and binding with insulated tape at
intervals of 1200 mm together with an approved means of identification sleeve
adjacent to each binding that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference.
All connections between trunking and/or bus-bar chambers and to each item of
switch, switch-fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and without
intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom glanding plates of
the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to
be cut to accommodate passage of all the cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with
similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A
laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and
trunking and bus-bar chamber with a slot 6 mm to be smaller all around than the slot
cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.
All covers shall be easily removed with a hand tool and the trunking shall be properly
spaced away from any surface which may prevent this.
Dimensions obtained from site shall determine the shape of purpose-made pieces of
trunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be
provided in trunking runs where they cross building expansion joints and as required.
Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity minimum for the installation of any
future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor
of the fully loaded trunking is provided.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-122/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever
possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with
the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top
and sides of the assembly.
The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure
and below the concrete soffit.
Conduits shall be used to complete the final containment of each circuit from the
general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated and
shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and
rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall then be taken through the
structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various lighting,
power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.
For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used
with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed
on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables
shall be terminated with glands of appropriate type and size.
The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a skilled workman like fashion so that it
presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is
maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.
B. Cable Trays
The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges
manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel.
Aluzink is a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating consisting
of Silicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and zinc (43.4%)
safe guarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A, AZ150 in
conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215.
Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and
spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and
nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the
part of the tray upon which the cables are laid.
The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind
to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be
spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shall ensure that
overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for all the cable trays
necessary to complete the works and as indicated upon the drawings.
The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and
shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present
requirements. Cables shall be run as a single layer: Stacking will not be permitted.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-123/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards or
downwards respectively to suit and shall be anchored with an approved fixing with
spacing and washers such that the tray is spaced at least 25 mm from the surface of
the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each section of
cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the nearest earth
continuity conductor.
Each section of tray shall be securely bolted to the next with sufficient overlap to
prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bends of not less than 450 mm radius shall be
used.
The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant prior
to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the structure
of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shall be approved
by the Consultant before installation.
The manufacturer shall confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable trays
against any corrosion in the Qatar climatic conditions.
Wherever tees or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No
cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be properly
painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviation from the straight shall,
if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose made bends cannot
be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site to the approval of the
Consultant.
All the supports shall be fabricated out of appropriately sized galvanized steel
channels.
4.0
B. Approvals
The Very Early Smoke Detection System must be of a type submitted to, tested,
approved, and/or listed by:
1. AFNOR (Association Francaise de Normalisation), France
2. FM (Factory Mutual) for ASD Fire Suppression Release / Actuation by ASAT
Calculation Software
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-124/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D. Route to Compliance
The product / proposal shall provide key features to ensure that the requirements of
para 3 are met.
1. A design and supporting ASPIRE modelling calculations must be submitted
which clearly shows how and why the solution complies with para 3.1, para 3.2
and 3.3.
2. The detector shall consist of a highly sensitive LASER-based smoke detector
and Aspirator. Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilised in this
device as follows:
a. The Laser Detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and
capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying size. A
particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of preventing
large particles from affecting the true smoke reading. Note: The Particle
counting circuitry shall not be used for the purpose of smoke density
measurement.
b. The detector shall feature a dual stage disposable filter. The filter first stage
shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air
sample. The second stage shall be ultra- fine, removing more than 99% of
contaminant particles of 0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier
around the detectors optics. This feature prevents contamination, ensuring
that:
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-125/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-126/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
F. Performance Requirements
The system shall be tested and approved to cover up to 250 or 500sq m for
LaserFOCUS, 800sq m for LaserCOMPACT and 2,000 sq.m. for LaserPLUS and
LaserSCANNER as UL Listing 268.
Principal of Operation
The system will use a high performance vacuum pump with a minimum pressure of
0.7 bar to sample air through micro-bore flexible tubes at near-ambient pressure.
The smoke detector will be of an integrating mass particle detection nephelometer
type using a laser as the light source.
The detector will provide a direct (absolute) measurement of obscuration, without
attempting relative scaling or other compensation for contamination of the chamber.
Samples from all inlets (sectors) will be combined as an overall sample in the inlet
manifold, filtered, and fed to the smoke detector. If smoke is detected and the
obscuration is determined to exceed a preset non-alarm level of smoke density
(TRACE threshold), the detector will sequentially scan the sectors using a rotary
valve to determine the source of the event. If the smoke level is then determined to
exceed a preset alarm level, the detector will signal to the host panel or other
monitoring equipment after a configurable time delay.
There will be at least four stages of Alarm: ALERT, ACTION, FIRE1 and FIRE2 and
another smoke density level, TRACE, set below the ALERT alarm level to initiate the
scanning sequence. It will be possible to set different levels for TRACE, ALERT,
ACTION, FIRE1 and FIRE2 Alarm levels and delay times. The respective relay
outputs and indications can be set to latched or unlatched.
1. Calibration and Ambient Pollution Compensation
Unlike traditional point detectors, background compensation or floating background
compensation algorithms within the sensor will not be accepted; particularly as real
events below 0.03 %Obs/m (0.009%Obs/ft) might otherwise be masked.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-127/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. Flow Monitoring
The control unit will continuously monitor for blockages and/or disconnection of tubes
on an individual sector basis. The unit will enable the user to normalize flow readings
to a nominal 100% for each sector. The unit will have default and configurable high
and low flow thresholds and configurable delays for each threshold.
3. Product specific
The housing will be constructed of a robust metal and plastic materials meeting all
relevant flammability requirements. The unit will have tamper proof screws
preventing unauthorised access.
The unit will employ an in-line filter to remove dust particles from the air sample and
shall enable simple on-site filter replacement without use of any speciality tools. The
HSLASD will allow closed loop sampling whereby the exhausted air will be
completely returned to the sampled area.
The unit will provide a programming facility through a display or PC based software
that may also be used for monitoring and configuration procedures.
The unit will provide an RS232 port to download all the data that is logged within the
unit. It will be possible to view and retrieve all detector and user events or trends
collected over a period of time and stored in the event log. The event log will store at
least 4000 events. When equipped with a TCP/IP module, the event log will store at
least 20000 events.
Programming
The units will be programmed through a software package connecting to the RS232
port or remotely through Ethernet or RS485.
The software will allow at least the following actions and settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
The unit will record engineering values during manufacture and operation such as:
a. Software version
b. Sample flow through the detector
c. Log of flow changes
d. Measurements of sample flow rates for each sector
e. % Obscuration
f. Settings for a 4-20mA output module
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-128/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Display
The display board will enable the following user functions as a minimum:
a. ACCEPT Switches the internal sounder off and acknowledges all current
alarm states while leaving all other warning mechanisms to continue
unchanged. New alarm events will cause the sounder to revert to continuous
operation.
b. SOUNDER SILENCE Switches the internal sounder off until one or more
new alarm events occur.
c. RESET Clears all latched alarms and faults. Current Alarms or Faults will
remain.
d. ISOLATE Disables alarm relays so that Alarm and/or Fault conditions will
not be reported back to the Host Panel. It is intended for use when
diagnosing faults, testing new installations etc.
e. TEST Scrolls through date, time and performs a LED test where all LED
segments are illuminated.
f. Control and configuration buttons Enables all local user-interface
operations, which are also accessible a software package.
The display board will have the following indicators as a minimum:
a. SAMPLE, ALARM and FAULT indicators for each sector.
b. POWER Power supply is ON
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-129/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
c. GENERAL FAULT Detector has one or more faults. Individual faults will
also be shown by specific fault indicators. The FAULT relay contacts will
follow the state of this indicator.
d. GENERAL FAULT (flash on/off) Detector EEPROM is faulty.
e. PROCESSOR RESET Processor has been reset
f. FLOW FAULT Flow rate for any sector is outside the bounds set by the
High and Low flow limits.
g. ASPIRATION FAULT Rotary valve is faulty.
h. DETECTOR FAULT Laser smoke detector has developed a fault
i. COMMUNICATION FAULT Part of the internal RS485 communication link
is faulty.
j. HOLD Unit has been set to sample from only one sector.
k. UNLOCK An access code has been entered and some functions for the
detector are now enabled.
l. ALERT, ACTION, FIRE 1 and FIRE 2 A smoke density exceeding the
respective alarm level has been detected. The alarm LEDs will operate in
tandem with corresponding relays on the I/O board to indicate progressive
levels of smoke. They will be programmable for both obscuration level and
time delay.
m. Smoke density bar graph
n. Status display Display for the smoke density value and all SETUP and
CONFIGURE procedures.
o. Indication of the sector that is currently being monitored.
Environmental
The units will have an IP30 rating and operate at an ambient temperature range of at
least 0C to 39C (32 to 103 F) at a relative humidity of 10-95% RH (noncondensing). The detector will be tested to a temperature range of -10C to 55C (14
to 131 F) and be able to sample air with a temperature ranging from -20C to 60C
(4 to 140 F). Product UL listed for use from 0 C to 38 C (32 F to 100
G. Primary Detection
VFT 15 Firetracer detector with 6 mm micro bore sampling nylon tube shall installed
for 15 channel - inlet specifically design to meet only In cabinet detection with max
50 meter per capillary tube.
Secondary Detection
VESDA LaserScanner detector pipe net work shall be install in ceiling level and floor
voids with ASAT Calculation software
It shall be shown that the system can be designed to provide optimum sensitivity to
smoke but also ensure that the possibility of activating an alarm due to nuisance
smoke can be kept to an absolute minimum. To support this, the system must be
designed using suitable software capable of accurately calculating aggregate
sensitivity to smoke of specified groups of sampling holes proving that the proposed
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-130/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
system provides suitable performance to meet requirements for High, Enhanced and
Normal sensitivity.
It shall be approved to provide very early smoke detection and provide up to four
programmable alarm levels corresponding to Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2 for
LaserPLUS, LaserFOCUS detectors and Pr-alarm and Fire for LaserCOMPACT
detectors. The alarm levels shall be field programmable and able to be set at
sensitivities ranging from 0.025 20% obsc/m with time delays for each threshold
adjustable between 0-60 seconds.
The system shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output
relays, via VESDA System Management software or via Intelligent High Level
interface.
The system shall be self monitoring for filter contamination and shall incorporate a
flow sensor in each pipe or ultrasonic flow monitor in order to provide four staged
airflow faults.
A. Display Assembly
When required, a detector Display module may be located within the detector
enclosure on LaserPLUS systems, a remote mounting box or a 19 inch remote rack.
1. Design Requirements
The display assembly shall feature:
a. A 20 segment bargraph display.
b. For LaserPLUS, LaserFOCUS four independent high intensity alarm indicators,
Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire2, corresponding to the four alarm thresholds of the
detector.
c. For LaserCOMPACT, two independent high intensity alarm indicators, Pre-alarm
and Fire corresponding to the two alarm thresholds of the detector.
d. Alarm threshold indicators showing alarm levels.
e. Detector fault and airflow fault indicators.
f. Faults originating in the particular detection zone (Zone Fault) shall be
distinguished from those produced by the overall smoke detection system and
from those resulting from network wiring errors (Network Fault). LED indicators
shall be provided for each fault category.
g. Minor and urgent fault LED indicators.
h. A remotely mounted Display may be optionally equipped with 7 or 12
configurable relays for signalling alarm and fault conditions.
i. Four buttons supporting the following features:
1. Test
2. Mode/Test - Scrolls through the information on the Displays digital display:
Sensitivity (Fire 1 Threshold setting), current smoke level and detector Zone
number. When pressed and held initiates a lamp test on the individual
display module.
3. Silence - Silences all devices on the system
4. Reset - Unlatches all latched alarm conditions on the assigned VLP zone.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-131/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
5. Isolate - Isolates the individual VLP zone (inhibits Alarm and Fault relays and
initiates Isolate relay).
B. Programmers
When required, a Programmer module may be located within the detector for
LaserPLUS, a remote mounting box, a 19 inch remote rack, or in a portable handheld unit. Alternatively, programming may be performed using Vconfig or VSC
application running on a PC connected through a High Level Interfacing unit (PCLink HLI).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Design Requirements
Programming of any device on the VESDAnet system.
Viewing of the status of any device in the system.
Adjustment of the alarm thresholds of a nominated detector.
Setting of Day/night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings where
applicable.
6. Initiation of AutoLearn, to automatically configure the detectors alarm
threshold settings to suit the current environment.
7. Multi-level password control.
8. Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation. (Laserplus only)
9. Programmable energised or de-energised relays. (LaserPLUS only)
10. Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision.
11. Programmable aspirator speed control. (LaserPLUS only)
12. Programmable maintenance intervals.
13. Facilities for referencing with time dilution compensation.
14. Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.
I.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-132/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. UL listed certification for pipes shall be submitted for the engineers approval &
perusal.
3. All Pipe & fittings shall comply with NFPA 90 A Plenum tubing classified for flame
and smoke.
4. All VESDA pipes and fittings shall comply with wide range of operating
temperatures from 0 deg F to 200 deg F
5. 6mm micro bore tubing shall be fire resistance and use imperial fittings
K. Quality Assurance
1. Manufacturer
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production experience in the
manufacturer and design of high sensitivity aspiration-type smoke detection systems.
The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9002 for manufacturing.
2. Equipment Supplier
The equipment supplier shall be authorised and trained by the manufacturer to
calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air sampling system and shall be able
to produce a certificate stating such on request.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-133/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
5. Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all
hazardous processes.
Each emergency lighting circuit shall be used for the supply, automatic testing &
monitoring of a maximum of 20 no. emergency light fittings per circuit. The quantity
and locations of the panels shall be as indicated on the layout / riser drawings. The
system shall be fully addressable type with individual light monitoring facilities as
follows:
1. Input Voltage: 240V ac.
2. Output Mains: 240V ac.
3. Output Emergency: 220V DC.
Battery back-up shall be provided for a minimum duration of three hours under full
load emergency operation, with a minimum of 75 -100% light output on all connected
light fittings.
b. Mechanical Construction
The battery housing shall be a sheet steel, powder coated housing (IP21) with
removable screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the
batteries and components. The electronics section shall have I(P21) sheet steel
enclosure with transparent polycarbonate window. Within electrical sub-stations
panels shall have IP54 ingress protection.
The electronics module shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries
from the top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming
cables & looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per
ENVDE0100. All outgoing light fitting circuits shall be connected direct to relevant
components via plug-in type terminals able to accept 2.5 mm2 conductors.
c. Electrical Construction
For the change-over module the system shall be built up in a modular format with all
modules being of the plug-in type and encapsulated design. The outgoing circuits
shall be fed through change-over modules. Each module shall be capable of
switching two separate circuits with a maximum load of 3 Amps or 20 Nos. light
fixtures connected to it. Emergency & Exit lights will be connected to each circuit,
thereby allowing connection of luminaries of all switching modes, namely Maintained,
Non-maintained and Switched Maintained in the same circuit. All the change-over
modules will be plug-in type and are no load and short circuit protected with
independent fuses for mains and battery supply and will have LED type status
indication for operation and failure.
d. Batteries
Each panel will have maintenance free sealed lead acid batteries with rated 10 years
service life at 250C and capable of supporting the connected load for 3 hours. The
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-134/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximum room
0
temperature of 25 C. The room shall be air-conditioned using a re-circulation airconditioning system without any special battery room ventilation requirement. Where
the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same in
standard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in a fire rated room, on purpose
built support stand / enclosure.
e. Battery Charger
The battery Charger module shall be a fully encapsulated plug-in type,
microprocessor controlled module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU
characteristics. An automatic boost charging facility shall be built-in to the system
depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging & supervising
via battery monitoring at intervals of 5 minutes or less for failure indication of battery
circuit as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge
of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours.
The charger shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for the battery circuit
and shall be provided with LED indications for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Operation
Charger On
Booster On
Mains Operation
Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%
Charging Failure
Insulation fault
The charger shall also have potential free indicator contacts for remote indication of:
1. Charging failure.
2. Fast charge.
3. Insulation fault.
The charger shall have a push button to test and simulate earth leakage failures. It
shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and
battery accessible via the front plate of the charger
f.
Control Module
Each panel will have modular plug-in type freely programmable control module with
4x20 character contrast controlled liquid crystal display, touch pad keys for
programming and monitoring of the panel & constant memory back up with two year
duration logbook facility. It should have separate buttons for test, function test and
battery duration test. In addition three freely programmable buttons shall be provided
to conduct functions as per users priority. Each control module shall be
programmable as master / slave to access status of the other panels installed on
site.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-135/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-136/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
i.
Exit lights shall remain in the Maintained mode of operation. Dedicated luminaries
used for emergency operation shall remain in Non-Maintained mode of operation.
Sub-circuit monitoring shall be carried out for Non-Maintained lights using a 24 V
monitoring loop within the panel wired to phase monitoring relays in the relevant
lighting DBs (all up to the approval of the Consultant). Where mains lighting in
switched-maintained mode are used for Emergency operation, the switching shall be
coordinated using fully encapsulated switching interface modules such that the same
switch is used for switching mains and emergency lighting. A detailed schematic
shall be presented for approval of the Consultant.
21.2.22
qualifications
in
Data
and
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-137/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
manufacturer that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.
General electrical trade staff (electricians) shall not be used for the
installation of the premises distribution cables and associated hardware.
3. All operatives assigned to the installation of this system or any of these
components shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation
of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components.
4. The equipment and hardware provided under this contract will be from
manufacturers having a minimum of five years experience in producing the
types of systems and equipment specified.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data
For each type of equipment manufacturers data is required for approval including
original catalogues, literature, illustrations, wiring diagrams, installation instructions,
sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes and with full description of components
and operating parameters for:
a. UTP and fiber optic cables
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-138/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Workshop Drawings
On architectural backgrounds the supplier shall submit dimensional layout plans,
sections, elevations, single lines, wiring diagrams, detailed equipment routing and
details that show the exact location and installation details of all equipment and its
accessories, wiring, etc. The drawings shall include signal levels throughout the
system as they were on the acceptance date of the system. The drawings shall
show:
a. Plan drawings indicating locations and identification of information outlets,
Floor Distributors (IDFs), and backbone (cable) riser runs.
b. Telecom rooms (TR and/or MDF) termination detail sheets.
c. Cross-connect schedules including MDF main-cross-connects, Distribution
point cross-connects and floor distributor cross-connects.
d. Backbone (riser) diagrams
e. System block diagram, indicating interconnection between system
components and subsystems.
f. Interface requirements including connector types and pin-outs, to external
systems and systems or components not supplied by the contractor.
g. Fabrication drawings for custom-built equipment
As-Built Drawings
On architectural backgrounds dimensional layout plans, sections, elevations, single
lines, wiring diagrams, detailed cable routing and details that show the as-built
location and installation details of all equipment and its accessories, wiring, etc.
Calculations
The supplier has to submit:
a. Calculation for all systems and equipment wiring, output levels, attenuation
levels, etc.
b. Optical loss calculations for each optical fiber run.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-139/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Samples
Samples produced by the installers or their suppliers shall be inspected for
compliance with the documentations.
Identification Labeling
Samples shall be labeled to identify their intended use and relation to these
documents, e.g. server name, data cable. The identified samples shall be submitted
within sufficient time to permit modifications to me made without delaying the work if
such are deemed necessary by the Superintendent and to provide the
Superintendent with not less than seven (7) working days to make his comments.
Technical Data
Samples shall be accompanied by the entire manufacturers relevant technical data.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-140/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Return of Samples
Samples given permission to use shall be held in site after inspection and used as a
standard for acceptance or rejection of subsequent production units and then maybe
returned to the Sub-Contractor
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum twenty (20) year warranty on
all Passive and active components included in the structural cabling system.
These warranties shall be provided in written certificate form.
B. The system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the Owner that in event of
the demise or failure of the installing certified system installer/vendor, the
manufacturer shall be responsible for providing another certified system
installer/vendor to fulfill the remainder of the warranty conditions.
B. The Contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty-four (24) hour response time
to any warranty claims.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
The cables short term bending radius is 6 times the cable diameter in
operation and 10 times the cable diameter in installation.
S-21-141/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Each outlet to receive one 4 pair cable. Submit sample of the socket for
review and approval.
f.
Outlets shall be supplied Complete with Faceplate from the same Wiring
Devices Manufacturer.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-142/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
750 cycles
100 g min
133 N
00C to 600C
5 to 95% (non condensing)
4.41 cm (1U)
48.26 cm (19 inch)
4.06 cm
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-143/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
f.
SECTION 21
The construction of the cord shall be of stranded type cordage tightly twisted, 24
AWG, 8 conductor. The cord shall be terminated to an 8-positon RJ-45 modular
plug on one end and a 8-position RJ-45 modular plug on the other end for Data.
The cords shall support the transmission requirements warranted to meet
ISO/IEC 11801 Class E, EN 50173 or TIA.EIA 568CB Category 6(10G), Class E
component specifications and standards.
g. The Contractor supplied cord shall be of factory crimped plug at both ends.
h. Category 6 RJ-45 patch cables must be provided for the all project, considering
the structural cabling will be initially used at 50% of its capacity and two patch
cords must be provided for each end to end connection. Whenever possible on
the patch panel side color coded cables will be used to segregate the nature of
the service:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
IP Phone (Blue)
Analog Phone, Fax or credit card machine (Black)
TV (Green)
WiFi Access Point (Grey)
Internet (Yellow)
Back Office or Business (Red)
Fiber Optic Patch Panels Shall be supplied complete with all LC connectors
needed for terminating the Multi Mode Fiber Cables.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-144/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
ports activated within the deployed infrastructure plus 10% for spare. Connector
will have to be adapted to suite connectors provided on active equipments.
b. All patch cords will be provided with different appropriate lengths to ensure
efficient usage of cable management.
5. 2
A. The main distribution frame (MDF) shall be of free standing type enclosure and
shall consist of three parts.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-145/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1. The first part (MDF) is to connect all incoming trunk lines of the Building
Plus 10% spare.
2. All circuits of this part shall be protected against over voltage and over
current.
3. The second part (MDF) is to connect all of the Riser Multi-Pair Cables to all
IDF's with at least 10% Spare Capacity.
B. Terminals shall be identified by numbered tags corresponding to the respective
lines or extensions. The contractor shall submit the proposed numbering
scheme for prior approval by the Engineer.
C. Two sets of the special tools required for MDF wiring (e.g. IDC insertion tool) as
well as test cords shall be provided with the main distribution frame.
D. There must be provision for at least five racks. Racks should be provided with
metallic perforated, front and rear door.
E. All racks must be having a 6 way fan tray with 6 number low noise fans.
F. All racks must be provided with sufficient screws, washers and cage nuts for all
passive and active components.
IP PABX
1. PABX must be provided with a 400 days service guaranty. Any hardware,
software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor within
4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.
2. PABX must be provided with three days of training for two persons. Training will
be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.
3. PABX must include all hardware and software components to ensure end to end
secured solution taking in account the following business rules:
4. The PABX will be IP based and be able to support both Analogue and IP phones.
Only IP phones will be deployed at the exception where ever IP phones are not
available with suitable characteristics (like water proof) PABX must be able to
support wireless phones using Wifi IP infrastructure.
5. The PABX must be redundant for all its functions including voice mail.
6. The PABX must be able to support SIP and SIP-T protocols.
7. IP phones must be deployed using an open standard protocol like MGCP / H323
/ SIP. If not it must be understood / guaranteed that all licenses / software can be
converted to standard ones at no cost.
8. PABX / PABX gateway must be a Telecom Service Provider approved model.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-146/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
9. The PABX must be an IP based IP PABX. The core components of the PABX
must be IP.
10. The PABX must be redundant for all its components and more especially the
core, the voice mail and the gateways.
11. The PABX gateway(s) must be able to support the various and localized versions
of public Telecom service provider based connectivity like ISDN PRI (ETSI) /
QSIG / E1 and POTS CO trunk lines. (NT interface at minimum).
12. The PABX gateway(s) must be certified / approved as per local Telecom
regulation for the required public network connectivity.
13. PABX must have least call routing features.
14. The PABX must be able to support IP phones / Meeting room phones (spiders) /
gateways / ICD from different vendors with different features.
15. The PABX must be able to support analog extensions either directly or through
specific gateways. The telephony features given on an analogue extension must
be similar to the ones given on an IP phone
16. IP phones must be registering in a secure way to avoid any kind of spoofing /
hacking.
17. The PABX must be able to cope with fax services using T38.
18. The PABX must be SIP compliant and must also support H323, H450, H248,
MGCP, TAPI, JTAPI.
19. PABX must be supporting auto attending console.
20. PABX must be able to offer call center functionalities by license addition. The
IVR must be voice XML compliant.
21. PABX must offer follow me features where an incoming call could simultaneously
be ringing on IP phone, WiFi phone as well as GSM phone. First one to pick up
will be having the call.
22. PABX must be able to offer soft phones on PC and PDA. (Personal data
assistant)
23. The PABX must be able to support different codec either in A or low G.711,
G.729A, G729B, G726.
24. PABX must be able to support 3 times the number of deployed extensions
without any major changes other than software licenses.
25. The PABX must be able to support Wireless Wi-Fi phones and offer enhanced
security functionalities specific to this kind of handset.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-147/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
26. When IP phones are used it should be possible to intensively customize the look
and feel using XML based contents / configurations.
27. The PABX must be able to interface with external software to offer enhanced
Multimedia services.
28. PABX must be delivered with an easy to use secured web based management
interface.
29. PABX must be able to deliver usage CDR and to store / buffer them inside the
PABX.
30. The PABX and the voice mail system should offer an external API interface
compatible with market standard hospitality call accounting and Property
Management Systems. This interface should allow the following controls:
a.
b.
c.
d.
NETWORK
1. Network must be provided with a 400 days service guaranty. Any hardware,
software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor within
4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.
2. Network must be provided with three days of training for two persons. Training
will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.
3. Network must include all hardware and software components to ensure end to
end secured solution taking in account the following business rules:
a. Service platforms should never be presented directly to edge devices (IP
Phone, STB) / users directly. It must always go through an application
aware security function performing full packet inspection and preventing
attacks.
b. Network infrastructure should follow the need to know security paradigm
allowing only required communications in the infrastructure, and discarding
any other traffic.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-148/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
NETWORK CONCEPT
1. Network must be hierarchic and composed of at least access and core levels.
Depending on the size of the project an aggregation or multiples core could also
be required especially if there are multiples buildings.
2. Network must be IP convergent and must offer the appropriate performance and
quality of service required to support today and tomorrow services. All network
points should be offering 10/100/1000 Mbps connectivity. Backbone must be
preferably at 10Gbps, if not aggregated 1Gbps link can also be used.
3.
4.
The core must be based on highly available chassis and consist of two
equipments. Core equipments must be redundant in logic and power supply.
Core must be using a passive backplane and pluggable modules.
6.
Network equipments must offer 30% free ports for future usage and 50%
upgrade capabilities in capacity without changing the equipment itself for chassis.
7. All edge network ports must be PoE capable of delivering 15.4W per port without
limitations in the number of simultaneously used ports. PoE switches must be
able to deliver the accurate power on demand and only when it is required.
8. All provided network equipments should be 19 rack mounted.
9. All provided network equipments must be offering an out of band (RS232) and an
in band (SSH / SNMP / Web) management interfaces.
10. All network equipments must be capable to handle two simultaneous software
images with a remaining 50% free flash or equivalent memory space.
11. Network equipments must be offering the following features:
a. L2 and L3 based Vlans
b. Vlan trunking according to 802.1q
c. Vlan trunking/encapsulation QinQ
d. L2 Vlan priority according to 802.1p
e. Trunk based classification, marking based on L2 QoS 802.1p / IP ToS / IP
DSCP / Vlan number
f. Port based classification, marking based on L2 QoS 802.1p / IP ToS / IP
DSCP
g. Input and output policing based on layer 3 and 4 headers
h. Minimum four queues per port
i. Strict priority queuing
j. Unicast and multicast routing
k. 10/100/1000 Mbps interfaces
l. Half and full duplex
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-149/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
m. Auto MDI-X
n. Mac address limitation per port (static or learning)
o. Extended access lists per port or per VLAN
p. Private Vlans with community, promiscuous and isolated support
q. LLDP support in addition of proprietary protocols like CDP
r. DHCP server service
s. DHCP snooping
t. DHCP option 82
u. IP source guard / ARP poisoning prevention
v. Broadcast storm control
w. 802.1d spanning tree protocol, PVST, 802.1w
x. Spanning tree BPDU guard
y. Spanning tree fast reroute
z. Hardware based IP V4 and IP V6 routing
aa. Virtual IP interface redundancy by HSRP or VRRP
bb. Bridging STB
cc. Unicast routing protocol RIP, OSPF and BGP for the core
dd. MPLS or multiples virtual routers for the core
ee. Multicast routing protocol as PIM-Dense Mode and PIM-Sparse Mode
ff. Fast join, fast leave, IGMP-V2 and IGMP-V3 snooping protocols
gg. 802.3ad for link aggregation including LACP
hh. 802.3af for PoE with minimum capacity of 15.4W on all ports simultaneously
ii. 802.1x user authentication associated with radius allowing VLAN(s)
assignments and port security through dynamic access list
jj. 400 Gbps Switching capacity for the core and 100 Gbps for the edge.
kk. 100 Millions PPS in routing (64 Bytes Packets) for the core and 50 Millions
PPS for the edge.
12. Network equipments must be offering the following network management
features:
a. Local RS-232 console port
b. SSHv2 for remote access
c. SNMP V2c at minimum for remote management
d. Radius for centralized authentication / authorization and accounting
e. Syslog
f. SFlow or Netflow traffic accounting capabilities at the core level
g. RMON
h. Port mirroring
13. When doing the Fiber / copper patching in IDF / MDF all patch cables must be
uniquely labeled at each end, allowing easy identification of patch cords usage
and interconnection points.
14. A Network management solution should be offered as part of the network
support. This solution should be able to monitor network components; third
parties element managers as well as systems using either agent or windows
build in WMI capabilities.
15. Network Management should be offering:
a. Configuration management / archiving,
b. Inventory / asset management,
c. Faults,
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-150/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Radius authentication,
Radius authorization,
Performance collection / indicators,
Been able to report fault or performance related alarms using both E-mail or
SMS,
Receive, categorize and raise alarm for syslog and snmp based events
Discovery of network devices and calculate Layer 2 relationships to provide
views of the network by different views including
LAN edge view and a general Layer 2 view.
Topology maps to indicate the discovery and Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) status of network devices.
Tools for creating, deleting and editing VLANs.
User tracking functions to correlate MAC address and IP address to switch
ports.
Path analysis tools to perform path analysis for Layer 2 and Layer 3 devices
using the device host name or IP address.
Change monitoring log recording users and applications which are active on
the network.
Network Security
A Layered approach to Network Security shall be adopted as follows:
Perimeter
Individual network zones shall be firewalled and protected via software antivirus and
intrusion detection applications. End point security shall be provided so as to validate
and authorize wired and wireless connectivity.
Core
Network access control shall be provided incorporating Host ID and MAC based
filtering to ensure that unauthorized communication is disconnected.
VLANS
VLANS (Virtual LAN) are utilized within the switch software configuration in order to
segregate services and increase security between users.
The primary security consideration is to completely segregate the public network
from the Administration network.
The secondary security consideration is to protect the admin servers via a firewall
from the end users.
Additionally, separate V-LANs will be configured for individual networks as follows:-
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-151/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
a. Administration LAN
b. WiFi
c. IPTV / HiTV
Wireless Network
1. Wireless Network must be provided with a one 400days service guaranty. Any
hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by the
contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.
2.
Wireless Network must be provided with three days of training for two persons.
Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.
3.
Wireless Network must include all hardware and software components to ensure
end to end secured solution taking in account the following business rules:
a. The wireless infrastructure must be based on centralized controller(s).
b. The controller(s) must be redundant.
c. Wireless infrastructure must be able to support 802.11a/b/g at minimum.
Depending on availability 802.11n support must also be assessed.
d. The wireless infrastructure must be able to support multiples SSID with all
models
of
authentication
and
encryption.
At
minimum
free
access/WEP/WPA/WPA2 and PSK/TKIP/AES.
e. The communication between APs and controller(s) must be encrypted in a
tunnel or equivalent secured mechanism.
f. Based on the controller model, it should be able to deploy APs in
configuration less mode, plug and play.
g. Wireless infrastructure must be able to offer indoor as well as outdoor
coverage.
h. Wireless access points must be of small form factor, preserving esthetics,
and compliant with PoE/802.3af at the exception of outdoor AP that could
require extra power.
i. The wireless infrastructure must be self defending at the wireless/air level as
well as at the IP level and include some firewall as well as IPS features.
j. The wireless infrastructure should be offering localization services related to
active WiFi end points as well as passive or active RFID end points.
k. Wireless infrastructure must be compliant with local Telecom regulation in
term of power transmission and used frequencies.
4. The wireless access points should be of small form factor, allowing easy
integration and preserving esthetics.
5. Solution must be able to support the following authentication methods:
a. No authentication / free access
b. MAC based
c. 802.1x
d. WPA PSK (Pre Shared Key)
e. WPA TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
f. WPA-2 CCMP/AES (WPA-2 Enterprise)
g. WPA-2 PSK (WPA-2 Personal)
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-152/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
6. The solution must be able to support local user database or remote databases
using RADIUS, Microsoft Active Directory or standard LDAP.
7. Solution must be able to support the following encryption /Key management
methods:
a. No encryption / free access
b. WEP (Static or through 802.1x)
c. TKIP
d. AES
8.
9.
Solution must be able to support per SSID security policies, including access list
and more preferably firewall like possibilities.
10. Solution must be offering build in NAT/PAT features as well as DHCP service.
11. Access points must be available for indoor as well as outdoor coverage.
12. The wireless infrastructure should offer a global building coverage, ROOMs,
common areas, outdoor, back office.
13. Centralized redundant controller(s) to control distributed Access Points.
14. Solution must be able to offer one VLAN per SSID as well as combined VLAN.
15. Support the following different SSID:
a. Support Wifi phones
16. Support localization services for WiFi clients as well as passive or active RFID.
17. Wireless network should be provided with a full as built documentation including:
a. Bill of quantities including deployed room / equipment / part number and
serial number
b. Schematic diagrams
c. Patching schedule including cable references, port number, socket number
d. Configuration files
INTERNET GATEWAY
1. Internet gateway must be provided with a one 400days service guaranty. Any
hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by the
contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.
2. Internet gateway must be provided with three days of training for two persons.
Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-153/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3.
The Internet gateway function must be fully redundant using active/active model
and comprise of one or more hardware or software components from a functional
perspective.
4. The Internet gateway must be including security functions like firewall with deep
packet inspection as well as intrusion prevention system
5. The internet gateway must be able to connect directly to the Internet
connection(s) given by the local Internet service providers. There should be more
than one connection, and should be possible to benefit from all connections.
6. The Internet gateway must be able to offer multiples VLANs to segregate users.
7. The Internet gateway must include a DHCP function allowing user based
allocation of private or public IP address simultaneously.
8. The Internet gateway must offer local authentication through its own customized
web portal. Either an internal or external user database can be used. The
external user database should be reaching either using LDAP or RADIUS
protocols. It should also be able to support authorization and accounting. It
should already been tested and pre-integrated with Fidelio Opera PMS.
9. The Internet gateway must be able to apply different IP address schema (private
/ public) and to limit or guaranty Internet bandwidth according to informations
given by the PMS at authentication time or statically configured.
10. The Internet gateway must be able to prioritize traffic based on define class of
service. By example ensuring smooth browsing / e-mailing while peer to peer
traffic will be shaped.
11. The Internet gateway must be able to offer remote VPN services either IPSEC,
SSL or site to site using AES 128 minimum encryption.
12. The internet gateway must be able to support at least a 100Mbps throughput in
each direction and at least 20Mbps of encrypted traffic simultaneously.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-154/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
SERVERS
All required servers must be centrally located in the IT room. Preferably that all
servers should be of blade technology to ensure space and technology efficiency.
1.
2. At least one blade chassis should be installed to support the different blade
servers. The capacity and number of blade chassis will be adjust based on
the number of required server blades.
3. The blade chassis must be provided with enough redundant power supplies
in an N+1 configuration.
4.
The blade chassis must be provided with a redundant SAN switches. Build in
setup will be preferred.
5. There should be two SAN switches enabled ports per blade server. Provision
for four external fiber interfaces must be done. (Connection to external
storage / external tape).
6.
Blade SAN switches must be Brocade 4Gb SAN for C-Class HP chassis. San
Switches must be redundant in number
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-155/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The Q-Tel approved Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the Vertical &
horizontal cable sizes, MDF size in accordance with Q-Tel regulations.
Telephone outlets shall be of a RJ45 type used by the Q-Tel and to the approval of
the Consultant.
Outlet boxes shall be provided where shown on drawings. Pull boxes shall be
provided according to Q-Tel regulations and wherever needed to facilitate the
pulling-in of CABLES. All internal telephone conduits shall be 25 mm diameter.
unless otherwise specified.
PVC conduit, trunking, boxes and accessories shall comply with the relevant clauses
of these specifications.
Manhole covers for telephone manholes shall be heavy-duty type of a manufacture
and shape approved by Q-Tel.
The scope for the Contractors shall include the provision of all labour, equipment,
power supplies, cables and ancillaries as detailed upon the drawings and necessary
to render complete functioning systems. This shall include comprehensive testing
and commissioning activities
The various components and major constituents of the system shall be sourced from
manufacturers, who have proper and local representation of the products in Qatar
and can technically support the total system through qualified and trained personnel.
The system shall be IP based system and shall be wired independently of other
wiring systems. The contract drawings only show the scheme and location of the
processors, monitors, and so on. The actual routes of conduits wires, trunking etc.
to the various equipments shall be clearly shown by the contractor on the working
drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-156/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-157/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
15. The system should ensure that the image and video being produced is
tamperproof and cannot be altered. The recording shall have an audit trail
feature.
16. System administration must contain different levels of user privileges and roles in
accordance with the users responsibilities.
17. The system must contain search feature of the camera, location, and time and
date.
18. The system must have the ability of long term storing on external storge devices
as well as copying on different external media.
19. The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like
CD/DVD/Blu ray recorders or any other device in a format which can be replayed
through a standard PC based software. Log of any such activity should be
mentioned by the system which can be audited at a later date.
20. The recoded video should be exported in its native file format. (without
converting between format) to maintain image quality and no additional
compression should be applied during the export process.
21. The system must have a hot standby system with automatic changeover in case
of any fatal failure in the active system.
22. The system must have a corrective and preventive maintenance contract or
periodical service level agreement (SLA) for its operational life which include but
not limited to the following;
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-158/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
8. The zoom lens shall provide digital zoom (3X) for a total maximum magnification
of 10.8X. The aperture throughout this range shall vary from a minimum of f/1.3
at the wide angle setting.
9. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas and
level adjustment capability.
10. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
11. The power source shall be IEEE802.3af compliant (4.2W) or 12VDC @ 350mA
or 24VAC @ 4.2W
12. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
13. The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
a 3.5mm mini jack.
14. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
15. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
16. The camera shall have a built in web server so that access to the IP video stream
can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web browser
shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera. The web
browser shall include the ability to electronically zoom the picture at 1x, 1.5x, 2x,
2.5x and 3x.
17. Up to 3 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Camera without any additional software required.
18. The camera shall have built in Audio input and output jacks and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
19. The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
20. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps
or unlimited.
21. The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
22. Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-159/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-160/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
19. The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized
camera units shall not be acceptable.
20. The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of
approximately 400 per second.
21. The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine
pan control of 0.065 to 120/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting
22. The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset positions.
23. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per
scene and level adjustment capability.
24. The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a
single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies
approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2
lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to
control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
tracking mode.
25. The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset positions
in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort mode).
26. The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic
Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual
operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.
27. Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position
accuracy
28. The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may rotate
360 endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the
endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
mode.
29. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
30. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
31. The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
BNC connector for local adjustment
32. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
33. Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture
characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.
34. CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slipring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode
process
35. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
36. The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
37. Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Model WV-NS950 Camera without any additional
software required.
38. The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-161/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
39. The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
40. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps
or frame priority mode (4096kbps/unlimited).
41. The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
42. Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
43. The power source shall be 220-240VAC, 50Hz at 16W
c.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-162/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-163/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
16. The Camera's zoom lens shall have a " format and a focal length of 3.8 to
114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that
shall allow manual override if the need arises.
17. The zoom lens shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum
magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary
from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens
position.
18. The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360 endless panning
with a tilt range of -5 to +185.
19. The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized
camera units shall not be acceptable.
20. The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of
approximately 400 per second.
21. The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine
pan control of 0.065 to 120/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting.
22. The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset positions.
23. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per
scene and level adjustment capability.
24. The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a
single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies
approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2
lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to
control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
tracking mode.
25. The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset positions
in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort mode).
26. The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic
Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual
operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.
27. Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position
accuracy
28. The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may rotate
360 endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the
endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
mode.
29. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
30. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
31. The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
BNC connector for local adjustment.
32. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG:
VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
33. Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture
characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-164/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
34. CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slipring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode
process
35. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
36. The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
37. Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Model WV-NW960 Camera without any additional
software required.
38. The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
39. The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
40. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps
or frame priority mode (4096kbps/unlimited).
41. The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
42. Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
43. The power source shall be 220V to 240V AC, 50 Hz at 90W (WV-NW960, Heater
ON), or 24V AC, 50 Hz at 85W
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-165/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-166/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Monitor
LCD Display
Resolution
Colour
Contrast Ratio
Effective Display area
Input Signal
21"/42 TFT
1280 x 1024 SXGA
16.7 M
500 : 1
337.92 x 270.34 mm
Video (loop-thru) , S-Video (Loop-thru) and VGA
VGA Signal
Audio
B. System Description
The purpose of the access control system is to monitor the access points to the main
entrances of staff areas shown on the drawings for 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The required equipment shall operate as described below:
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-167/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
C. Alarm Monitoring
Area
Input or Zone
Output
Armed
Disarmed
Alarm
Open
Closed
Inhibit(ed)
Uninhibit(ed)
inhibited
D. Access Control
DOTL
FD
Dual Custody
Card/PIN
RTE
Void
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-168/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Valid
Proximity
Wiegand
A card is enabled
Technology where a card is presented in proximity without contact
Standard output protocol for access control devices
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. The system shall be an IP intelligent security platform that unites intrusion and
access control with smart card operations and remote communications. All of its
functions shall work together from a single control panel. The system shall be
configured using modular components to provide complete flexibility in features
and capabilities. The system shall work with existing equipment and wiring, even
interfacing with existing Wiegand-based card reader systems.
2. The system shall provide for the following features:
Use a single card action to lock/unlock doors, arm/disarm alarms and control
other operations.
Select who goes where and when, with flexible access control.
Issue ID cards and assign user privileges individually or by groups of
employees.
Assign alarm inputs to specific areas or groups of areas.
Virtually eliminate false alarms with all-in-one security control. Users shall no
longer be required to remember to disarm a security system after unlocking a
door.
Manage your security operations on-site or from remote locations.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-169/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Inputs
A. Alarm Inputs. The Main Control Panel shall monitor up to sixteen (16) EOL
supervised inputs with expansion capabilities for up to two hundred and fifty six (256)
Inputs via DGPs. The option of two or four state Input monitoring may be selected.
Three EOL resistance values (4.7k, 10k and 2.2k) shall be available.
Outputs
Main Control Panel itself shall feature the following outputs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Output Expansion
Relay boards and Open Collector boards provide up to two hundred and fifty five
(255) programmable outputs per MCP. The relays should have a minimum rating of
12 volts 50mA, and relays on the Intelligent 4 door/elevator controller shall use
relays rated at 12 volts 10 Amps. All relay should be Form C.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-170/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
a.
b.
c.
d.
Outputs
DGPs, excluding Wireless DGPs shall have sixteen (16) outputs, available through
Relay cards or open collector cards.
Intelligent Addressable DGPs shall have up to thirty two (32) outputs available
through IADS Output devices.
Intelligent Controllers shall have four (4) relays for switching door locks.
All DGPs with built-in power supply shall have a siren output.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-171/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
SYSTEM MONITORING
General Overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting all the alarm, access and
system events to a Host PC running a Management Software.
Local Host PC
It shall be possible to have a permanent direct connection between the Main Control
Panel and the Host PC using an optional Computer and Printer interface installed
onto the MCP. Connection over IP shall be provided by an optional IP interface A 10digit password is required to allow initial connection. The number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.
Temporary Remote PC
It shall also be possible to have a temporary remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via leased line, PSTN, ISDN or GSM using the built-in or an
optional plug-on digital dialler.
1. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing installers or service
providers to dial into the system from a PC running the Management Software.
There shall be two ways of dealing with a remote connection request;
An authorized user shall clear the incoming call via a LCD RAS.
The Main Control Panel shall call back the originator of the call on a preprogrammed phone number. In both cases, a 10-digit password is required to
allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is
programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed ) to 255.)
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-172/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Permanent Remote PC
It shall be possible to have a permanent remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via the optional Computer and Printer port and an optional
IP interface.
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing local operators and/or remote
operators to connect to the system from a PC running the Management Software. A
10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.
1. Multiple Control Panels
The Host PC and its Management Software shall be capable of monitoring up to
sixty four (64) Control Panels simultaneously. It shall be possible to have any
combination of direct and remote connections between the Host PC and the sixty
four (64) Control Panels.
If dial-up is required, the PC shall support the required number of modems.
ALARM REPORTING
General overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting alarm and specified events to
commercial Central Monitoring Stations. These would be events such as:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-173/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1. PSTN Connection
A PSTN connection to a CMS shall be done using the built-in digital dialer. The Main
Control Panel shall monitor the status of the PSTN line and display Report Fail on
all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no
answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall
also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
PSTN shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
2. ISDN-B or ISDN-B/D Connection. An ISDN-B or ISDN-D channel connection
to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control
Panel shall monitor the status of the ISDN line and display Report Fail on all
LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no
answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number
fails.
3. ISDN-B or ISDN-D shall also be available as backup to any other type of
connection to a Central Station.
GSM Connection
A GSM connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer.
The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the GSM line and display Report
Fail on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there
is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
GSM shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
IP Connection
An IP connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional add-on IP Interface (in
addition to an RS232 Computer Interface) . The Main Control Panel shall monitor
the status of the IP Connection and display Report Fail on all LCD RAS units if the
connection is not capable of communicating to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
IP shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-174/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
8. Voice Reporting
Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of playing back pre-recorded voices
messages through optional module(s) connected on the MI expansion bus. It shall
be possible to connect two (2) Voice Reporting modules per MCP and there shall be
a minimum of eight (8) Messages per module; the leader message, the address
message and six alarm messages. If a second module is installed, all eight
messages for the second module will be alarm messages. The total recording time
per module shall be thirty five (35) seconds.
Voice messages shall be programmed to report on the occurrence of specific
reporting codes. Several reporting codes may have the same voice message
programmed. Reporting codes 1-11 are general alarms (BA, FA, TA), while
reporting codes 12-21 are zone specific, that is, you can link a reporting code to
specific zones. This means that any zone activation or event happening in the MCP
shall be able to trigger a voice message.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-175/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a remote
location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.
Checked Parameters
The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;
a. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.
b. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel and
the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
c. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
d. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
e. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
f. Identify any input on soak test.
g. Identify any inhibited input.
h. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances (Ohms).
i. Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
j. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last six
(6) hours before arming.
k. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the MCP).
The diagnostic facility shall also be able upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA RX test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.
Standard Memory
As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-176/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Software IUM
When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-177/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2
pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at
one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all
the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a
separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a common
point.
3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all
POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall
be able to display numerically all errors per device.
Area Operation/Control
For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:
1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes.
2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers.
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed
independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as Access
Granted, Region Counting and different Badging techniques.
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
0. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time zone
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-178/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Checked Parameters
The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-179/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The diagnostic facility shall also be able upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA RX test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.
Standard Memory
As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities
Software IUM
When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-180/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration. A
470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the
impedance.
1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device, whether
a RAS, DGP or Intelligent controller shall be no more than 1.5Km on approved
cable.
2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2
pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at
one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all
the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a
separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a common
point.
3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all
POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall
be able to display numerically all errors per device.
Area Operation/Control
For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:
1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes
2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed
independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as
Access Granted, Region Counting and different Badging techniques.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-181/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system
event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time
zone
14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed
15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open
16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited
17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm
18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time
19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time
20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning)
21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode
Biometric Reader
Keypad finger biometric reader
The biometric key pad reader should integrate easily into access control systems.
The fingerprint must be enrolled and stored on contactless smart card or directly on
the reader and this can be done through the software included with the reader or
through an Administrator Mode accessible through the keypad and display. Once a
fingerprint is enrolled, authentication may be performed any number of times.
Authentication may be initiated either through the keypad (if a template is stored
directly on the reader) or by presenting a smart card to the reader. After
authentication, the smart card biometric shall send a Wiegand string to the Access
Control System or other host equipment for appropriate action.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-182/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Supported Cards
The Unit shall support the following contactless smart cards: HID Corp. iCLASS
16kbits (2kBytes) 2-Application Area cards HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 16Application Area cards Honeywell Access Systems 16kbits (2kBytes) OmniSmart
cards
Memory
The reader shall utilize non-volatile flash memory to store all templates and data
configurations and shall therefore not lose any templates or configuration information
if the reader is powered down.
The SiteKey shall be stored within the internal memory of the reader and shall be
encrypted and stored on the smart card itself. For security purposes, the SiteKey
shall not be stored within the Admin software or PC, and may NOT be retrieved by
the reader.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Standard 26-bit
Apollo 44-bit
Northern 34-bit
Northern 34-bit (no parity)
Andover 37-bit*
Generic 64-bit*
Ademco 34-bit
HID Corporate 1000 35-bit
HID 37-bit
Wiegand 4002 40-bit*
Generic 34-bit*
S-21-183/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Pass-Thru Formats
The reader shall support a Pass-Thru mode. In this mode, critical information about
the format is provided to the biometric unit, which shall allow the reader to correctly
generate the card ID required to send to the Access Control System. To support your
proprietary Wiegand format in a Pass-Thru mode.
Smart Card
Features:
a. 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology
provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity.
b. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication,
encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities.
c. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure
HID access control application area.
d. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte) or 16k bit (2k Byte) configurations.
e. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal
transfer printers.
f. Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.
All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:
a. Available in two application area configuration only.
b. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other
application area for user customization.
c. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications.
d. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control
installation.
All 16k bit (2k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:
a. Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates.
b. Available in a two or sixteen application area configuration.
c. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the
HID standard access control application, and support future growth.
d. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-184/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Indoor/Outdoor Design
Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh
environments, provides reliable performance and resistance to vandalism.
Permanent magnet built into housing facilitates tamper alarm when used with a
magnetic reed switch.
Parking Reader
Specifications
Operating frequency
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-185/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Interfaces
TCP/IP
Communication protocols
CR/LF, DC2/DC4, TCP/IP, Profibus DP and various
OEM protocols (for more information see firmware manuals)
Mounting : Wall mounting set included Pole mounting set and weather proof
protection hood optional available
Certifications
European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC, EN50081-1, EN50082-1 and EN50082-2.
ETS0908
Barrier
3.0 Mt. Maximum arm length or two nos. for more width entry and exit , opeing time
approximately 3 seconds
2mm thickness A 1 quality steel cabinet
Need to fix in 20cm in concrete
A Microprocessor controlled electronics, A high torque continuous two way operation
AC motor is utilized in the barrier.
Door Locks
Holding force
Voltage
Power
550kg
DC12v
12v/240mA
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-186/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. PERFORMANCE
a. Meets or exceeds all international regulation performance requirements,
including:
1. TSA EMD Transportation Security Administration Enhanced Metal
Detection System.
2. FAA Federal Aviation Administration.
3. CE Approved.
4. CSA Approved.
5. CB Certified.
6. Safe for Medical Implants, Pregnant Women, and all Magnetic Media.
b. Multi-Dimensional Coil Design able to detect guns, knives, and other flat and
rod shaped weapons.
c. Field Uniformity providing equal detection capabilities for floor level
screening.
d. External Interference Cancellation using Digital Signal Processing technology
(DSP).
e. Target Detection is independent of pass-through speed.
3. OPTIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
Test on Site
1. The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment and labor for the in
site testing of heads and sensors of all types.
2. A set of shorting plugs with connectors shall be supplied for checking
the wiring to sensor and automatic station sockets.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-187/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
All full tanks must be as per Woqod specification and the contractor shall obtain
approval from Woqod before any installation for generator full tank, full network &
fill point location and size.
a. Build Quality
The complete power generation system, including engine, alternator and control
panel shall be supplied by same manufacturer and the authorized dealer who has
been regularly engaged in the supply and support of complete diesel generator
power system products. All components shall be designed to achieve optimum
components and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated
the design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated,
assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacturer does not
waive any requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be
individually and separately listed as part of compliance statement.
b. Responsibility
The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among
individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary
system supplier. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and
having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total
system.
d. Production Tests
The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set
supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be made available when requested
and shall also be included in the O&M Manual.
e. Drawings
All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and
switch gear must conform to a common and approved format.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-188/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
f.
SECTION 21
Submittals
Submittals for approval shall be made in accordance with CSI Division 1. Submittals
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including
switchgear.
2. Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data
sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including
relevant component design and performance data.
B. System Description
The purpose of the access control system is to monitor the access points to the main
entrances of staff areas shown on the drawings for 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The required equipment shall operate as described below:
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-189/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
ISDN
DTMF
CMS
RS485
RS232
MI bus
LAN
C. Alarm Monitoring
Area
Input or Zone
Output
Armed
Disarmed
Alarm
Open
Closed
Inhibit(ed)
Uninhibit(ed)
inhibited
D. Access Control
DOTL
FD
Dual Custody
Card/PIN
RTE
Void
Valid
Proximity
Wiegand
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. The system shall be an IP intelligent security platform that unites intrusion and
access control with smart card operations and remote communications. All of its
functions shall work together from a single control panel. The system shall be
configured using modular components to provide complete flexibility in features
and capabilities. The system shall work with existing equipment and wiring, even
interfacing with existing Wiegand-based card reader systems.
2. The system shall provide for the following features:
a. Use a single card action to lock/unlock doors, arm/disarm alarms and control
other operations.
b. Select who goes where and when, with flexible access control.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-190/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Inputs
A. Alarm Inputs. The Main Control Panel shall monitor up to sixteen (16) EOL
supervised inputs with expansion capabilities for up to two hundred and fifty six (256)
Inputs via DGPs. The option of two or four state Input monitoring may be selected.
Three EOL resistance values (4.7k, 10k and 2.2k) shall be available.
Outputs
Main Control Panel itself shall feature the following outputs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-191/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Output Expansion
Relay boards and Open Collector boards provide up to two hundred and fifty five
(255) programmable outputs per MCP. The relays should have a minimum rating of
12 volts 50mA, and relays on the Intelligent 4 door/elevator controller shall use
relays rated at 12 volts 10 Amps. All relay should be Form C.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-192/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all lift controllers
connected to a control panel.
The ability to use a card plus PIN
The number of users per region shall be controlled.
Incorporate lift interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports.
Ability to require the two-card rule.
Users shall be allowed to only access allowed floors
Users shall be stored locally on each Bank controller
Door groups shall be stored locally on each bank controller
Time zones shall be stored locally on each bank controller.
Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all bank controllers
connected to a control panel.
The ability to use a card plus PIN
Ability to require the two-card rule.
Outputs
DGPs, excluding Wireless DGPs shall have sixteen (16) outputs, available
through Relay cards or open collector cards.
Intelligent Addressable DGPs shall have up to thirty two (32) outputs available
through IADS Output devices.
Intelligent Controllers shall have four (4) relays for switching door locks.
All DGPs with built-in power supply shall have a siren output.
SYSTEM MONITORING
General Overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting all the alarm, access and
system events to a Host PC running a Management Software.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-193/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Local Host PC
It shall be possible to have a permanent direct connection between the Main Control
Panel and the Host PC using an optional Computer and Printer interface installed
onto the MCP. Connection over IP shall be provided by an optional IP interface A 10digit password is required to allow initial connection. The number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.
Temporary Remote PC
It shall also be possible to have a temporary remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via leased line, PSTN, ISDN or GSM using the built-in or an
optional plug-on digital dialler.
1. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing installers or service
providers to dial into the system from a PC running the Management Software.
There shall be two ways of dealing with a remote connection request;
a. An authorized user shall clear the incoming call via a LCD RAS.
b. The Main Control Panel shall call back the originator of the call on a preprogrammed phone number. In both cases, a 10-digit password is required to
allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is
programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed ) to 255.)
An authorized user shall be capable to initiate a connection to a remote PC
running the Management software either by calling a pre-programmed phone
number or by entering a new phone number through a LCD RAS.
2. Regardless of the type of connection, it shall be possible to programme the
system in such a way that any change to the system database is impossible if
any area is armed.
Permanent Remote PC
It shall be possible to have a permanent remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via the optional Computer and Printer port and an optional
IP interface.
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing local operators and/or remote
operators to connect to the system from a PC running the Management Software. A
10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-194/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
combination of direct and remote connections between the Host PC and the sixty
four (64) Control Panels.
If dial-up is required, the PC shall support the required number of modems.
ALARM REPORTING
General overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting alarm and specified events to
commercial Central Monitoring Stations. These would be events such as:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
1. PSTN Connection
A PSTN connection to a CMS shall be done using the built-in digital dialer. The Main
Control Panel shall monitor the status of the PSTN line and display Report Fail on
all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no
answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall
also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
PSTN shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
4. ISDN-B or ISDN-B/D Connection. An ISDN-B or ISDN-D channel connection
to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-195/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Panel shall monitor the status of the ISDN line and display Report Fail on all
LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no
answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number
fails.
5. ISDN-B or ISDN-D shall also be available as backup to any other type of
connection to a Central Station.
GSM Connection
A GSM connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer.
The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the GSM line and display Report
Fail on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there
is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
GSM shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
IP Connection
An IP connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional add-on IP Interface (in
addition to an RS232 Computer Interface) . The Main Control Panel shall monitor
the status of the IP Connection and display Report Fail on all LCD RAS units if the
connection is not capable of communicating to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.
IP shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-196/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
7. Dual Central Stations Reporting is where an event must successfully report to all
the CMS, programmed as Dual Reporting, before it is marked as reported and
removed from the queue.
8. Voice Reporting
Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of playing back pre-recorded voices
messages through optional module(s) connected on the MI expansion bus. It shall
be possible to connect two (2) Voice Reporting modules per MCP and there shall be
a minimum of eight (8) Messages per module; the leader message, the address
message and six alarm messages. If a second module is installed, all eight
messages for the second module will be alarm messages. The total recording time
per module shall be thirty five (35) seconds.
Voice messages shall be programmed to report on the occurrence of specific
reporting codes. Several reporting codes may have the same voice message
programmed. Reporting codes 1-11 are general alarms (BA, FA, TA), while
reporting codes 12-21 are zone specific, that is, you can link a reporting code to
specific zones. This means that any zone activation or event happening in the MCP
shall be able to trigger a voice message.
Checked Parameters
The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;
a. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.
b. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel
and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
c. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
d. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
e. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
f. Identify any input on soak test.
g. Identify any inhibited input.
h. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances
(Ohms).
i. Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-197/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
j.
Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last
six (6) hours before arming.
k. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the
MCP).
The diagnostic facility shall also be able upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA RX test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.
Standard memory
As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities
Software IUM
When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-198/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-199/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to
RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic
units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be
connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.
Area Operation/Control
For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:
1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes.
2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers.
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed
independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as
Access Granted, Region Counting and different Badging techniques.
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system
event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time
zone
14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed
15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open
16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited
17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm
18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time
19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time
20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning)
21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-200/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and
monitored by the Host PC.
REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS FACILITY
General Overview
The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon
request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall upload
the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility shall be
in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values like the
input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the RS485 data
bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a
remote location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.
Checked Parameters
The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;
1. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.
2. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel
and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
3. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
4. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
5. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
6. Identify any input on soak test.
7. Identify any inhibited input.
8. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances
(Ohms).
9. Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
10. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last
six (6) hours before arming.
11. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the
MCP).
The diagnostic facility shall also be able upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA RX test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.
Standard Memory
As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
1. 50 Individual Users.
2. 74 Alarm Groups
3. 10 Door Group
4. 10 Floor Groups
5. 250 Alarm event buffer
6. 10 Access event buffer
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-201/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Software IUM
When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-202/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all
POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall
be able to display numerically all errors per device.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-203/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Biometric Reader
Keypad finger biometric reader
The biometric key pad reader should integrate easily into access control systems.
The fingerprint must be enrolled and stored on contactless smart card or directly on
the reader and this can be done through the software included with the reader or
through an Administrator Mode accessible through the keypad and display. Once a
fingerprint is enrolled, authentication may be performed any number of times.
Authentication may be initiated either through the keypad (if a template is stored
directly on the reader) or by presenting a smart card to the reader. After
authentication, the smart card biometric shall send a Wiegand string to the Access
Control System or other host equipment for appropriate action.
Supported Cards
The Unit shall support the following contactless smart cards: HID Corp. iCLASS
16kbits (2kBytes) 2-Application Area cards HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 16Application Area cards Honeywell Access Systems 16kbits (2kBytes) OmniSmart
cards
Memory
The reader shall utilize non-volatile flash memory to store all templates and data
configurations and shall therefore not lose any templates or configuration information
if the reader is powered down.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-204/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The SiteKey shall be stored within the internal memory of the reader and shall be
encrypted and stored on the smart card itself. For security purposes, the SiteKey
shall not be stored within the Admin software or PC, and may NOT be retrieved by
the reader.
Standard 26-bit
Apollo 44-bit
Northern 34-bit
Northern 34-bit (no parity)
Andover 37-bit*
Generic 64-bit*
Ademco 34-bit
HID Corporate 1000 35-bit
HID 37-bit
Wiegand 4002 40-bit*
Generic 34-bit*
Pass-Thru Formats
The reader shall support a Pass-Thru mode. In this mode, critical information about
the format is provided to the biometric unit, which shall allow the reader to correctly
generate the card ID required to send to the Access Control System. To support your
proprietary Wiegand format in a Pass-Thru mode.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-205/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Smart Card
Features:
a. 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology
provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity.
b. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication,
encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities.
c. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure
HID access control application area.
d. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte) or 16k bit (2k Byte) configurations.
e. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal
transfer printers.
f. Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.
All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:
a. Available in two application area configuration only.
b. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other
application area for user customization.
c. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications.
d. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control
installation.
All 16k bit (2k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:
a. Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates.
b. Available in a two or sixteen application area configuration.
c. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the
HID standard access control application, and support future growth.
d. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-206/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Indoor/Outdoor Design
Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh
environments, provides reliable performance and resistance to vandalism.
Permanent magnet built into housing facilitates tamper alarm when used with a
magnetic reed switch.
Parking Reader
Specifications
Operating frequency
Mounting : Wall mounting set included Pole mounting set and weather proof
protection hood optional available
Certifications
European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC, EN50081-1, EN50082-1 and EN50082-2.
ETS0908
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-207/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Barrier
3.0 Mt. Maximum arm length or two nos. for more width entry and exit , opeing time
approximately 3 seconds
2mm thickness A 1 quality steel cabinet
Need to fix in 20cm in concrete
A Microprocessor controlled electronics, A high torque continuous two way operation
AC motor is utilized in the barrier.
Door Locks
Holding force
Voltage
Power
550kg
DC12v
12v/240mA
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-208/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2. PERFORMANCE
a. Meets or exceeds all international regulation performance requirements,
including:
1. TSA EMD Transportation Security Administration Enhanced Metal
Detection System.
2. FAA Federal Aviation Administration.
3. CE Approved.
4. CSA Approved.
5. CB Certified.
6. Safe for Medical Implants, Pregnant Women, and all Magnetic Media.
b. Multi-Dimensional Coil Design able to detect guns, knives, and other flat and
rod shaped weapons.
c. Field Uniformity providing equal detection capabilities for floor level
screening.
d. External Interference Cancellation using Digital Signal Processing technology
(DSP).
e. Target Detection is independent of pass-through speed.
3. OPTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test on Site
1. The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment and labor for the in
site testing of heads and sensors of all types.
2. A set of shorting plugs with connectors shall be supplied for checking
the wiring to sensor and automatic station sockets.
3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply all necessary test
bench equipment for checking and calibration of all items of the system.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-209/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
b. Related Works
Refer to the following Tender Specification sections for related mechanical and
electrical considerations.
c. System Description
Generator sets shall be of the Prime Power rating for standby application and these
ratings shall be as indicated upon the drawings.
Prime Power rating is defined as 10% overload for 1 hour duration in any 12 hours
period of continuous operation at full-load.
d. System Loads
The diesel generator set(s) shall be sized to accept a minimum of 50% the full-load
rating upon starting and the voltage transient shall remain within 10% of nominal
output voltage.
e. System Function
The generator set(s) shall include the all the necessary controls and equipment to
automatically control the optimum generator set operation. After starting, the unit(s)
shall automatically attain rated speed and voltage, and accept the rated load. The
engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output voltage
regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator. Facilities
for the manual adjustment of the generator speed and voltage shall also be
provided.
f.
A daily fuel tank with sufficient fuel capacity for at least 8 hours duty on full load
shall be provided, in a suitable location in the room. A dial type fuel gauge, fuel
filter inlet and outlet connections, drain plug and all feed and return fuel pipes
shall be fitted to the tank complete with hose for filling purposes.
An electrical or manual fuel lift pump shall be supplied and installed near the daily
fuel tank to lift fuel automatically or manually from the bulk storage tank with
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-210/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
capacity at least 48 hours duty on full load to the daily storage tank. Necessary
float switches to operate lift pump shall be provided.
All full tanks must be as per Woqood specification and the contractor shall obtain
approval from Woqood before any installation for generator full tank, full network &
fill point location and size.
g. Performance
The power generating system shall meet the performance criteria that follow:
1. Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated
generator set kW / kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all
engine-mounted auxiliary and external loads such as radiator fans etc.
2. Conditions - The rating shall be based on ISO 3046/1 standard conditions of
100 kPa and 27oC (29.53 in Hg, 81F); BS 5514, DIN 6271, SAE J1349 and
API 7B-11C also apply.
3. Fuel - Diesel engines shall be able to deliver rated power when operating on
Type 2 diesel fuel having 35o API (16C, 60F) specific gravity.
4. Fuel Consumption - Diesel fuel rates shall be based on fuel having a low
heating value (LHV) of 42,780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29oC
(85oF) and weight 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs. / U.S. gal).
5. Start Time & Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage
and frequency, and be capable of accepting full-load within 10 seconds when
properly equipped and maintained.
6. Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO 8528
requirements.
7. Power Delivery - Prime rating with 10% overload capability for a duration of 1
hour in any 12 hour period of operation at the rated full-load.
8. Frequency - 50 Hz
9. Voltage Phase to phase = 415 V & phase to neutral = 240 V.
10. Allowable maximum Voltage Dip - upon the application of 50% of full-load
power rating Within 10%.
11. Average Power Factor - 0.80 lag.
12. Steady State Speed Tolerance - +/- 0.50 %.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-211/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
h. Build Quality
The complete power generation system, including engine, alternator and control
panel shall be supplied by same manufacturer and the authorized dealer who has
been regularly engaged in the supply and support of complete diesel generator
power system products. All components shall be designed to achieve optimum
components and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated
the design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated,
assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacturer does not
waive any requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be
individually and separately listed as part of compliance statement.
i.
Responsibility
The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among
individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary
system supplier. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and
having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total
system.
j.
Generator set mounted sub-assemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake
system, exhaust outlet fittings, and the generator set mounted controls shall be
designed, built, and assembled as a complete unit by the engine - generator
manufacturer.
k. Production Tests
The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set
supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be made available when requested
and shall also be included in the O&M Manual.
l.
Drawings
All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and
switch gear must conform to a common and approved format.
m. Submittals
Submittals for approval shall be made in accordance with CSI Division 1. Submittals
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including
switchgear.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-212/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Alternator:
Model
Frame
Insulation class
Number of leads
Weight, total
Weight, rotor
Airflow
Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for - 50% / 75% / 100% load.
Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D).
Time constants, armature short circuit (TA).
Reactance, sub transient - direct axis (XD).
Reactance, transient - saturated (XD).
Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD).
Reactance, negative sequence (X2).
Reactance, zero sequence (X0).
Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical.
Decrement curve.
Radiator:
Model
Type
Fan drive ratio
Coolant capacity, radiator.
Coolant capacity, radiator & engine.
Weight both, dry & wet.
System:
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-213/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Auxiliary Equipment
Wiring Diagrams
Warranty Statements
Service
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-214/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
o. Component Requirements
The engine shall be stationary, Jacket water after cooler, 1500 RPM, four cycle
design with DRY exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United States,
Western Europe or in Japan. It shall not be manufactured with any Class I ozone
depleting substances (ODS) as defined by Federal Register Vol 5, No. 86.
The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure gauge,
lubricating oil cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump and temperature
gauge, service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing when applicable.
The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is integral with the
engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The system shall incorporate full
flow filtration with bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of filter clogging.
The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle. Systems
where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are not acceptable.
Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the underside or inside of the
crown and piston pin.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-215/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The filter shall incorporate a self-lubricating, free rotating seal and have a
nonmetallic core sufficiently rigid to minimize movement or shifting of the filtration
media.
The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel filter,
transfer pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. The transfer pump shall deliver
fuel under low pressure to individual injection pumps - one for each cylinder.
The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously controlled
by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by signals from the
engine governor. The pumps shall be of a variable displacement type to alter the
volume of fuel delivered to the spray nozzles according to load demand.
The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray pattern for
efficient combustion.
In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a primary fuel filter
between the fuel tank and transfer pump to screen large contaminants.
A fuel/water separator shall protect the fuel system from water damage.
A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding air from the system.
Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed to isolate
vibration.
A Free floor standing tank with capacity for 8-hour full-load operation shall be
provided. The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections; float switches, fuel
gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact. A manual shutoff valve on the fuel line to
the engine and a tank drain valve shall also be included.
The engine governor shall be Electronic type and transient load response within
commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances. It will be selected, installed, and tested by the
generator set manufacturer to meet step load starting kVA requirement specified
within this document.
The engine control shall be of Electronic Programmable type. The control will
monitor all significant engine parameters,
The engine control shall be configured to avoid interruption of power whenever
possible. Engine Control system shall be provided with a programmable relay to
activate in case the load exceeds predefined level to shut down a non-essential load.
It shall display real time and historical data to allow user to optimize operation and
provide accurate service information in the event of a malfunction. Information shall
be accessible through a data link for remote monitoring, or through an RS 232 port.
A data link failure shall not cause an interruption of engine operation.
The engine Jacket water-cooling system shall be a closed circuit design with
provision for filling, expansion and de-aeration. The cooling pump shall be driven by
the engine. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect external
cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-216/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere
through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be sized to cool the engine
continuously while operating at full rated load and at site conditions. It shall be a
folded core design consisting of individually replaceable core assemblies sealed
between the top and bottom tank and which can be replaced individually at the job
site.
The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the engine. Air shall be
drawn from the engine side and exhausted through the radiator core.
The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element requiring
replacement no more frequently than 500 operating hours or once each year. If
external ducting is required, maximum restriction to the combustion air inlet shall be
6.7 kPa (27 in H2O) with airflow of 932 cfm.
Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine exhaust gases and
direct - connected to a compressor supplying engine combustion air.
The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly
and silently with minimum restriction. System including silencer shall be designed for
minimum restriction, and in no case shall backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O).
Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth being
transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to accommodate
thermal growth. Support dampers and springs shall be included where necessary to
isolate vibration.
Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water traps installed at
the lowest point. Exhaust stacks shall be extended to avoid nuisance fumes and
odors, and outlets cut at 45 to minimize noise.
Exhaust piping shall be insulated and clad with aluminium to limit the surface
o
temperature within 65 C.
The exhaust silencer shall be at minimum of the Residential grade (25 dBA) quality
to provide extreme noise attenuation for environments with low background noise.
An exhaust thimble shall be installed at the point where the exhaust pipe penetrates
the building.
The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor(s), starter relay,
and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against butt engagement. Batteries
shall be maintenance free, lead acid types mounted near the starting motor. A
corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be located to avoid spillage from
servicing of fuel and oil filters. Required cables will be furnished and sized to satisfy
circuit requirements. The system shall be capable of starting a properly equipped
engine within 10 seconds at ambient temperatures greater than 22oC (70oF).
Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by the generator set
manufacturer. They shall be a heavy-duty NiCad type with thru-partition connectors,
and housed in a hard rubber or polypropylene case with provision for venting.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-217/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Batteries shall be located as close to the starting motor as practical, away from spark
sources, in a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and maintenance.
Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer.
The alternator(s) shall be Prime rated for Standby Application 415 V, three phase, 4
wire, 50 Hz, 0.8 1500 rpm.
The alternator(s) shall be capable of withstanding a three-phase load of 300% rated
current for 10 seconds, and sustaining 150% of continuous load current for 2
minutes with field set for normal rated load excitation. It shall exhibit less than 5%
waveform deviation at no load.
Alternator to be suitable for Motor Starting duty of 50% of Generator set rating and
maximum 10% voltage dip.
Alternator to be driven by a synchronous driver.
Alternator is to be hot, equivalent to the stabilized temperature band between the
alternator's 75% and 100% and 110 % of the nominal rated output of one hour
continuous load rating.
Alternator efficiencies shall be calculated according to IEC 34-2 Section 4, with all
I2R losses corrected to 115oC.
As a minimum the alternator shall be designed, manufactured to meet following
specification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The revolving field coils shall be precision wet layer wound with epoxy-based
material applied to each layer of magnet wire. Alternator pitch shall optimize
efficiency and minimize total harmonic distortion. The field shall be prototyped
tested for two hours at 150% of rated speed at 70oC, and production tested at 125%
of rated speed. It shall be dynamically balanced to 0.5 mil peak-to-peak.
The alternator shall be of class IP 22 designed to operate in a sheltered drip-proof
environment.
Alternator(s) shall be equipped with 240 V ac single-phase space heaters to
minimize condensation while the alternator set is idle. The heaters shall be capable
of easily mounting in the assembled alternator.
The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting of a three-phase
armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft.
Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage
spikes.
The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive excitation current from a pilot
exciter mounted on the rotor shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-218/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable
operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall maintain generator
output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full-load.
The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS in three phases of alternator
output voltage, or operating in single phase sensing mode. The voltage regulator
shall include a VAr / Pf control feature as standard. The regulator shall provide an
adjustable dual slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and
frequency response for site conditions. The voltage regulator shall include standard
the capability to provide generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and
reactive differential compensation.
The voltage regulator shall communicate with the Generator Control Panel via a
J1939 communication network with generator voltage adjustments made via the
controller keypad. Additionally, the controller shall allow system parameter setup and
monitoring, and provide fault alarm and shutdown information through the controller.
A PC-based user interface shall be available to allow viewing and modifying
operating parameters in a windows compatible environment.
The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the enginegenerator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed and built by the
engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection, maintain alignment, and minimize
resonant linear vibration.
The base mounting frame shall be original diesel generator set manufacturers
design.
Linear vibration isolators shall be provided for installation below the Generator set
skid.
Fuel storage facilities shall conform to the requirements of Qatar Petroleum
Company Specification and other relevant local regulations.
The bulk fuel store shall be a steel tank with a capacity of 1 day full-load operation.
It shall be in accordance with local code requirements. The tank shall be equipped
with the necessary openings including fill, vent, sounding, gauges, suction and return
openings set within a 600 mm x 600 mm manhole.
Submittals - Shop drawings shall be submitted showing all dimensions, supports and
connections.
The tank shall be buried below grade in accordance with the drawings provided by
the Structural Engineers.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-219/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The daily service fuel storage shall be separate from the diesel generator set and
located within the Generator Room as shown upon the drawings. All the necessary
fuel transfer pumps & pipe work to transfer fuel from the bulk storage tank to the
daily service tank and then to the diesel generator set shall be provided by the
Contractor. The tanks shall incorporate pipe connections, fuel transfer pump, float
switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contacts wired to an indicating light on
the generator set control cubicle. A manual shut-off valve on the engine supply line
and a drain valve shall be included.
The controls, protection and monitoring systems necessary for the generator set and
its operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. All subsystem components, interfaces and logic shall be compatible with the enginemounted devices.
Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control
panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall
provide all operating, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The
control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and
regulator controls via SAE J1939.
The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following environmental
conditions:
Ambient temperature - 40C to +70C Operating Range.
95% humidity non-condensing at 30C to 60C.
IP22 protection.
4. 5% salt spray 48 hours, +38C, 36.8V system voltage.
Sinusoidal vibration 4.3G's RMS, 24-1000Hz.
Electromagnetic
Capability (89/336/EEC,
91/368/EEC,
93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2).
7. Shock: withstand 15G.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
93/44/EEC,
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-220/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Generator
1. Generator ac volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and Average).
2. Generator ac current (Average and Per Phase).
3. Generator ac Frequency.
4. Generator kW (Total & Per Phase).
5. Generator kVA (Total & Per Phase).
6. Generator kVAr (Total & Per Phase).
7. Power Factor (Average & Per Phase).
8. Total kW-hr.
9. Total kVAR-hr.
10. % kW.
11. % kVA.
12. % kVAR.
13. Generator stator winding temperature.
Voltage Regulation
1. Excitation voltage.
2. Excitation current.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-221/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent automatic
shut-down for the specified conditions. All alarms and shut-downs shall be assigned
a time, date, and engine hours run tag that to be stored by the control panel for both
the first and last occurrences. The alarm monitoring and shut-downs shall include
the following:
The Controller shall include the ability to accept 18 programmable digital input
signals. The signals may be programmed for either high or low activation using
programmable normally open or normally closed contacts.
The control shall include the ability to operate 14 programmable relay output signals,
which shall integral to the controller. The output relays shall be rated for 2A @ 30 V
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-222/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The controls shall include Modbus RTU communications as standard via RS-485 half
duplex with configurable baud rates from 2.4k to 57.6k.
Monitoring Software shall also be provided with the functionality that follows:
1. Provide access to all date and events on generator set communications
network.
2. Provide remote control capability for the generator set.
3. Ability to monitor up to 12 generator sets.
4. Ability to communicate via Modbus RTU or remote modem.
The Contractor shall also provide a local control panel mounted annunciator to meet
the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:
1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set controls.
2. The local annunciator shall include a lamp test push button, alarm horn and
alarm acknowledgment push button.
3. Individual lamp indications for protection and diagnostics as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Over crank.
Low coolant temperature.
High coolant temperature warning.
High coolant temperature shut-down.
Low oil pressure warning.
Low oil pressure shut-down.
Over speed.
Low coolant level.
S-21-223/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-224/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Pre-Start Checks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Oil level.
Water level.
Day tank fuel level.
Battery connection and charge condition.
Air start supply pressure (if so equipped).
Engine to control interconnects.
Engine generator intake / exhaust obstructions.
Engine room ventilation obstructions.
Removal of all packing materials.
Operational Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For the duration of each load test the engine and generator parameters shall be
recorded at 15 minute intervals as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Date / Time.
KW, Voltage & Amperage (3 phase), frequency.
Fuel pressure, oil pressure and water temperature.
Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet.
Generator Winding & Bearing Temperature.
Ambient temperature
S-21-225/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The correct operation of controls, engine shutdown, and safety devices shall also be
demonstrated and recorded as witnessed and verified.
The manufacturer's representative shall provide the necessary resistive load banks
to test the diesel generator set for all the prescribed load tests at no additional cost
to the contract.
Should these tests indicate that the equipment does not meet the specified
performance requirements, then the cost of all corrective measures and re-testing
shall be borne by the manufacturer's representative.
The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation for
the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include both
classroom and hands-on instruction.
Topics covered shall include controls
operation, schematics, wiring diagrams, meters, indicators, warning lights, shutdown
system and routine maintenance.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-226/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
q. Information
The Contractor shall furnish certified performance data and curves as a part of his
proposal and a description of his quality control program. The Manufacturer shall
ascertain that his equipment withstands the starting kW and kVA requirements of
the connected loads as shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall furnish an outline drawing showing principal dimensions, space
requirements and the location of the connections to the equipment quoted, mainly
for starting, cooling, fuel and lubricating systems plus the ventilation requirements.
The Contractor shall provide a basic tool kit, engine maintenance handbook, spare
parts manual and generating set instruction handbook.
The Contractor shall itemize all sight flow indications, temperature sensing devices,
and pressure gauges and indications which will be furnished for local indication
of the critical items as recommended. If these indicators are provided as standard
with the equipment, it shall be so indicated.
The Contractor shall furnish comprehensive information and catalogues along with
schematic and detailed diagrams showing all equipment furnished and shall include
the control system and shall clearly describe the operation, manufacturing and types
of all instruments and control items.
All literature and catalogues shall be in English.
r. Safety Considerations
All external electrical and mechanical connections shall be with flexible end
connections to allow free movement of the diesel generator set on resilient
mountings. All exposed rotating parts shall be fully guarded to prevent contact by
personnel. Guards shall comply with BS 5304, and shall be removable for
maintenance purposes.
A permanently fixed warning notice with 6 mm white lettering on a red background
shall be fixed to the set in a prominent position.
The warning shall be as follows:
"THE GENERATING SET IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START
AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING"
s. Manufacturers
The diesel generator set manufacturer shall preferably also be the manufacturer of
either the alternator and shall be responsible for the assembly. The diesel generator
set manufacturer shall have a reliable local representative of good repute, keeping
adequate stocks of spare parts and providing efficient after sales services.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-227/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The Contractor shall submit for approval shop drawings for the diesel generator set
including all necessary civil work details, such as trenches, concrete bases, etc.,
generator starting characteristics and manufacturers approval for the generator's
correct selection as to connected load, de-rating factors, etc., wiring diagrams and
description of operation.
A copy of these shop drawings shall also be sent to the local power authorities for
approval (if needed).
Any modifications to the drawings required by the Engineer or the Local Power
Authorities to allow the equipment to comply with the codes, standards and
specifications called for here-in shall be carried out with no extra cost to the
contract.
t.
Spare Parts
The Contractor shall at the time of tender furnish a comprehensive priced list of
recommended spare parts for 2 years and 5 years service. (over and above the one
year defect liability period achieving a total of 3 years and 5 years of extended
operating maintenance).
The Client / Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject the same either in full or
in part and the contractor shall supply the spare parts as per the final approved list,
at the time of handing over/ taking over of the Project.
Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels, clearly
designating the contents and the particular of equipment for which they are
intended.
The Contractor shall securely store and protect the spare parts until the completion
of the works and deliver the same to the Client's stores.
u. Applicable Standards
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-228/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-229/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
6. A signal for the engine of the diesel generator set to stop after the load is
transferred to the mains supply. A solid-state time-delay on stop (adjustable
from 0.5 to 5 minutes) shall permit the engine to run unloaded to cool down
before shutdown (or as selected by ATS).
7. Provide a switch to select with load or without load to test or exercise as
follows:
a. Without Load the generating set runs unloaded.
b. With Load the automatic transfer switch transfers load to generating
set, after a time-delay, the same as it would for a normal source
interruption.
8. Provide a device to electrically disconnect the control section from the
transfer switch for maintenance and service during normal operation.
Indicating meters and lamps shall be front mounted for easy reference without the
need to open covers. Meter and lamp combinations shall be provided as follows:
1. Green (normal) and red (emergency) lamps to indicate which source is
supplying power to the load.
2. AC Voltmeter to measure generator output voltage.
3. Frequency meter with pointer indicator and run-time meter to monitor the
electric generating set
The bypass / isolation switch shall be provided to comply with the requirements of
standards applicable to the type of emergency and stand-by power system plus the
applicable safety codes.
The switch shall be a manual operation type arranged to select and connect either
the source of power directly to the load, isolating the transfer switch from the load
plus both the power sources.
The switch shall include the features that follow:
1. A means to lock the switch in the position that isolates the transfer switch,
with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the transfer
switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks shall prevent transfer switch
operation except for testing or maintenance.
2. Draw-out arrangement for the transfer switch, provides physical separation
from live parts for testing and maintenance operations.
3. Current voltage, Closing, and short Withstand ratings: Equal or greater than
that of the associated ATS, with the same phase arrangement and number of
poles.
4. The contact temperatures of the switch shall not exceed those of ATS
contacts when they are carrying the rated load.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-230/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
5. Operability: Constructed so that the load bypass and transfer switch isolation
can be performed by a single person in no more than two operations in 15
seconds or less.
6. Legend: A manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction
signs giving clear and detailed operating instructions.
7. Maintainability: Fabricate the switch to allow easy and convenient removal of
major components from the front without removal of other parts or the main
power conductors and terminations.
b. Rectifier
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
c. Inverter
1. Three phase input voltage: 415/240V, 50 Hz.
2. Voltage Tolerances: Fixed load steady state: 0.5 % from no Load to full-load.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-231/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SECTION 21
d. Efficiency
The efficiency of the whole system at full-load shall not be less than 20%.
e. Batteries
1. The battery system shall consist of gas recombination, valve regulated, lead acid
cells, compliant with IEC 60896 Parts 21 and 22. Flame retardant batteries shall
be provided.
2. For each UPS system the battery system shall consist of a minimum of 2 parallel
strings of multiple cells. Each individual parallel string shall have its own
dedicated means of electrical protection. The batteries shall be configured so
that in the event of a battery malfunction the affected string is automatically
isolated from the system thereby ensuring battery autonomy is retained.
3. Battery racks shall be floor mounted with RAW Bolt fixings into concrete
structure.
4. Battery racks and shall be earthed directly back to Mains Earth Facility.
5. Battery system / racks shall be provided with Battery MCCBs of adequate size
and type, which shall be suitably located within the battery room such that it is
accessible from the door opening at a height where climbing aids are not
needed. The battery MCCBs shall be labelled as to their purpose.
6. Batteries shall have a 10 year life and shall be provided such that the system
shall be capable of providing its full autonomy at full load at that time.
7. A fully discharged battery system shall be capable of being recharged to 80% of
the UPS output capacity within a maximum period of 10 times the normal total
discharge time period, and to 90% of the UPS output capacity within a maximum
period of 4 hours.
f.
Visual Indications
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-232/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
4. Inverter Fault.
5. Static Switch Locked.
6. Acoustic Alarm.
7. Stop Imminent.
8. Inverter ON.
9. Inverter OFF.
10. Inverter In Use.
11. General Alarm Cancel.
12. Load OFF.
13. Rectifier Output Voltage - Display.
14. Rectifier Output Current - Ditto.
15. Inverter Output Voltages - Ditto.
16. Inverter Output Currents - Ditto.
17. Inverter Mains Failure.
18. Rectifier Temperature.
19. Inverter Temperature.
20. Transformer Temperature.
21. Static Switch Temperature.
22. Absence of Mains By- Pass.
23. Mains Frequency Outside Tolerances.
24. By-pass Lock.
25. Inverter / Mains Supply Out of Phase.
26. Switch to Mains by Static Switch.
27. Transfer to Mains Supply by Static Switch.
28. Overload.
g. Warranties
The Contractor shall guarantee the UPS and its installation for 24 months during
which period the Contractor shall maintain and repair any defects due to either
manufacture, or workmanship, at no extra cost to owner.
h. Standards
The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance program. In
particular, the main equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by
appropriate tests such as:
1. Incoming components inspection.
2. Discrete sub-assembly testing and complete functional checks on the final
product.
The UPS unit shall undergo an on-load burn-in before leaving the factory. Final
inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the
suppliers quality inspection department.
The UPS shall comply with the standards that follow:
1. Safety: EN 50091-1
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-233/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-234/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. Bonding
Where metal work other than current carrying conductors may be liable to become
charged with electricity in such a manner as to create a danger, (if damage to the
insulation of a conductor should occur in any apparatus / cable) then precautionary
measures shall be enacted as follows:
i.
The metal work shall be effectively and securely bonded to earth in such a
manner as will ensure an immediate electrical discharge to earth that will trip
the circuit breaker concerned and clear the fault. Also the voltage upon the
metalwork with respect to earth must not exceed 50 V and the circuit breaker
must trip within 5 seconds for fixed equipment and within 0.4 second for all
circuits that supply portable equipment.
In situations that may normally be wet or damp, where electrical apparatus is present
and might give rise to danger and where there are substantial exposed metallic parts
of other services (such as gas and water pipes, sinks and baths), the earth continuity
conductor of the electrical installation shall be effectively connected, electrically and
mechanically to all such metal parts and to any exposed metal work of the electrical
apparatus.
A separate green / yellow stripe PVC insulated copper bonding lead shall be
connected from the earthing terminal of the water heater and bonded to the metal
pipe work on both sides of the pump.
Where water pumps are installed a bonding lead shall be taken from the earthing
terminal of the local isolator and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides of the
pump.
The size of bonding lead shall be the same as the earth continuity conductor of the
circuit subject to a minimum size of 4.0 mm2.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
General
The Lightning Protection shall be carried out in accordance with B.S. 62305:2006.
Air Terminations
The type and location of the air terminations shall be as indicated in the drawings;
where indicated, metal framed or metal clad roofs or all of an air termination shall be
bonded across joints between constituent parts. The bonding may be carried out by
the specialist roofing contractor but where this is not the case the bonds shall be
made as indicated; no drilling of roofing or coping shall be done without the approval
of the consultant.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-235/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Down Conductors
The type and location of the of the down conductors shall be as indicated in the
drawings. Conductors connecting between a test clamp on the outside of a building
and an earth electrode, and conductors interconnecting pipe electrodes, shall be
sheathed; but conductors interconnecting copper electrodes may be left bare.
Conductors in other locations shall be sheathed. Sheaths shall be of PVC extruded,
shrunk on or similarly applied; the colour shall be approved by the consultant.
Where the profile of the building consists of an overhang or re-entrant loop to be
formed in a down conductor the consultant shall be informed.
Metalwork, including pipe work, ductwork and armoured cables, adjacent to down
conductors shall be bonded to them unless the distance between them provides
adequate isolation.
Where reinforcement bars of the concrete structure forms the down conductors,
welding of the reinforcement shall be carried out by the building contractor. The
electrical continuity of the welded reinforcing bars shall be tested prior and after each
pour of concrete is completed.
Connection from the down conductors formed by reinforcement steel or the building
contractor shall make concrete clad steel frames. They shall comprise stainless steel
tape of not less than 25 x 3 mm, welded on to the steelwork. To determine and
coordinate the length of the tail to be left for subsequent connection.
Joints
Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum. All contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and coated with an anti-corrosive electrical jointing compound
suitable for the conductor material. For bi-metallic joints a separate abrasive shall be
used to clean the metal surfaces.
Joints between conductors of same Metal, other than at test points, shall be made by
thermal welding process or by riveting and sweating. Overlap of conductors shall not
be less than 100mm.
Where an aluminium conductor is joined to a copper conductor, one of the following
methods shall be used :
a. Bi-metal connector formed by friction welding of high purity copper and
aluminium.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-236/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. The copper conductor shall be completely sheathed for at least 100 mm of its
length with metal strip electrically compatible and aluminium, and then clamped
to the aluminium conductor.
Bi-metal joints shall not be made at test points nor between the test point and earth
electrode.
A test clamp shall be provided for each down conductor, it shall be located 1.2 meter
above the finished ground level unless otherwise indicated. Test clamps shall be of
cast gunmetal.
Bonding connections to other metal parts of the building shall be electrolytically
compatible with those metal parts. Screws and rivets shall be phosphor bronze or
naval brass or high tensile manganese brass for copper conductors.
Joint connections shall be protected by a coating which will form a seal and exclude
moisture in all weather conditions. At connections to earth electrodes the coating
shall cover all exposed conductors and, in case of earth pipes, the top surface of the
flanges. The Protective coatings shall be of waterproof, inert, tenacious materials
and of one of the following forms:
1. Solvent cutback thixotrodic corrosion preventative forming a film of resilient
matt petroleum wax.
2. A fast drying durable rubberized sprayed coating.
3. A heat shrink clear sheathing.
Conductors
Earthing conductors, main earthing bars and main bonding conductors shall be of
the type, size and conductor materials as detailed in the drawings or approved by the
consultant.
Tapes shall comply with B.S. 1432 where used to interconnect copper electrodes.
The tape may be bare, but for interconnecting pipe electrodes and for all other
purposes the tape shall have an extruded PVC sheath.
Main earthing bars shall comply with B.S. 1433 and shall be bare.
Cables shall comply with B.S. 6004, Table 1, without sheath, unless specified
otherwise.
Earth Electrodes
The type and number of earth electrodes shall be as indicated in the drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated, earth rods shall be 15mm normal diameter extensible
copper clad high tensile steel rods connected together. Copper cladding shall be
molecularly bonded to the steel and shall be not less than 0.25mm thick. Driving
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-237/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
heads shall be of high tensile steel. Screwed joints shall connect rods by one of the
following methods.
Threads shall be roll-formed with a minimum thickness of 0.05 mm copper in the
roots of the thread; couplers shall be of high strength silicon aluminium bronze alloy
and threads shall be counter bored at the ends so that the couplers completely
enclose the threads on the rods.
The ends of the rods shall be internally threaded; couplers shall comprise a copper
ferrule with the phosphor bronze coupler screw; a corrosion inhibiting paste shall be
applied to the threads on rods and couplers.
Pipe electrodes shall be flanged pipe complying with B.S. 2035 or B.S 4622, 150mm
bore and 3000 mm long. Pipe to B.S 2035 shall be shot blasted to remove the scale
and rust.
Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape shall be to B.S. 1432, of the size,
length depth below ground level and layout as indicted in the drawings.
Fixing
The consultants approval of the tape clips, saddles and holdfasts used shall be
obtained before the work is started. The maximum spacings of fixings shall not
exceed 600mm. No fixing shall be made into joints in masonry.
Saddles and holdfasts shall be of the following materials:
1. For copper conductors, gunmetal, aluminium -- Silicon bronze or naval
brass.
2. For aluminium conductors -- aluminium and aluminium alloy or Stainless
steel.
Clips either shall be of metal as above or of outdoor grade polycarbonate or
polypropylene with snap-on lids which can not be inadvertently removed. Clips and
saddles shall have rounded edges and countersunk screws. Brass components shall
not be used.
For general areas inside the building screws and nuts shall be of cadmium
electroplated steel or stainless steel; outside the building, in plant rooms or other
locations they shall be of stainless steel.
No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shall be
carried out without the approval of the consultant. Drilling and cutting of the outside
fabric of the building shall be carried out only after the consultant has given approval.
Inspection Pits
Unless otherwise indicated, connection between an earth conductor and its
associated earth electrode system shall be in an enclosure.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-238/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Installation
Backfills immediately surrounding electrodes shall have, low specific resistivity and
good water retention properties and it shall be well compacted and watered.
Where earth electrodes are to be installed through the base slabs of a building,
electrode seals shall be provided. As indicated, either the rods shall be driven and
the seals fitted before the concrete is poured or the seals handed over to the building
contractor for him to incorporate them in the slab and the rods driven at a later date.
Harmful ingress of water shall be avoided when driving the rods.
Pipe electrodes shall be installed with the flange at the top, in 500 mm diameter
bored boles. Electrodes shall be installed vertically in an excavated hole, with a
minimum depth of 2000mm below ground level; and 10 ohms ground resistivity.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-239/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
system switches or with no password security shall not be acceptable. Any device in
the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC location without having
to manipulate the device locally.
Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable
physical address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other device
via software programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual device will
respond to only those group addresses for which they are programmed to do so.
There shall be an EEPROM storing the physical address, group addresses & other
software parameters for every device, thus making it intelligent. No centralized
processors or centralized memory storage devices shall be permitted.
It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without
affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior
to dispatch of the material to site.
The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices. Two
consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as
network filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In
the event of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by
that device shall be affected and all other devices shall continue to operate as
normal. Any system with routers / couplers that require separate power supply shall
not be acceptable.
The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in
back-up power to compensate short voltage interruptions of up to 200 ms. This backup power shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on
or off or as it is) in the event of power failure.
The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring and
display an alarm LED in the event of faults in the wiring.
Each of the devices shall have a built-in push button along with a LED. The LED
shall lit in the event the push button is pressed and if there is power to the device,
thus depicting that the device is communicating in the system.
In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure each of the system devices
(switching modules and dimming controllersetc.) shall be programmed to attain a
fail safe position (controlled circuits to become On, Off or As it is, Last status)
All devices in the system should conform to CE standards and should be
manufactured in accordance with the EMC guidelines and the low voltage guidelines.
The Lighting control System shall be interfaced with the Building Management
System so as to monitor and control the required circuits from the BMS workstation.
The programmable lighting and control system shall consist of two levels of control
as follows:
1. Lighting Control PC based graphics software for time based control and
manual override by the operator. The software shall consist of graphics
based overview of the entire building, floors and going up to the individual
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-240/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
rooms. It shall have the necessary timer modules to control the circuits in the
form of various groups. It shall be possible to pre-program the time channels
in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. The lighting
control PC shall be located as shown upon the drawings.
2. In the event the PC is not operational or is switched Off, a second level of
standalone operation shall continue without the need for intervention via local
controller modules capable of being programmed with switching times locally
without the need to connect a PC. A 100-channel controller capable of being
programmed with multiple time schedules / lighting scenarios shall be
provided for the lighting and control system.
There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for each lighting circuits
distribution board. The LCP shall house the system devices and the related control
equipment depending on the number of circuits to be controlled. This is necessary to
ensure the power wiring between the DBs and the control modules inside the LCPs
is kept to a minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65 polycarbonate
enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control
equipment.
All lighting shall be controlled such that unnecessary lights shall be automatically
switched OFF based on occupancy as mentioned below. Also lights redundant due
to sufficient daylight shall be switched OFF based on light sensors and time
schedules.
The lighting main circulation areas shall be switched ON/OFF based on occupancymovement. Wall mounted Motion detectors shall be strategically located within the
circulation areas so as to provide the necessary coverage. Lights shall be switched
Off during the day to reduce consumption when no movement is detected. During
evening as per pre-programmed times, alternate circuits or as decided at the time of
commissioning shall remain On while the others shall continue to be controlled
based on movement. The movement sensors shall have a built-in lux sensor with an
adjustable set point so as not to switch On circuits even after detecting movement
due to sufficient natural light. There shall also be an adjustable Off delay on the
movement sensor from 1 sec to 16 min. to ensure that circuits are not switched Off
immediately. Further, the movement sensors shall incorporate an On-Auto-Off
switch for maintenance and local override purposes.
A Controller device consisting of at least 50 timer channels (groups) in the form of
lighting scenarios shall control circuits (such as switching lighting on/off, etc.) on a
particular network group (line) to have local standalone operation. It shall be possible
to send signals from one controller channel in one network to circuits in another
network if programmed to do so. This is to ensure that all timer channels are
available for control of all circuits in the system. Each controller shall be capable of
being programmed locally with timer programs for any of the 100 channels combined
together, without the need to connect a PC. Each of the channels shall have a
manual operation function to over-ride the channel to On or Off irrespective of the
time programs. The controller shall have a built-in EEPROM to ensure that the timer
programs and control groups are retained even in the event of power failure. This
controller device shall be in addition to the BMS PC based software time schedules
to ensure uninterrupted stand-alone operation of the system at all times.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-241/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-242/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
After the field of view is unoccupied for user- defined delayed off time, the sensor
will automatically turn off the lights.
PIR sensors use a semiconductor detector to sense the movement of infrared
emitted from the human body. They require an unobstructed line-of-sight for accurate
detection.
Locate PIR sensors with a clear line-of-view of area to be covered. Place the sensor
perpendicular to likely movement as a person is most easily detected when crossing
the boundary between one Fresnel lens element and another.
Minimum Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-243/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data : Submit manufacturers data and installation instructions for the
master antenna television system
B.
C.
Riser diagram: Submit riser diagram for the master antenna and satellite
reception system indicating type of different components in the system and
also the calculations of the signal level at each outlet.
D.
1.5
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTRODUCTION
A. The contractors shall provide, install, test and commission master antenna and
satellite reception system utilizing the multi-switch technology to distribute the IF
signals from 3 satellite dishes in addition to RF signal from VHF/UHF antenna.
B. The Contractor shall show evidence of having successfully completed at least
three similar projects of a comparable quality and magnitude.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-244/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
C. The contractor shall show evidence that he maintains a fully equipped service
organization capable of furnishing adequate maintenance of the installed
system.
D. After the system is installed the contractor shall furnish a complete set of
operating instructions, technical information and system drawings necessary for
the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
The drawings shall include signal levels throughout the system as they were on
the acceptance date of the system.
E. The contractor shall provide and install, all the required cable and wiring for the
systems specified. He shall pull cable into conduit and boxes, install all system
equipment and make all necessary connections. He shall also make necessary
tests and adjustments and put the entire systems in satisfactory operation.
F. The contractor shall investigate the electrical power standards of the local area
and the specific premises in which the equipment is to be installed. All equipment
shall be compatible with the local power supply, voltage and frequency.
G. All major items of equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer, where
practicable, to ensure a uniform quality and compatible styling and appearance.
H. The system shall be rated and capable of continuous twenty-four (24) hour
operation.
I.
TV sockets shall be provided from the same manufacturer of lighting switches and
sockets, TV socket shall support the SAT. Frequency.
2.2
A. The master antenna television system installed shall comply with all applicable,
International standards and code of practice and Qatari Standards.
B. It is the contractors responsibility to ensure compatibility of systems with
domestic television and radio equipment available in Qatar.
C. The master antenna television system shall be designed and installed by
competent personnel specializing in this type of work. Installation shall be carried
out to the highest standards of workmanship.
2.3
SYSTEM CRITERIA
A. The contractor shall supply the master antenna television system for satellite
reception television, for the distribution to outlet points as shown on the
drawings.
B. The system shall be based on the multi switching technology.
C. The Contractor shall install the dish farm on the building roof.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-245/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
2.4
A. Aerials suitable for receiving terrestrial broadcast shall be installed on the roof of
the building, with special amplifiers and/or filters. The aerial array would be of the
best quality and optimum type for the highest possible standard of reception.
B. The aerial shall be fitted to a mast mounted on the roof of the building.
C. All materials used in the fabrication of the aerials and their mountings shall be
protected against corrosion by heavy anodic coating, hot galvanizing or corrosion
resistant compound.
D. Aerials shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy with positive locking of all
elements in position. Square boom constructed is preferred.
E. Nuts, bolts, locking washers etc. shall be of such material or so treated that no
galvanic action can take place.
F. All aerials shall be supplied with a completely weather proof cased transformer to
provide the standard impedance of the system (75 ohm) and weather proof
glands with strain relieving properties shall be provided for the coaxial outlet
cable.
G. The feeders connecting the aerials to the multi-switch shall be of the highest
quality, the optimum type for the particular installation, and must be installed in
accordance with the current issue of international standard code of practice.
H. All radio-frequency levels in this section are to be construed as referred to one
microvolt across 75 ohms.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-246/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
I.
SECTION 21
2.5
A. Each aerial shall have its own integral spark gap and together with its co-axial
down-lead and the mast be bonded to a down-lead of at least 25x3mm. mm
cross section, terminating in a main earth.
2.6
The mast constructed of galvanized steel with a minimum diameter of 4 inches (10
cm).
The satellite dishes mast shall be protected against lightning damage by grounding
to the nearest approved system.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-247/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The satellite dish shall be grounded a common grounding points. The mast shall be
adequately supported on the reinforced concrete pad to withstand wind and other
environmental conditions, prevalent at this location.
All satellite dishes down-lead cables shall be fully shielded 75 Ohm coaxial type. All
cable fittings to the dish shall be covered with weather sealing devices and sealed
with silicone compound.
2.7
Four fixed parabolic dishes. The dishes shall be of the symmetrical parabolic type
and 2.4 m diameter. The components specification shall be as follow:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.8
Frequency range
Gain
Half power beam width
Material
:
:
:
:
FEED SYSTEM
10.95-12.75 GHz.
not less than 47 dB.
75 ohm.
40 dB (min.)
The feed system shall comprise a band pass filter for suppression of out band
distributing signals according to DIN/VDE 0855, part 12.
2.9.
Distribution System
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-248/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
iii. Shield
:100% coverage with aluminized mylar
or polyester foil plus copper or aluminum wire braid. (wire braid only
shield will not be acceptable).
iv. Jacket
:Polyvinyl chloride.
3. For horizontal coaxial cables, the attenuation shall be 12db/100m (at 800
MHz). These cables shall be used to connect between the TV outlets and
nearest multi switch unit.
2.17
TESTS ON SITE
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Color Performance.
Ghosting.
Resolution.
Synchronization performance, and any other measurements that
Engineer may which to perform.
System Performance.
System Recording.
S-21-249/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The generator shall provide crystal controlled carries at all channel frequencies
in bands I and III modulated with 1000 Hz. audio and appropriate video signal.
Output shall be variable between at least + 20 dB and +100 dB. The raw video
and audio signals shall also be available.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which master antenna and satellite
reception systems are to be installed and notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
21.2.29
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-250/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
A.
PV Cell
Electrical Characteristics
PV Element Type
Dimensions
Cells
Cell Distance
Edge Distance
TYP1
1500 x 1000 x 13.52 mm
24 Poly Cells (156 x 156 mm)
60 mm width and 10 mm length
Top 35.5 mm; bottom 35.5mm; left 135.5 mm;
right 135.5 mm
- 6mm heatstrength, glass lowiron
- Interlayer: PVB film
- Cell net
- interlayer: PVB film
- 6mm heat-strengthened glass
- 13.52 mm glass thickness
Nominal Power
:
98.72 Wp (+/- 5%)
Short Circuit Current
:
8.05 A
Nominal Current
:
7.53 A
Open Circuit Voltage
:
15.48 V
Nominal Voltage
:
13.13 V
Temp Coeff Voltage (Uoc) :
-0.34 %/K
Temp Coeff Current
:
0.06 %/K
Temp Coeff Power
:
-0.43 %/K
Weight
:
29.138 kg
B.
:
:
:
:
:
The Grid-tied Solar inverter shall synchronize its frequency with that of the grid using
a local oscillator and limit the voltage to no higher than the grid voltage. Grid-tied
Solar inverter shall have close to unity power factor, in turn having its output voltage
and current are perfectly lined up, and its phase angle shall be within 1 degree of the
AC power grid. The inverter shall be complete with an on board computer which will
sense the current AC grid waveform, and output a voltage to correspond with the
grid.
The Inverter shall be designed to shut off immediately after grid supply failure to
avoid blackout.
The Cooling system of the inverter shall be forced convection cooling. The Inverter
shall be with standard user display LCD screen 4-lines, with 20 character keypad.
The inverter shall have integral disconnection for both AC and DC sides with
following protection mechanisms.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-251/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
Technical Specifications
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-252/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
b. Site Tests
Site testing of all systems and components comprising the works shall be carried out
in the presence and to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant after the
contractor has first satisfied himself that the installation is functioning properly.
The contractor shall provide all certified instruments, equipment, plant, labour and
materials necessary for conducting specified site tests and shall be responsible for
and prepared to demonstrate the accuracy of all the test instruments supplied by
him.
The contractor shall give the Consultant, notice in writing when any portion of the
electrical installation is complete. Should the Consultant or his representative not
attend within 7 days of receipt of such written notice, the contractor may proceed
with the test, however duplicate certified copies of the results obtained shall be
forwarded the Consultant.
All electrical installations, plant and equipment tests shall fully satisfy the
requirements of KAHRAMAA and those laid down in the IEE regulations.
The contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all safety devices
etc., as required by KAHRAMAA. Once the contractor has satisfied himself that the
installation complies with KAHRAMAA requirements, he shall arrange for
KAHRAMAA to conduct their own test prior to handing over. Observations shall be
made of the operation and performance of the installation and subsequent
readjustments shall be made as necessary.
Records of commissioning and testing shall be kept and when the contractor has
satisfied himself that the installation is functioning correctly, the results shall be
comprehensively reported in a bound copy to the Consultant.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-253/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
The contractor shall also be held liable for any cost of dismantling or erection and
making good of any works, which may have to be undertaken in order to replace
defective parts.
d. Electrical Tests
As a minimum the contractor shall carry out the tests that follow:
1. All alarm, control and protective circuits shall be tested for correct operation.
2. All lighting circuits shall be energized and checked to ensure that they are all
operational.
3. All single pole switches shall be checked to ensure correct polarity and that
the live conductor has been connected. Neutrals must not pass through any
switch
4. All motors, plant and any electrical equipment connected with mechanical
services shall be checked to ensure that they run freely in the correct
direction of rotation and that they run without undue noise or vibration.
5. A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the
earth continuity conductor) of every ring circuit and all readings shall be
tabulated.
6. Insulation resistance tests shall be made before completing an installation or
major alteration to an existing installation if permanently connected to the
supply. For these tests, large installations may be divided into groups. A D.C
test voltage of not less than twice the normal voltage of the supply (R.M.S.
value of a A.C supply) shall be applied for the measurement of insulation
resistance provided that for tests on low voltage circuits, the test voltage
need not exceed 500 v. D.C. When measured with all fuse links in place, all
switches (including if practicable, the main switch) closed and except where
earthed concentric wiring is installed the insulation resistance for whole
installation shall not be less than 1 mega ohm. When measured between all
the conductors connected to any one pole or phase of the supply and in turn
all conductors connected to each other pole or phase of the supply, the
insulation resistance shall be not less than 1 mega ohm. Wherever
practicable, so that all parts of the wiring may be tested, all lamps shall be
removed and all current using apparatus shall be disconnected and all local
switches controlling lamps or apparatus shall be closed; where the removal of
lamps and/or the disconnection of current using apparatus is impracticable,
the local switches controlling such lamps and/or apparatus shall be open.
This test is not applicable to earthed concentric wiring system. Where
apparatus is disconnected for the tests, the insulation resistance between the
case or framework and all live parts of each item of fixed apparatus shall be
measured separately and shall comply with the requirements given in the
appropriate British Standard for the apparatus. If there is no appropriate
British Standard, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega
ohm.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-254/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
7. A verification of polarity shall be made to ensure that all fuses and single pole
control devices are connected in the phase conductor only. The centre
contact of Edison type screw lamp holders is connected to the phase
conductor and outer metal threaded part is connected to neutral conductor.
Wiring to plugs and socket outlets should be such that they are connected
with phase conductor on right when inspected from front. A proprietary type
of polarity testing device shall be used for the tests. The complete installation
shall be tested to ensure that all main switch gear is connected to give the
correct phase rotation.
8. The contractor or others responsible for the work shall test the effectiveness
of the earthing of each completed installation by means of an earth fault loop
impedance test. This test shall be carried out by using earth fault loop
impedance test instrument.
e. Commissioning
The contractor shall carry out the following:
1. Set all units and apparatus to work.
2. Adjust and set up all automatic controls, regulating devices, measure and
adjust any plant under his responsibility, duties and ratings and performance
of all components for all items installed separately and integrated into the
installation as a whole.
3. Record in detail each step and stage of commissioning and test results,
reporting the test stages until the tests are satisfactory.
4. The contractor shall carry out insulation, continuity, earth loop impedance,
switching and sequencing, direction of rotation and all other tests required
under the IEE regulations.
5. Should the test carried out fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment is
correctly installed and / or functioning correctly, then the Consultant shall
decide whether such failure is due to negligence upon the contractor's part
(including in this context as defined all his sub-contractors and suppliers) in
which case, the contractor shall carry out all remedial works entirely at his
own expense.
6. After remedial works have been completed the Contractor shall again report
to the Consultant for further tests to be carried out. The Consultant's
decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory result shall be final.
7. The completed installation or parts thereof shall be subjected to acceptance
tests as instructed by KAHRAMAA or the Consultants before being
connected to the Supply. Tests shall be includes as follows:
a. Tests as prescribed in the KAHRAMAA regulations.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-255/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
21.2.32 SPARES
The Contractor shall include manufacturer's spares for 2 years running, further to
the Warranty period, in addition to the spare parts mentioned in the QCS. These
shall be provided in this contract. Prior to order, the Contractor shall prepare in
triplicate a submittal listing all spares for each item/equipment, clearly detailing
manufacturer's name, address telephone and telex numbers and spare part
reference number, together with component cost. The submittal shall be passed to
the Engineer for approval and only upon receipt of approval in writing from the
Engineer may the final order be placed.
Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturers provide a warranty for providing
spares up to a period of 10 years for all the equipment supplied on this project.
The recommendation of 2 years (spare) shall be provided by the respective
approved manufacturer through the authorized local agent and to be delivered to
central stores.
The spares shall include but not limited to the following system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
Transformers
M.V. Panels
Sub main Boards & Distribution Boards
Fire Alarm System
Central battery system
S-21-256/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
21.2.33
AV System
CCTV and access control System
SMATV
Lighting control System
UPS
1. Lighting Switches
3. Mirror light
450 mm AFFL or
250 mm. above
worktop in kitchen and
Pantries
1600 mm AFFL
450 mm AFFL
7. Telephone outlet
450 mm AFFL
1350 mm AFFL
9. Thermostats
1700 mm AFFL
1500 mm AFFL
2200 mm AFFL
1250 mm AFFL
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-257/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
21.2.34
SECTION 21
1. MV Panel
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
QATAR
FRANCE
QATAR
EUROPE
QATAR
GERMANY
MERLIN GERIN
ABB
SIEMENS
ABB STROMBERG
SCAME
MEM
SACOMEC
EUROPE
ITALY
UK
FRANCE
4. Cables
DUCAB
OMAN CABLE
DOHA CABLES
UAE
OMAN
QATAR
5. MICC Cables
PYROTENAX BICC
AEI
WREXHAM
CANDA
UK
UK
PRISMIAN
PIRELLI CABLE
FIRECELL
UK
UK
UK
7. Cable Tray
DAVIS
SWIFT
BARTON
UK
UK
UK
8. Cable Trunking
SWIFT
BARTON
BURN TUBES
UK
UK
UK
BARTON
ALLIED
COMAT
UK
USA
UAE
COMAT
DECODUCT
MARSHALL TUFFLEX
QNPF
UAE
UAE
UK
QATAR
FP 200 GOLD
PIRELLI
ITALY
ITALY
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
FRANCE
EUROPE
GEMANY
S-21-258/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
FIRECELL
U.K
MK
UK
LEGRAND
FRANCE
MEM
UK
SCAME
ITALY
(CONTRACTOR MUST OBTAIN FINAL APPROVAL FROM THE CLIENT)
SIEMENS CERBERUS
SIMPLEX
EDWARD CANADA
HOCHIKI AMERICA
NOTIFIER
USA
USA
CANADA
USA
USA
CEAG
INOTEC
VENTILUX
USA
UK
UK
15. Earthing
W.J. FURSE
AN WALLIS
ERICO
UK
UK
GERMANY
VICON
VIDEOTRONIX
PHILIPS
G.E
BAXALL
AMERICAN DYNAMIC
DEDICATED MICRO
PELCO
SENDIAN TECHNOLOGY
SECURITY SYSTEM (STIS)
Nominated Vendor)
USA
17. UPS
MERLIN GERIN
SAFT
ALPHATEC
CHLORIDE
FRANCE
SWEDEN
CANADA
ITALY
ABB
LEVITON
MERTEN
ITALY
USA
GERMANY
COMAT
BURN TUBES
BARTON
UAE
UK
UK
CEAG
CROMPTON
RP TECHNIK
PHILIPS
USA
UK
GERMANY
HOLLAND
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
USA
UK
USA
& INTEGRATED
(Client
S-21-259/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 21
25. SMATV
WISI
GRUNDIG
TELEVES
GERMANY
GERMANY
USA
ABB
SIEMENS
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EUROPE
GERMANY
FRANCE
ABB
SIEMENS
MERLIN GERIN
EUROPE
GERMANY
FRANCE
NORDEX
LEVITON
ALCATEL
PANDUIT
USA
USA
FRANCE
USA
CATERPILLAR
CUMMINS/ONAN
KOHLER
SIEMENS
GE
BARDUCT
USA
UK
USA
GERMANY
USA
UK
ABB
GERMANY
SIEMENS
GERMANY
TRANSFO
FRANCE
(FINAL APPROVAL IS SUBJECT TO KHARAMAA APPROVAL)
ATEIS
SONY
CRESTRON
FRANCE
JAPAN
AUSTRALIA
HELUKABEL
PARTEX
INOTEC
USA
UK
UK
NORDEX
LEVITON
ALCATEL
CISCO
USA
USA
FRANCE
U.S.A
MEM
LEGTAND
MK
USA
FRANCE
UK
LEVITON
USA
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
S-21-260/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AEB-740-08-REV. 0
SECTION 21
ABB
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EUROPE
EUROPE
SHARP
MITSUBISHI
SANYO
JAPAN
JAPAN
GERMANY
S-21-261/261
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
SL. NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
22.1.00
COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.1.01
22.1.02
Work by Others
22.1.03
22.1.04
22.1.05
22.1.06
22.1.07
General Requirements
22.1.08
Tests at Site
22.1.09
Commissioning by Specialists
22.1.10
22.1.11
22.2.00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.2.01
22.2.02
Basis of Design
22.2.03
22.2.04
22.2.05
22.2.06
22.2.07
Pressurization Package
22.2.08
22.2.09
22.2.10
22.2.11
Vibration Isolators
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-1/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.12
22.2.13
Dampers
22.2.14
22.2.15
Filters
22.2.16
Flexible Connections
22.2.17
Flexible Duct
22.2.18
Sound Attenuators
22.2.19
Air Terminals
22.2.20
Fans
22.2.21
22.2.22
Insulation
22.2.23
22.2.24
22.2.25
Identification/Colour Coding
22.2.26
22.2.27
Test Holes
22.2.28
22.2.29
22.2.30
22.2.31
Warranty
22.2.32
22.2.33
Commissioning Sheets
22.2.34
22.2.35
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-2/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.1.00
COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.1.01
The work under this section of the specification shall include the supply, delivery to
site, installation, testing and commissioning and setting to work the Air conditioning
and Ventilation systems on shell and core basis for the Sendian Tower office
building, Lusail Area, Doha, Qatar.
The contractor shall provide all the materials, labour, cartage, plant and appliances
necessary for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the work and all
other minor and incidental works necessary for the system.
The specification and the drawings are intended to indicate the nature and over all
scope of the project. Any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or
among contract documents, or any doubts as to their meaning should be called to
the attention of the Consultants by the works contractor at the time of submitting his
tender.
The contractor shall visit the site and ascertain by himself the nature and scope of
the works, prior to tendering. It is important that the contractor fully familiarizes
himself about dismantling work if any - in connection with carrying out his work.
The Contractor is responsible for the installation of a complete system of correct
capacity and shall guarantee the efficient and optimum performance of the system
as a whole. Contractor shall guarantee for the efficient performance of various
equipment which shall not be less than the specified ratings when working under the
operating conditions for the respective items as given in the specifications.
It is mandatory to have performance testing under simulated conditions at the
factory of prospective suppliers of airside equipment, pumps etc. prior to shipment.
Anything, not specifically mentioned, but necessary for the fulfillment of the
guarantee and requirements called for in the contract or necessary for the proper
operation of the installations is to be provided by the works contractor without any
additional cost.
The works contractor shall guarantee holding a full set of spare-parts for all of the
equipment he intends to supply and install, for a minimum period of two years. In
addition, the contractor shall include for the supply of the said spares which shall be
delivered before the issue of the practical completion certificate.
Entire works shall be carried out as a single contract. All items of works even if not
listed in the Bill of Quantities but covered in the specifications or in the drawings are
deemed to be included in Contractors price. The contractor shall submit the lump
sum price for the whole woks with a breakdown for individual headings as per the Bill
of Quantities. No variation claims shall be entertained.
The contractor shall not without the consent in writing of the Engineer assign or
sublet his contract or any substantial part thereof other than for raw materials or
minor details. Consent for subletting shall not relieve the contractor from any
obligation, duty or responsibility under the contract.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-3/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
The contractor shall comply with all bye-laws and regulations of local and other
statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works and shall be responsible for
the payment of all fees and other charges and the giving and receiving of all
necessary notices. Works shall be carried out in conformity with the specifications
and in coordination with the architectural / structural / other services requirements
/constraints.
The contractor shall submit within seven days from the date of acceptance of the
tender, detailed schedules showing the programme and order in which the
contractor proposes to carry out the works with dates and estimated completion time
for various parts of the work in the form of bar-chart based on the critical path
method. Such schedules shall be approved by the Consultant before starting of the
work and shall be binding on the contractor.
Routine tests for various items of equipment shall be performed at the contractors
works, prior to shipment and test certificates shall be furnished. Contractor shall
inform and permit Engineer to be present during these tests. Contractor shall bear
all the expenses thereof.
The contractor shall operate, test and adjust all air conditioning, ventilation and
exhaust system units, fans, pumps, motors, all air handling units ,fan coil units, plate
heat exchangers etc. provided in connection with this installation and shall make all
necessary adjustments and corrections thereof including the adjustment of all
regulators, valves, dampers etc for the purpose achieving the design flow through all
ducts and to each and every outlet and inlet & through all piping and equipment.
If the completed plant or any portion thereof before it is taken over or during the
guarantee and defects liability period be found defective or fails to fulfill the intent of
this specification, the contractor shall on receipt of notice from the Consultant
forthwith make the defective plant good. Should he fail to do so within a time
considered reasonable by the Consultant, the owner may reject and replace at the
risk and expense of the contractor the whole or any portion of the plant which is
defective or fails to fulfill the requirements of the contract.
The contractor appointed for A/C works shall have the valid Grade A license from
KAHRAMAA (formerly QGEWC) or Credentials to that equal up to the discernment
of Consultant. A copy of the license shall be submitted to the Consultant. The
contractor shall also submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the A/C
Engineer, A/C Foreman and A/C Technicians to be employed on the project along
with their KAHRAMAA license copies, and obtain approval from the Consultant.
Inclusion in the list of approved manufacturers do not absolve the supplier/contractor
of his obligations to fulfill the detailed specifications in accordance with contract
documents.
Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders
submitted by the contractor who resorts to canvassing is liable to be rejected.
The Contractor is responsible for the safe storage, protection and safety of his
equipment and materials at site. All materials and equipment must be stored and
protected properly so as to prevent damage, corrosion, deterioration or dirt
penetration. Manufacturers recommendations shall be strictly followed regarding
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-4/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
storage. All duct and pipe outlets must be adequately closed to prevent dust and dirt
penetration during the course of erection.
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications shall
mean:
Specification
Contract
Site
Test on Completion
22.1.02
WORK BY OTHERS
All builders works related to equipment foundations, wall openings for ducting,
piping etc, final flashing and water proofing of roof openings, Access panels in false
ceilings for operation / maintenance, Door undercuts, Openings in doors for door
grilles shall be provided by the main Civil contractor.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-5/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
A/C contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other Contractors as necessary.
Particular attention is drawn to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
The division of work between the A/C contractor and the Electrical contractor shall
be as specified elsewhere under clause ELECTRICAL WORKS & CONTROL
SYSTEM .
22.1.03
The make, model and type of all equipment, materials and accessories proposed to
be used in the project are subject to prior approval of the Engineer.
All these equipment and other materials must have an established Local Qatari
Agent who shall have complete after-sales service & maintenance facility and also
holds adequate spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer
22.1.04
Unless otherwise specified, all equipment are to comply with the relevant British and
American codes of practice as listed below. However, the KAHRAMAA latest
regulations and requirements of Qatar Construction Specification (QCS) shall take
prominence over all other regulations.
1. ASHRAE
2. IHVE
3. ASME
4. AMCA
5. ARI
6. ASTM
7. AWS
8. DW 144
9. SMACNA
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-6/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
10. NFPA
11. QCS
12.
13 AABC
14. HI
15. NEBB
16. CIBSE
The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air conditioning
installation.
A competent Engineer must be in regular attendance throughout the whole contract.
The whole of the installation shall be executed in conformity with the specification,
internationally accepted codes of practice and the current KAHRAMAA/QCS
regulations.
22.1.05
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
22.1.06
General
All drawings and material submissions, other information and samples must be
supplied to the Consultant as laid in the specifications or as instructed by the
Consultant.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-7/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall supply to the Consultant a set of 'As-Built' drawings showing
the works 'As-Built' together with any other information necessary for operation and
maintenance. Four copies of each such drawing shall be supplied.
In addition, two sets of copy negatives for each drawing and a CD-ROM with all the
drawings shall be handed over to the client.
Material Submittals
On award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide a list of the items for which
they propose to furnish submittals. All submissions shall be made within 15 days of
the award of the contract or earlier as directed by the Consultant.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-8/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
The Contractor shall furnish submittals in triplicate or as required for all the
equipment and materials to the Consultant.
Wherever recommended/approved makes have been specified, the contractor shall
comply with the requirements of the specification. If it is necessary to offer any
alternate or substitute material, the contractor may do so, but clearly substantiating
the necessity for the change, cost comparisons, technical equivalence or superiority
of the proposed substitute etc for the scrutiny of the Consultant.
The following information should at least be covered while furnishing the submittals:
i.
The approval of a submittal shall not absolve the Contractor of their responsibility to
provide equipment's/materials/services conforming to the Specifications, Bill of
Quantities and the application in question.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and proper performance of a complete functional system even
though some items may not have been specifically stated in the contract documents.
Waivers for deletion/deviation from the Specification, Tender drawings, Bill of
Quantities etc., must be requested by the Contractor in writing, stating categorically
the change compared to the contract (specified vis-a-vis proposed). The same shall
be considered 'waived' only if written specific approval is obtained from the
Consultant.
The approval of a submittal, any implicit reference or verbal instructions shall not be
treated as a waiver. Waivers shall also be subject to reduction in cost and/or time,
conditional or unconditional as decided by the Consultant.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-9/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Samples of Materials
The Contractor shall submit at no extra cost or charge and with no recourse to any
claim for extra time, samples of materials as required by the Consultant for his
approval.
Time required for arranging the sample shall be considered by the Contractor.
Engineer shall and approve the sample and the submittal with reasonable
promptness.
Samples shall remain at site till the final Handing over.
ii. A set of 'As-Built' drawings showing equipment layout, foundation details, ducting
layout and details, electrical wiring & drain piping.
The drawings shall show plans and sections necessary to show all required
information correctly.
iii. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagram and installation drawings
relevant only to the particular item of air-conditioning and ventilation equipment
concerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable.
iv. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment.
v. Operational description of the air conditioning plant including starting, stopping
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-10/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-11/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
be provided by the A/C contractor. All such scaffoldings shall be approved by the
Consultant.
Hoisting / lifting facilities to mount the equipment at their final position shall be the
responsibility of the A/C contractor in co-ordination with the Main Contractor Safety
issues shall be given top priority.
22.1.08
TESTS AT SITE
General
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, one month prior to the date of
commencement of the tests, three (3) copies of the complete test procedures to be
used. The procedures, method of calculation etc., shall be approved by the
Consultant before any test is carried out. Three (3) copies of the test results shall be
furnished to the Consultant for his approval.
The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and
carryout tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or a
complete system if the Consultant requests such a test, for determining specified or
guaranteed data as given in the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled
in by the Contractor. Commissioning and balancing of the HVAC systems, networks
and equipment must be carried out by AABC / NEBB certified independent agency.
Any damage resulting from the test shall be repaired and/or damaged material
replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In the event of any repair or
adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests
shall be void and shall be recommended after the adjustments or repairs have been
completed. The test shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's
control. All testing, balancing and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the
provision of the applicable 'ASHRAE' standards.
Ductwork
All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air
quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and
splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.
Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC / NEBB certified independent agency.
Equipment
All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted
and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet
on the drawings.
Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation,
functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the
equipment or system during tests.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-12/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
If air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the
sheaves or the available horse-power, the Consultant shall be notified before
proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system.
Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed
to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
Water Systems
After thorough cleaning of water piping and completion of water treatment, the
stabilizing chemicals shall be added. The final water analysis report shall be
approved by the consultant.
All equipment such as chillers, pumps, air handling units, fan coil unit etc. main
chilled water headers and branches shall be tested for water flow rate.
All the flow control devices shall be adjusted and the design water flow rate shall be
established in all piping, branches and across all equipment
The total water flow rate shall be within + 5% of design
The terminal water flow shall be within + 5% of design
Commissioning and balancing of the HVAC systems , networks and equipments
must be carried out by AABC/NEBB certified independent agency.
Electrical Equipment
All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of
power as mentioned below:
i.
ii. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits and
equipment using a 500 volt megger. The megger reading shall not be less than
one mega ohm.
iii. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed half
(1/2)ohm.
iv. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.
v. Operating tests on all protective relays, starters, circuit breakers etc., to prove
their correct operation before energizing the main equipment.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-13/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
With the plant on initiative fire mode change over for each zone and verify the
sequence of events. Repeat the exercise with the plant OFF.
Test all fire dampers / smoke dampers to ensure that they close fully with fans
operating.
Test on Completion
After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible
for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of
the plant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are
met or approximated. The ventilation trial shall take place at any reasonable time
subject to the approval of the Consultant. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one
(31) consecutive days during which time the whole of the plant shall operate
continuously without readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Consultant
During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the
refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more
than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall
be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air handling unit. Should any part
of the apparatus or system fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be
adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
The complete performance test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement
of the above said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Consultant.
As soon as all tests prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the
opinion of the Consultant, a formal Letter of Completion shall be drawn up in three
(3) copies and signed by the Consultant.
22.1.09
COMMISSIONING BY SPECIALISTS
Commissioning and balancing of the HVAC systems, networks and equipment must
be carried out by AABC/ NEBB certified independent agency.
Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC / NEBB certified independent agency.
Wherever necessary, it is the responsibility of the contractor to arrange and provide
all requirements for the specialists to assist him/them in the pre-commissioning
activities, start up and commissioning activities for Energy transfer Station, Stair
case/smoke stop lobby pressurization system, Basement car park ventilation system
and any other equipment / systems
22.1.10
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-14/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.1.11
All equipment, accessories and the complete system and works shall be guaranteed
for 400 days of un-interrupted operation, against all manufacturing defects and
installation defects.
For those equipment with longer guarantee/warranty period, such as compressors of
split A/C units, same shall be passed on as back-to-back basis.
The guarantee shall start from the date the Letter of Practical Completion is issued.
During the Guarantee period the Contractor shall provide free maintenance and
service for all equipment and the systems installed. The Contractor shall replace or
repair all defective parts at no cost to the Client.
In addition, regular visits of specialist maintenance personnel as required by the
equipment supplier shall be provided.
During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment
and apparatus fulfill the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all
fans, pumps, refrigeration and air-conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to
adjust all dampers, thermostats and controls and shall provide the Consultant with a
complete log and report indicating air quantities, fan speed, power consumption,
temperature, sound level etc.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-15/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
22.2.01
A/C System
The air conditioning scheme is based on chilled water supplied by district cooling
system of M/s MARAFEQ. The Energy transfer station (ETS) with flow meter and
other controls, valves etc will be installed and commissioned by the contractor.
Chilled water is made available in the secondary side of the ETS.
AC system comprising of ETS mentioned above, circulation pumps, pressure
breaker, treated fresh air handling units, fan coil units, network of ducting, piping,
fittings and valves is provided for the whole building. For some of the areas stand
alone dedicated split A/C systems have been provided.
Fan coil units are provided for air conditioning in the landlords areas.
Filtered and treated fresh air shall be supplied to the FCU.
22.2.02
BASIS OF DESIGN
The broad design parameters for the Air conditioning and Ventilation system shall be
as follows:
0
46 C DB & 30 C WB
100 C DB & 90% RH
c. LIGHTING LOAD
11 Watts/sq.m
15 Watts/sq.m
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-16/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
g. Glazing: 6MM CARDINAL ADVANCED+ 16mm Air Space +6mm Clear glazing
U factor = 1.3 watts /sq.m/C
Shading coefficient = 0.32
h. Rating for continuous service and local ambient conditions
The outside air temperature may occasionally rise to 520 C All apparatus shall be
rated for continuous service, Twenty Four hours a day, year round throughout its
normal rated life except for necessary routine maintenance. The contractor shall
0
offer equipment, which is capable of operating at the ambient temp. of 52 C without
any failure.
22.2.03
All starting devices shall be interlocked and shall be shut off upon signaling from Fire
Alarm Control Panel.( addressable )
22.2.04 INTER DISCIPLINE CO-ORDINATION
Apart from full time co-ordination with the main contractor, following co-ordinations with
other disciplines shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-17/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Indoor Unit
i.
The refrigerant circuit shall have one-shot couplings for liquid and gas inlets, a
capillary tube, a strainer and an evaporator coil.
ii. The evaporator coils shall be the multi-pass cross-finned tube type, equipped with
aluminium plate fins, mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes.
The fins shall be spaced at not more than 16 fins per 25.4 mm. The coil shall be
cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
iii. The unit must be provided with anti-vibration mountings external to the unit.
iv. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec.
v. The evaporator fan shall be forward curved, centrifugal type, statically and
dynamically balanced and directly driven by the motor. The fan motor shall be
permanently lubricated.
vi. The evaporator fan must be selected to operate quietly with no overloading of the
motor.
vii. The cabinet shall be constructed of finished steel, baked resin paint for a bottom
and top panel. Re-inforced plastic for side panels and front grilles are acceptable
as per manufacturers standard. The cabinet interior shall be fully insulated
thermally and acoustically and shall be guaranteed to prevent sweating in the
highly humid design conditions.
viii. The air filter shall be easily removable and shall be washable type. The thickness
shall be as recommended and supplied by the manufacturer.
ix. Evaporator motor shall be easily removable for maintenance.
x. Drain pan shall be factory provided, metallic, treated for corrosion resistance and
fully insulated at the bottom. The drain from the drain pan shall be connected to
the unit drain pipe.
Outdoor Unit
i.
The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, piped internally, pre-wired and shall
be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 52 deg. C.
ii.
The refrigerant circuit shall be composed of a gas inlet, one shot coupling, a
condenser coil and a liquid outlet one shot coupling.
iii. The condenser coil shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned type, equipped with
aluminium plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes.
The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
iv. The condenser fan shall be propeller type in all aluminum construction or FRP as
per manufacturers standard, statically and dynamically balanced and the fan shall
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-18/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
be directly driven by the motor for up flow or horizontal air discharge. The motor
shall be permanently lubricated and shall be protected form water invasion.
v. The unit shall contain a hermetic multi-cylinder reciprocating compressor from the
same manufacturer. The compressor shall be direct in-line type and equipped with
vibration proof rubber. The hermetic compressor shall be welded shell type and
spring suspended internally. The compressor shall be protected against a
breakdown by the mercury over current relay, pressure switch and an in-built
internal thermostat.
vi. The cabinet shall be constructed of steel, finished with baked synthetic resin paint.
The fan guard wire net shall be mounted on top or side of the unit.
The units shall incorporate the following accessories.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Unit Control
The indoor unit shall be equipped with an operation switch, fan speed selector switch
and a thermostat mounted on the remote control switch. The operation switch shall
have the function of OFF-FAN-COOL. The control switch shall be wired type or remote
type as approved by the Consultant or as shown in the drawing.
The operation control shall conform to manual starting, automatic continuous operation
whenever the thermostat requires and protection devices allow. The unit shall be
restarted by resetting the operation switch if any one of the protection devices trips.
The controls shall include high-low pressure switches, oil pressure protection switches
and thermal overload cut-out
Protection Devices
The magnetic switch box incorporated in the outdoor or indoor unit shall contain
magnetic contactor for all motors, including condenser fan motor, over current relays,
auxiliary relays and other safety devices as per manufacturers standard.
Operation Sequence
A rotary type switch on the remote control box manually selects the ventilating or
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-19/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
cooling operation. When the operation switch is set at 'FAN' the evaporator fan is
started. When the operation switch is set at 'COOL' and all electrical protective
devices are satisfied, the thermostat in the remote control box controls the compressor
operation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An
assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and
construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility for the complete pumping
package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and
successful operation all system components supplied by the pumping system
manufacturer.
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design
and construction of variable speed pumping systems.
C. All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the
factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to
VFD output and it shall test inputs, outputs and program execution specific to
this application.
D. The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards
Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at the
time of submittal.
E. Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as a manufacturer of
packaged pumping systems.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-20/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
F. Contractor shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged
pumping systems. If no deviations are noted, the supplier or contract shall be
bound by these specifications.
100 mm. diameter suction and discharge pressure gauges, siphons and cocks.
Siemens (Germany)
ABB (Finland)
Emerson (USA)
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-21/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-22/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
2. ABB (Finland)
3. Danfoss (France)
PUMP LOGIC
MARAFEQ)
CONTROLLER
(BY
DISTRICT
COOLING
COMPANY-M/s
The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of
Underwriters laboratory, Inc (UL) The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC
regulations pertaining to Class A computing devices. The controller shall be
specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications.
The variable speed pump controller shall function to a proven program that
safeguard against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
a. Motor Overload
b. Pump Flow Surges
c. Hunting
End of Curve Protection: The pump logic controller through a factory preprogrammed algorithm shall be capable of protecting the pumps from hydraulic
damage due to operation beyond their published end-of-curve. This feature requires
an optional flow meter for activation.
The pump logic controller shall be capable of staging and destaging pumps based
on an efficiency optimisation program to provide the lowest kw draw. This
optimisation program requires an optional flow meter, kw meter and system
differential pressure sensor for activation.
The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting discrete analog inputs from
zone sensor/transmitters. Analog input resolution shall be 12 bit minimum, and the
controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 100 milli seconds.
Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not acceptable.
All
sensors/transmitter inputs shall be individually wired to the pump logic controller for
continuous scan and comparison function. All analog inputs shall be provided with
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-23/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
current limit circuitry to provide short circuit protection and safeguard against
incorrect wiring of sensors.
The pump logic controller will select analog input signal that deviates the greatest
amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command
feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting.
The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional integral derivative
control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be useradjustable over an infinite range. The scan and compare rate that selects the
command set point and process variable signal shall be continuous and
automatically set for optimum performance. Each sensor shall be scanned at least
once every 100 milli seconds.
The pump controller shall be capable of controlling pumps in parallel.
The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be displayed
in plain English. The following features shall be provided:
a.
b.
c.
d.
The variable speed pumping system shall be provided with a user-friendly operator
interface complete with membrane switches and numeric keypad. Display shall be
no less than four lines with each line capable of displaying up to twenty characters.
The human interface panel shall display the following values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-24/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-25/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Gasketed Plate Heat Exchangers and associated valves in the ETS room
shall be provided by the contractor.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Compliance Statement with specifications
1. Submit full compliance to project specification as detailed below
B. Product Data: Manufacturers specification and technical data including
performance, construction and fabrication:
1. Submit product data for each heat exchanger. Furnish all necessary
references for each specification complied as per product specification.
2. Submit materials certificates for each heat exchanger
3. Submit sample pressure test certificate for offered model complying to
PED
C. Shop Drawing: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes,
general construction, component connections, lifting methods, installation
procedure.
D. Certification
1. Submit ISO 9001 Certificate
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0
2.1
Design Requirements
2.1.1
Application
2.1.2
Type
2.1.3
Performance Requirements
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-26/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
2.1.5
2.1.6
The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit.
2.1.7
The units shall withstand the maximum 10bar on either hot or cold side with the
opposite side at 0 bar or as per schedule.
2.1.8
Units to be factory tested in accordance with PED code. Manufacturer to comply with
PED and mention compliance of the same on all data sheets.
2.1.9
Manufacturers name
Type of Unit
Serial No.
Year of manufacture
Fluid group
Inlet / Outlet connections
Volume
Design Pressure
Design temperature
Test Pressure
Test Pressure date
2.1.10 Provide factory sealed rigid reinforced covers for openings before and during
shipment from factory to job site.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Plates
a) One piece pressed type stainless steel AISI 316 plate, 0.5 mm thick and with 2B
finish and tapered gasket groove.
b) The plates shall not have holes for sealing of gasket
c) Each plate to have herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with
nominal pressure losses.
d) The pressing depth of one plate should not exceed 2.5mm.
e) Design of plates to strictly follow countercurrent and parallel flow principle.
f) Design to allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal of
the plate on either side.
g) Design shall prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of the
unit
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-27/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
h) Each plate should strictly have a built in five point alignment system to accurately
locate the plates in the frame assembly to prevent lateral plate movement under
pressure.
i) Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent
bending hangers on the plate.
j) The maximum length of the plate should not exceed 2500mm.
k) Plates to be specifically manufactured in order to obtain design delta T.
2.2.2
Gasket
a) One piece, molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBR) Clip / Clip AD / Tape ON gasket.
b) Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause
leak to outside of unit.
c) The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip / Clip AD / Tape On method.
d) The gaskets should not be used for locking of the plates before tightening.
2.2.3
Frame
a) The frame assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame
assembly
b) The frame shall be carbon steel construction coated with two part blue paint.
c) The minimum thickness of the frame plate and pressure plate shall be as
mentioned in the schedule.
d) The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of
movement without additional rigging or handling equipment.
e) Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight.
f) Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum high
width hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load.
g) Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes.
h) Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads
i) Connections to be studded port design.
j) The minimum thickness of the frame and pressure plates shall be as mentioned
in the schedule.
2.3
Accessories
2.3.1
Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat
exchanger
2.3.2
Provide factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation cover for each heat
exchanger. The insulation cover shall be designed for easy removal and
replacement to facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
2.3.3
Provide stainless steel suitcase type latches to facilitate assembly and disassembly
of the insulation pieces.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-28/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
2.3.4
The insulation panel shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3/4h exterior plating, 60mm
polyurethane foam insulation, 0.05mm Aluminum foil inside layer and 20mm
Armaflex lining at the bolt holes.
2.4
Manufacturers
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
References of service jobs carried out in the Middle East to be provided by the
supplier detailing the list of client served.
2.4.4
Manufacturer to confirm that all the units manufactured are as per PED code.
2.4.5
2.4.6
Supplier to furnish references for a minimum of three installation in Middle East for
similar operating temperatures and pressure. The installation should be in operation
for at least two years from the date of commissioning.
2.4.7
The manufacturer to confirm availability locally in the Middle East of all essential
spare parts for the plate heat exchanger proposed.
2.4.8
22.2.09 BASE MOUNTED TREATED FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH RECOVERY HEAT
UNIT
General
The roof mounted TFAHU shall be modular in construction and shall have sections
and capacity as per the schedule. The Sizes and connections of the units shall be
selected to fit into the spaces available without affecting the architectural integrity of
the building. Manufacturers of the TFAHU shall have ISO 9001 certification and
EUROVENT certification.
Casing
The unit casing shall be of double skinned panels. Casing shall be assembled with
self supporting modular panels with an integrated base frame made of aluminium
and section along upper sides of units. Sheet metal thickness shall be 1.0 mm. for
the inner skin and 1.0 mm. for the outer skin and made from zinc coated steel
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-29/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
sheets. Outside of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 mm. for
additional protection. Inside and outside of the panel wall shall be completely
smooth. Overall heat transmittance shall not exceed k = 0.59 w/mk.
All casing panels shall be insulated by fibre glass layer of 50 mm. thickness,48
Kg/cu.m density.
The sound absorption through the panel shall be Rw = 42 db (weighted sound
reduction factor). Panel shall be assembled with special rivets. The inspection side
of the coil section panels shall be assembled with bolts and nuts for easy removal of
coils. Panel air tightness shall be as per industry standards. Air handling units shall
be selected to achieve the required NC level in the air conditioned space.
The base frame of the unit shall be made from hot dipped galvanized U-profile.
Service doors shall be provided with special gaskets and locking device. Access
doors 400 mm. and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external
and internal opening. Sealant between panels shall be an anti fungicide sealant
material.
AHU manufacturer shall ensure that panel construction shall be without any thermal
bridges and shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of
the panels.
Roof mounted TFAHU shall be of weather proof construction.
Fan Section
Fan shall be double inlet double width aerofoil backward curved centrifugal type. The
blades shall be made of galvanized steel. Centrifugal fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced at the factory as complete fan assembly. (Fan wheel, shaft
motor, drive and belts).
Fans and shaft shall operate well below their critical speeds. If any out of balance is
apparent on the site, the Engineer reserves the right to request new factory supplied
units to be provided until satisfactory balance is demonstrated.
Fan bearing shall be lubricated type with extended Lube lines to terminate outside
the fan section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 100,000 hours of operation.
TFAHU fan and motor drive shall be oversized by at least 20% and shall be fitted
with adjustable belt tension arrangement.
The air-handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan,
motor and drive assembly on rubber isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected
to the air-handling unit casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration
transfer.
Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanized steel base
frame with an easily adjustable motor slide rail. Motors shall be totally enclosed, foot
mounted, fan cooled IP54 with class F insulation.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-30/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Coil Section
Cooling coils shall be of cartridge type mounted on Aluminium slide rails for easy
resolvability. The number of fins shall be fixed at 12FPI to optimize performance
requirements. Coil casing shall be 1.5 mm thick galvanized steel with drain holes on
the bottom channels to ensure condensate drainage. Coil tubes shall be heavy
gauge copper mechanically expanded into aluminium plate fins. All joints shall be
silver brazed. Coils shall be designed to utilize the full available unit cross section
area and mounted on slide rail to allow for easy removal when required. Coils shall
be proof tested at 26 bar (375 psig) and leak tested at 17 bar (250 psig). Coil
performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
Cooling coil shall be provided with corrosion protective coating and guaranteed for
min.5 years from the date of completion.
Drain pans shall be stainless steel either integrated in the insulated base or placed
under the coil within the coil section; drain pans shall be sloped and shall have drain
connection to the service side.
Filter Section
50 mm. thick aluminium frame permanent washable filter made of many layer of
coffered metal mesh ( aluminium ) flat filter having average filtration efficiency 70%,
recommended filter replacement p = 200 pa , filter class B acc. EN 1886.
TFAHUs shall have an additional bag filter section. Bag filter media shall have
minimum dust spot efficiency of 55% as determined by opacimetric method.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-31/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-32/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
the fan coil unit schedule. Special attention is drawn to the low noise requirements of
the units.
The unit shall comply with the following specification.
Description
The fan coil unit shall be completely factory built and assembled and shall be
installed at high level as indicated on the drawings. The cabinet shall be fabricated
of continuous galvanized steel and finished in dried enamel. The panels shall be
easily removable and shall be insulated with thick sprayed polyurethane foam or
1 thick fibre glass insulation with neoprene coating. The base of the cabinet shall
also be galvanized steel. All the panels shall be provided with gaskets in order to
avoid any air leakage from the sides.
Fans shall be forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type, statically
and dynamically balanced and mounted on a steel shaft. Fans shall have
permanently lubricated, self aligning ball bearings. Fan wheel and housing are to be
of galvanized steel.
The motor shall be of the totally enclosed type for protection against dust and
external particles suitable for operation on 240V, single phase, 50Hz, A.C. supply.
The motor shall be fitted with life lubricated bearings having three speed and
complete with thermal overload protection. All units shall be provided with OFF-HIMED-LOW fan speed switch (remote) and air vent.
The cooling coils shall be staggered tube type constructed of seamless copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins and shall be factory tested at 125psig air pressure. The
coils shall be suitable for the duty requirements as specified in the schedule and
shall be minimum 3 rows deep. The coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.5m/sec. The
cooling coils shall be completely drainable type.
The drain pan shall be fabricated of stainless steel insulated with closed cell
insulation and sealed with mastic for maximum protection against corrosion and
sweating.
The back side of the panel shall have a filter frame with bottom filter access. The
filter shall be washable type having thickness as recommended by the manufacturer.
All Fan coil units shall be manufactured and selected basing on 8.9 C temperature
difference on the water side. Any modification to the air quantities and
consequently on the duct work sizes shall be accounted for in the contractor
tender price
22.2.11
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
All plant and supports shall be isolated from the building structure and the supports
isolated from other items of equipment in such a manner that noise and vibration are
not transmitted through the structure.
The spring mounts shall consist of cast metal telescopic housings with resilient
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-33/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
inserts as guides between the top and bottom housings. The mounts shall
incorporate built-in leveling arrangement. The bottom plate of the mount shall be
fitted with 6 mm. thick synthetic rubber pad to reduce transmission of high frequency
noise and vibrations. The metal casing and the springs shall be powder coated for
protection against corrosion. The springs shall be color coded to facilitate
identification.
Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over inertia blocks made out of reinforced
concrete or concrete-filled welded steel framework. The weight of the inertia block
shall be at least 1.5 times the total working weight of the pump sets. The inertia
blocks shall be mounted over cased spring mounts, as described above, with
minimum 25 mm. deflection. Protruding steel lugs/brackets or recesses shall be
provided in the inertia base to facilitate installation of spring mounts.
Roof mounted air handling units shall have anti-vibration mountings in the following
form:
Multi-layer rubber pads with square grid convolutions on both sides, spaced with
steel shims and of a thickness to suit the points of uniform loading of the plant item,
but of a minimum thickness of 32 mm. spaced not more than 750 to 1000 mm apart.
Fan-coil units and inline fans shall be provided with spring type anti-vibration
hangers having steel frame and helical compression type springs with minimum
25mm deflection.
The springs shall be located within synthetic rubber cups to reduce transmission of
high frequency noise and vibrations. The rubber cup shall be complete with
embedded load distribution steel plate and with projection bush to prevent metal to
metal contact. The metal frame and the springs shall be powder coated for
protection against corrosion. The springs shall be colour coded to facilitate
identification.
roof mounted centrifugal and axial fans shall be installed on cased spring mounts as
described above with minimum 25mm. deflection. The mounts shall be installed
under the combined fan-motor frame.
All piping connected to isolated equipment and pipes within mechanical rooms shall
be suspended from spring type anti-vibration hangers as described above for at
least first three points of support on all sides of the equipment. Pipes running at low
level shall be mounted on cased spring mounts. The spring hangers and mounts
used for supporting pipes shall have minimum 25 mm deflection.
Structural columns or vertical steel pipes used as supports for water pipes shall have
extended base plates that rest on rubber pads of adequate load bearing capacity.
Suitable rubber grommets shall be provided to avoid contact between the base
plates and the fixing bolts.
The ratings of anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall suit the load distribution data
furnished by the equipment manufacturer with adequate margin of safety for weights
of water and accessories/fittings connected to the equipment. The vibration
isolators shall be installed in accordance with the makers recommendations. The
Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that the performance of isolators is suitable for
the machinery to be installed. All anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall be subject
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-34/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.12
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-35/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Open ends of ducts shall be covered during erection with plastic sheeting to prevent
ingress of dust and rubbish.
Where damage (or rusting) has occurred on galvanized ductwork, the affected
section shall be made good by preparing, cleaning and painting with two coats of
zinc rich paint and an approved finishing paint. Where damage, in the Engineers
opinion, cannot be made good, then a new section of ductwork shall be provided at
no cost to the contract.
All ductwork supports and hangers shall be painted with two coats of zinc rich paint.
The steelwork supports at roof level shall be provided by the Works Contractor and
shall be painted with two coats of black bitu mastic paint.
All ductwork supports and hangers shall be of the angle iron and drop rod type or
other approved suspension systems:
1. Neoprene/compressible rubber strip or timber spacers shall be inserted between
the ducts and supports to reduce the transmission on noise and vibration and to
provide a thermal break.
2. Vertical drop rods or angle support members shall be positioned as close to the
edge of the duct as possible, but not touching it. The supports shall be outside
any insulation, vapor sealing or other finish.
3. Additional supports shall be provided adjacent to dampers, grilles, diffusers, or
other similar equipment so as to prevent duct distortion.
4. Maximum support center shall be 2.4m for any horizontal or vertical ducts and
1.2m for large horizontal ducts whose cross section area exceeds 3 sq.m. On no
accounts shall angles, used for ductwork stiffening, or joints be used as part of
the supports.
5. No ceilings, light fittings or any other equipment shall be supported from the
ductwork or the ductwork supports.
ii) Materials
This specification shall apply to ductwork and fittings made from hot dip galvanized
sheet or coil to BS 2989 Grade Z2 Coating type C. Should this material not be
available the following alternative are acceptable:
1. Hot dip galvanized sheet or coil to BS 2989 Grade Z2 or Z3 with iron-zinc alloy
coating type IZ.100 or IZ.180 or equal.
2. Cold rolled sheet or coil to BS 1449, Grade CR4 having a zinc coating applied by
electric plating. (Coating thickness 2.5 microns or equal).
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-36/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
iii)
Construction
a) General
The constructional requirements for rectangular ductwork have been established
following independent tests, the limits of use being related to the characteristics
of rolled steel angle longitudinal beams, cross joints and stiffeners described in
this Specification.
b) Sheet thickness
Minimum sheet thickness is 0.6mm. The sheet thickness for various dimensions
shall confirm to DW 142.
c) Longitudinal Seams
Sealant shall be used with all longitudinal seams irrespective of the pressure
class.
The sealant must be included in the seam during manufacture or be applied as
an edge sealant. All joints are to be neatly Pop-riveted or spot-welded. No folded
seams will be allowed.
i)
The minimum metal thickness shall be 0.6 mm. In all cases the larger dimensions
and/or pressure classification shall determine the sheet thickness and stiffening.
ii) Stiffeners
The flat side of fittings shall be stiffened in accordance with the construction. On the
flat sides of bends, stiffeners shall be arranged in a radial pattern, with the spacing
measured along the center line of the bend.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-37/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
iii) Splitters
Splitters shall be attached to the duct by bolts or mechanically closed rivets at 100
mm maximum spacing.
vi) Branches
A branch should be taken off a straight section of duct, not off a taper. Connection of
branch to duct shall be cleats, rivets or bolts, and sealant shall be used between
ducts and branch.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-38/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
d) For insulated ducts, all access doors shall be of double panel insulated
construction, with the insulation thickness matching that of the surrounding
ducts. For un insulated ducts, access doors may be of single panel construction.
All duct access doors shall be mounted in their own separate frames.
Width of Duct
Supporting
bottom angle
iron
Alternative
flat iron
hanger
Rod Hanger
(Galvanised)
Bolt
30x30x3 cms
25x3 mm
6 mm
6 mm
40x40x4 cms
30x4 mm
8 mm
8 mm
50x50x5 cms
30x3 mm
10 mm
10mm
:
:
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-39/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
PROTECTIVE FINISHES
i) Metal Spraying
Zinc or aluminum spraying shall be to BS 2569 Part 1 (1964) and used only for
remedial works.
ii) Paints
a) Surface preparation and Paint application
Surface preparation of the metal and paint application shall be in accordance
with the paint manufacturers recommendations.
b) Making Good Welding Damage
Galvanizing or other metallic zinc finish damaged by welding shall be suitably
cleaned and painted with two coat of zinc-rich or aluminum paint.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-40/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.13
DAMPERS
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-41/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
The dampers shall have sturdy corrosion resistant construction. All dampers shall
have multi-leaf double skin, aerofoil section, opposed action blades. Individual
blades should not exceed 1200 mm. in length or 175 mm. in width. Double skin
blades shall be made out of 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet with seamed edges.
Dampers frames shall be galvanized made out of steel sheet. The thickness shall
be 18 G for max duct width of 900 mm. & 16 G for duct sizes of width exceeding 900
mm. Blade ends shall be gasketed to minimize air leakage.
Damper quadrants shall be of cast metal construction, marked OPEN and SHUT in
raised letters. Single blade dampers with single skin blade section may be used for
damper sizes upto 300x150 mm. Single skin blades shall be fabricated from 18
gauge galvanized steel sheet.
The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear airflow area equal to the
duct size shall be maintained within the damper frame. Maximum clearance
between the blades and the frame shall be limited to 3 mm. Indication of damper
blade position shall be provided.
b) Splitter Dampers
At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk, an
adjustment, splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted two gauge heavier than the
duct, with operating rod and locking quadrant. These deflecting dampers shall be
permanently set and locked in position after completion of the installation and
adjustment with length extending through the duct to externally mounted bearing
plates.
d) Fire Dampers
Fire dampers with fusible links shall be fixed in ducts at all floor crossings, wall
crossings of kitchen and crossings of fire rated walls, irrespective of it being shown on
the drawings or not.
Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type.
The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon themselves and
be stacked at one end of the damper outside the air stream. The dampers shall be
arranged for vertical or horizontal operation as detailed on the drawings.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-42/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.14
The fresh air intake shall be fitted with external louvers, sand trap louvers, opposed
blade volume control damper, aluminium insect wire mesh and bird screen and filter
as indicated on the drawings.
Filter media thickness shall not be less than 45 mm and shall be washable metallic
filter.
Louvers shall be with extruded aluminium frame and with aluminium blades of not
less than 2mm thick. Louvers shall have powder coated finish as approved by
Architect.
Sand louvers shall have double deflection sand passage with separation efficiency of
not less than 80% on 20-200 micron test dust and 50% on 1-70 micron test dust.
Sand louvers shall be of aluminium sections with 2mm thick casing and 1.6mm thick
blades. The base of the louver shall have self-emptying sand holes.
Where exposed to view, Sand louver shall have powder coated finish as per
Architect approval.
22.2.15
FILTERS
General
1. Filters shall operate to at least the efficiencies specified elsewhere and not less
than 75% average synthetic dust weight or resistance in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 52-68.
2. Filters shall be complete with holding frames sufficiently robust to ensure that no
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-43/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Bag Filters
1. The filter shall comprise of one or more 600 x 600 mm filter bag modules fitted
into a purpose made galvanized steel side or front withdrawal frame.
2. Each module shall comprise a minimum of four separate bags bonded or clipped
into a galvanized steel header.
3. The bags shall have a minimum length of 600 mm.
4. The medium shall be of a fine multi-layer type with high mechanical strength.
5. The maximum initial resistance shall not exceed 100 Pa.
6. Fitters of this type shall have an efficiently of not less than 99.6 % based on the
tests specified in BS 2831 with test dust No. 2.
7. One complete set of spare bags shall be supplied.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-44/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.16
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Flame proof flexible shall be fitted on all intake and discharge connections of fans
and air conditioning units for preventing the transmission of vibration through the
ducts to occupied spaces.
Flexible connections shall also be provided where ductwork passes across building
expansion joints.
Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated fabric
and shall also be impervious to moisture. Connections shall fit closely and be
secured in airtight fashion to connections to ductwork, fans and apparatus.
The material shall have a penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested in
accordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible and without strain or distortion.
The fabric in flexible connections shall be 150 mm minimum and 250 mm maximum
in width.
22.2.17
FLEXIBLE DUCT
1. Flexible ductwork shall be manufactured with a two ply aluminium inner core,
surrounded by 25 mm thickness of 24 kg/m3 density fibre glass, all wrapped in a
reinforced aluminium outer jacket. The overall K-factor shall be less than 0.23
Btu. /hr. deg. Ft. Ductwork shall meet the standards of NFPA 90A, and be UL
listed or to meet BS 476 and BS 413.
2. Flexible ducts installed in an externally insulated duct system shall be factory
insulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 25 mm thick and a density not
less than 24 kg/m3, and covered with an acceptable vapour seal.
3. Flexible ducts installed in internally (acoustic) insulated duct system, shall be
factory insulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 20 mm thick and a
density not less than 24kg/m3, faced on air side with PVC coated glass cloth
having an open area not more than 25%, and on room side with material
specified above.
4. Flexible duct installation shall be in accordance with manufactures instruction.
Joints between factory insulated flexible ducts and field insulated ductwork shall
be sealed and taped under this section.
5. Flexible ducts shall be supported at their mid sections if length exceeds 500mm
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-45/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
22.2.18
SECTION 22
SOUND ATTENUATION
SOUND ATTENUATORS
The supply and return air ductworks shall be attenuated to limit the noise level to the
values specified in the design criteria. The method of fabrication and supporting
ducts should be such as to avoid generation of noise because of air movements or
drumming of sheet metal.
The silencers shall be provided in the supply air ducts as shown on tender drawings.
The silencers shall be constructed and tested according to BS 4718 for dynamic
insertion loss, self generated noise and aerodynamic performance.
The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal for inspection.
Externally, the silencers shall be insulated in the same manner as the adjoining air
ducting. The contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with respect to
the characteristics and the duct system to ensure the proper selection of silencers.
ACOUSTIC LINER
Acoustic liner for duct work of fan coil units shall be made up of black, strong,
durable, dimensionally stable woven glass fabric with zero fiber migration of 25 mm
thickness and 48 kg /m3 density ,having NRC=1,up to a length of 3.0 meter from the
face of the unit.
22.2.19
AIR TERMINALS
General
The air terminals shall comply with all requirements of QCS.
Ceiling Diffusers
Air terminals shall be tested and rated as per ADC test codes and ASHRAE
standard.
Ceiling diffusers shall be of square neck pattern, with a removable core assembly,
suitable for a quiet draftless air distribution. Diffusers shall be of extruded aluminium
construction and of arctic white baked epoxy powder coat finish as standard.
However, the finish shall be subject to the final approval of architect / owner. All
diffusers shall have precisely mitered corners mechanically fastened for tight,
invisible joints.
All supply air directional diffusers shall have an integral opposed blade volume
damper to permit equal return distribution of air over the entire face of the diffuser. It
shall be possible to adjust the volume damper from below, without having to remove
the core or any other part of the diffuser.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-46/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Linear Diffusers
Linear diffusers shall consist of extruded aluminium outer frames, removable snap-in
inner assemblies and where ceiling mounting frames are called for, they shall be of
extruded aluminium. Where sectional adjoining continuous units are installed, outer
frames and/or ceiling mounting frames shall be supplied with concealed alignment
strips between sections.
Outer frame styles, for either surface or flush to ceiling mounting, shall be furnished
to suit the type of ceiling construction. Concealed brackets, accessible by removal of
inner assemblies and inner vanes, shall be provided for mounting the outer frames
to ceiling mounting frames or the plenum ducts without any visible mounting screws.
Each diffuser slot shall have a snap-in, pattern and flow control assembly consisting
of a fixed deflecting vane and two adjustable air-flow control vanes accessible from
face of diffusers.
By adjustment of one or both flow control vanes, it shall be possible to obtain a
horizontal, or vertical, discharge air pattern, or to blank-off inactive sections.
Horizontal pattern of air-flow may be changed 180 deg. regardless of diffuser
mounting orientation, simply by adjusting the flow control vanes. The physical
appearance of the face of the diffuser shall not be changed regardless of air pattern
or flow control adjustment. Equalizing deflectors of snap-on type, may be supplied
for field installation, for lateral control of air pattern at 90 deg. to the axis of
continuous runs of units, or for spread pattern control of single units, as required.
They shall be adjustable from diffuser face by removal of inner assembly. Volume
control dampers for system balancing shall be installed, as required by the sheet
metal contractor in the branch supply ducts to plenum.
Air terminals shall be tested and rated as per ADC test codes and ASHRAE
standard.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-47/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Supply and return air registers shall have individually adjustable horizontal front
blades, vertical rear blades and shall be equipped with opposed blade dampers
Exhaust air registers shall be single defection fixed horizontal blades and be
equipped with opposed blade volume control damper.
Outside air louvers shall be equipped with insect screen.
Door Grilles
Door grilles shall be of the inverted B-Blades type not permitting vision through the
grille blades not more than 12mm apart. Minimum free area shall be at least 60%.
Louver shall be of the adjustable width double frame type with a frame each side of
the door. Door grilles shall be fitted where indicated on the Drawings. Door grilles
shall be with extruded Aluminium frame and Aluminium blades.
22.2.20 FANS
22.2.20.1 WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS
Extract fan shall be of the propeller type suitable for wall mounting .
The fan construction shall be of moulded plastic, unobtrusive with flush inner and
outer grille .
Motors shall be of the shaded pole induction type enclosed in a aluminium alloy case
and protected by a thermal overload cutout.
The motor bearings shall be self alignment sealed for life type .
The fans shall be provided with a solenoid operated backdraught shutters . the
solenoid shall open and close the backdraught damper silently as the fan is switched
ON or OFF.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-48/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
The fan unit shall have air operated flow switches fitted, arranged to change over to
the standby fan in the event of the selected fan failing and also to provide a fault
signal.
The fan unit shall be pre wired with switches and isolators to a single terminal box on
the casing. The unit casing shall be constructed from aluminium alloy with centrally
positioned inlet spigot and access panel to allow ease of service.
Twin fans shall be acoustically lined and suitable for mounting on roof /inline ,and
auto change-over panels with duty sharing feature shall be provided at an accessible
location.
Flange safety vibration isolators are oversized to accommodate the added heat and
weight. Unit has heat baffle to reduce motor compartment temp. Unit shall have dual
belt and pulley system.
All fans shall bear AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-49/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
maximum allowable fan vibration shall be 0.079 in./sec peak velocity, filter-in reading
as measured at the fan RPM.
Axial flow fans shall be of fire resistant construction rated at 3000C for 2 hours.
The fans shall be complete with spring type anti vibration mounting, mounting
brackets, matching flange, high temp flexible connector etc.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-50/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
2. System Operation
Under Normal ventilation conditions and to comply with regulations F air will be
drawn into the car park from the ramp complemented by a supply fan and pushed
around the area and towards the extract point where 2 No. main fans would be
located. Under Normal Conditions, one main extract fan will operate at low speed,
thus providing 3 air changes per hour; CO levels will be monitored continually. On
detection of CO levels rising beyond 30ppm, the impulse fans will operate at low
speed in the affected area to mix and dilute the CO gases for extract via the main
fans. Should the CO level continue to rise to 40PPM, both main fans will operate at
low speed to give 6 air changes per hour. The use of CO monitoring equipment will
assist with achieving building regulation part 12 for energy efficiency.
On detection of smoke, and to comply with document B two main extract fans will
increase to high speed and will provide an air change rate of 12 per hour due to the
distribution and selective operation of the impulse fans smoke will be guided towards
the main extract point.
3. Fan Ratings
All fans are rated to withstand a temperature of 300 C for a period of at least 2 hrs.
4. Equipment Overview
Scope shall include the supply fan, main extract fans, impulse fans,grills / dampers,
suction / discharge ducting, supply of electrical panel, CO detection system, smoke
detection system, engineering, commissioning, cabling etc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-51/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.21
General
Each part of the system of piping shall be complete in all details and provided with
all control valves and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation. The tender
drawings indicate generally the sizes of all main piping but the right is reserved to
modify the runs of piping to accommodate conditions during construction.
In case grooved piping system is used for the installation, the layout, accessories,
supports & their locations etc shall be submitted for review and approval.
All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat
appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and paralleled or at right angles to
structural members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom.
Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or windows and shall be generally
arranged so that it is least 2.5 cm. from the finished wall face. Sufficient space is to
be allowed for accessibility, servicing and proper insulation works.
Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls or slabs. Pipes shall be
pitched for proper circulation and drainage.
Run outs shall be graded in such a manner as to prevent air traps being formed
within them when the mains expand or contract. Automatic or open vents are to be
provided at high points, piped to suitable drains or terminating over expansion tanks
wherever possible.
All drain piping shall pitch down in the director of flow. All low points of the system
must be fitted with drain valves to allow the complete draining of the system.
Bottom of all risers must have dirt pockets of the size of riser and at least 15 cms.
long with a drain valve fitted.
All water piping to equipment and valves shall be connected with grooved couplings
or flanges or unions for dismantling and removal. All piping shall reamed after
cutting to remove all burrs.
All reduction in sizes of piping in the direction of downward pitch shall be installed
with eccentric fittings to maintain a level top.
Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending pipes will not normally be allowed,
except that bending of back steel pipes 50 mm. nominal diameter and smaller shall
be permitted, where space conditions allow for a bending radius of at least 10 times
the diameter of the pipe. A hydraulic pipe bender shall be used to bend all pipes.
Bends showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformations will not be acceptable.
Cutting and shutting of bends will not be permitted.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-52/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Piping shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under electric light
outlets or extend beyond footing lines, as determined by the drawings.
In placing pipes through sleeves, near walls, partitions or in chases, care must be
taken to provide sufficient space for pipe covering. Where pipes are held in vices,
as and when screwing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe surface is not
damaged. Any pipe work so damaged shall not be fitted.
All pipes stored on site shall be kept clear of the ground and where possible stored
under cover. Pipes corroded beyond normal stock-rust condition shall not be used.
Special care should be taken to prevent dirt and foreign material entering open ends
of pipes during erection. A valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipe will
not be considered satisfactory to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Screwed iron caps, plugs, or plastic covers shall be used to seal pipe ends. Wood,
rag paper or other makeshift plugs will not be permitted.
Before connecting up to return mains, the system of piping must be blown and
flushed out. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned.
Before connecting up to return mains, the system of piping must be blown and
flushed out. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned.
Liberal allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe by means of
changes in the direction or by the inclusion of expansion joints in the piping system.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-53/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Grooved Joints
Where shown on drawings, specified, or directed, grooved joints and couplings shall
be used.
Grooved joint piping system may be used in lieu of flanged or welded piping systems
for pipe sizes 2 inches and larger.
All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a
single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the
grooved components.
Grooved joint fittings shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM
A395 and A536; forged steel conforming to ASTM A234, or fabricated from carbon
steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A53, with grooved ends in conformance with AWWA
C606.
Grooved joint couplings shall consist of ductile iron housings, conforming to ASTM
A395 and A536, complete with pressure responsive synthetic rubber gasket (Grade
to suit the intended service).
Rigid Type: Coupling housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be
used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI
B31.1 and B31.9.
Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are
required. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment
connections. Three couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration
source.
Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 150/300 flanged
components.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-54/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Isolating Valve
For sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze gate valve to BS5154 PN20
Series B. Valves shall be complete with position indicator and locking device,
asbestos free gland packing, with non-rising stem, threaded bonnet, one piece
wedge and taper thread.
For sizes 65mm and above:
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-55/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
1. It shall be cast iron (to BS1452) gate valve to BS5150 PN16. Valves shall be
complete with locking device and open shut indicator, rising stem, outside
screw, zinc free bronze trim, wedge facing ring and body seat ring shall be of
gunmetal, flanged to BS4504 PN20.
2. Ductile iron (to ASTM A395 and A536) butterfly valve with grooved ends.
Valves shall be complete with lever lock handle or gear operator with position
indicator. Disk shall be elastomer encapsulated ductile iron, with integrally
cast stem, Stainless steel upper bearing and lower turn-on.
Strainers
Strainers, in addition to where shown on drawings shall be fitted prior to all major
items of plant including all pumps, air handling units, control valves, etc.
Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) "Y" type strainer
PN20 Series B, with perforated stainless steel screen 0.75mm diameter holes for
'fine' straining and 22.6% free flow area per the square cm. of element area.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-56/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Strainer shall be with screwed cap and shall be fitted with gland cock (hose union
type) for blow down connection and shall also have drilled and tapped bosses on
each side of the body fitted with 2 test points and 2 plugged points. Ends shall be
threaded to BS21 (ISO R7).
Sizes 65mm and above shall be cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) or Ductile iron (ASTM
A395 and A536) "Y" type strainer to PN20 Series B with perforated stainless steel
screen 1.6mm diameter holes for 'fine' straining and at least 34% free flow area per
square cm. of element area. Strainers shall be with bolted cover and fitted with gland
cock (hose union type) for blow down connection and shall have drilled and tapped
bosses on each side of the body fitted with 2 test points and 2 plugged points,
grooved or flanged to BS4504 PN20.
Non-Return Valves
Non-return valves shall be fitted where plant must operate on an automatic
changeover basis or where flow reversals can occur.
Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) check valve to
BS5154 PN20. horizontal swing pattern with threaded cover, nitrile disk, and shall be
suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipe (with vertical flow upwards). end
threaded internal BS21 (ISO 7).
Bronze double check valves shall be installed to prevent contamination of water
caused by back siphonage, back flow and cross connection in supplies such as
those to hose taps, cisterns, stand pipes, showers and basins.
Sizes 65mm and above shall be:
1. Flanged: cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) check valves with lever and air cushion
to BS5153 PN20, of the horizontal swing pattern with bolted cover, outside
lever and air cushion, zinc-free bronze trim and rubber faced disk and
flanged to BS4504 PN20 and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and
vertical pipelines.
2. Grooved
a. Ductile iron (STM A395 and A536) check valves, horizontal or vertical,
spring-assisted, stainless steel trim, aluminium bronze or elastomer
encapsulated ductile iron desk, with grooved ends.
b. Cast iron (ASTM A126) check valves with lever and air cushion, of the
horizontal swing pattern with coupled cover, outside lever and air
cushion, bronze seat ring (ASTM B584) with optional elastomer seat ring.
Valve shall be suitable for horizontal installation or vertical installation with
upward flow.
Drain/Gland Cocks
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-57/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Drain cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants. Drain cocks shall be of
the hose union pattern gland cock in bronze (BS1400 LG2).WRc approved,
asbestos free gland packing and shall be threaded to BS21 complete with captive
cap. The plugs shall have square head with a slot to indicated plug position.
Flow Measurement
For the purpose of the flow and temperature measurement and the proportional
balancing of water distribution system, the contractor shall provide a digital
(microprocessor) flow measurement test set and shall be suitable for portable or
bench mounted use.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-58/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Expansion joints shall have integral duck flanges. They shall have individual solid
steel ring reinforced with a carcass of highest-grade woven cotton or acceptable
synthetic fiber. Joints shall be constructed to pipe line size and to meet working
pressure conditions, face measurements etc., as designated.
They shall be of an arch type construction with the number of arches (corrugations)
dependent on projected movement. All joints must be finish-coated with eypalon
paint to prevent ozone attach. Split back or retaining rings shall be furnished. Joints
size 2 and below shall have threaded malleable iron unions on both sides. All joints
shall be suitable for minimum test pressure of one and a half times the working
pressure or 150m of water, whichever is higher.
Flexible connections shall be provided to AHUs, FCUs, pumps etc. in order to
prevent transmission of vibration to pipe work.
Grooved end expansion joints shall be the telescoping type consisting of a series of
grooved end pipe nipples joined in tandem.
Grooved joint flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at
equipment connections. Three couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the
vibration source.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-59/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
otherwise indicated, pipe hangers for steel piping shall be spaced as follows:
20 to 32 mm.
40 to 100 mm.
Over 100 mm.
Not over 2.4 m. apart Not over 3.0 m. apart Not over 4.0 m. apart -
10 mm. rods
12 mm. rods
16 mm. rods
Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or
distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be
supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a
minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items
are removed.
All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc., necessary for fastening of hangers shall be
furnished by the Contractor. All hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be
supported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted. Details of hangers and
supports to be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before fitting. All hangers shall be provided with lock nuts and have
provision for vertical adjustment of pipes.
Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trapeze type hangers of steel
construction as specified elsewhere. Sliding assembly systems shall be used
wherever thermal or expansion movements are expected. Individual horizontal
piping shall be supported by hangers consisting of malleable split rings with
malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type hangers or roller hangers or sliding
assembly where specified.
Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipes
supported from the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel
clamps securely bolted on the piping with the end extension bearings on the building
construction. Contractor shall submit calculations for pipe load as well as proposed
anchor points.
Piping shall be anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue
strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and
shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design.
Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have treated hardwood or plastic inserts
of approved make or high-density insulation capable of withstanding the
compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal-to-metal
contact.
All pipe supports hangers and anchors etc., are to be painted with two coats of an
approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel
paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.
Pipe Sleeves
All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 25 mm. larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of
the insulation for insulated services. All the building expansion joints shall also be
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-60/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-61/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
fittings.
Piping shall be supported to prevent strains or distortion in the connected equipment,
valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of
equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without
requiring additional supports after these items are removed.
All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have UPVC sleeves of an
internal diameter at least 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of
the insulation for insulated services. All building expansion joints shall also be
provided with pipe sleeves.
The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipe
sleeves through them shall be projected minimum 50 mm on either side of the walls,
floor and roof slab.
Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of U. P. V. C.
set flush with finished wall surfaces.
Joints in copper pipe shall be flanged, flared (up to 19.05 mm O. D. only) or brazed
(with or without capillary fittings). Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of
the HVCA Code of Practice Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and
Sheet.
Screwed joints shall not be accepted in refrigerant pipes except on the equipment
accessories. In such cases the threads shall either be of taper form and used in
conjunction with PTFE tape or an anaerobic sealant, or of parallel form associated
with machined joint faces and a suitable joint.
Copper pipework shall be used as feed piping for all pressure gauge or similar
fittings.
Compression fittings shall not be accepted on refrigerant pipework.
Refrigerant pipework shall not be arranged for running compressors in parallel (i.e.
with common suction and/or discharge in pipes). The use of a number of
compressors each having an independent refrigerant circuit in a common evaporator
shall be permitted provided pressure tests between adjacent refrigerant circuits in
the evaporator are carried out during manufacture.
The pipework shall be designed so that oil in the refrigerant leaving the compressor
(and passing any oil separator fitted) shall be carried through the system and back
to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity unloading.
Pipework shall be firmly supported and secured to minimise vibration. Vibration
eliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge pipes to minimize
transmission of vibration or noise.
All refrigerant equipment shall have a strength and leakage pressure test after
manufacture in accordance with the Table below :
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-62/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Refrigerant
R407c
A pressure test equal to the low test pressure quoted in the table of equipment test
pressures shall be applied to the refrigerant system after all piping has been fitted.
This test shall be in addition to the pressure test on each unit at completion of the
manufacture.
Provision shall be made for the supply of up to 3 sets of pressure test sheets for
each machine and system. It shall be the Works Contractors responsibility to ensure
the sheet content and presentation is acceptable to the Engineer.
PIPE SUPPORTS
i.
ii. Piping shall be supported at all changes in direction and at intervals of not more
than 1.2 metres on straight runs. Pipe supports & clamps shall be subject to
approval of the Consultant.
iii. Pipework on roofs and floors shall be supported on off-set clamps, floor or rikker
stands. The pipe support stands shall be bolted to the concrete slab or steel
members.
iv. Vertical pipework shall be supported on wall brackets with 'U' bolts or clamps.
v. Suspended pipework shall be supported with trapeze hangers with rods
suspended from inserts.
vi. Condensate drain pipe supports shall be capable of vertical adjustment after
installation of piping.
vii. All pipework passing through the walls, floors and roof slabs shall be provided
with pipe sleeves of adequate size to allow the passage of insulation. The gap
shall be sealed with intumescent sealants.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-63/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
All drain pipes shall be pressure tested at 6.0meter of water before applying
insulation or covering the pipes. Drain test plugs with expandable rubber seal
shall be used for the purpose of testing.
22.2.22
INSULATION
Scope
The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labour, materials,
accessories and equipment necessary for the insulation of all air conditioning
systems and mechanical equipment. Said work shall be completed in strict
accordance with the insulation section of the specification.
General
All insulation shall be applied in a workman like manner by skilled workmen regularly
engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall be applied to clean and dry surfaces
after tests and approvals required by this specification have been completed.
On cold surfaces where a vapour barrier must be maintained, insulation shall be
applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapour seal. All hangers,
supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be
insulated and vapour sealed to prevent condensation. All surface finishes shall be
extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of
insulation.
All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings
or sleeves, except where firestop or firesafing materials are required.
Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping
insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe
and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent
insulation and shall be vapour sealed as required.
25
50
Composite shall include insulation, jacketing and adhesive used to secure jacketing
or facing. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic,
cement, tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-64/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
General
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
All fibre glass section insulation shall have a density of not less than 96
kilogrammes/m3 and a thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.037 w/m 0 C.
All pipework insulation shall be applied to the pipework using proprietary brand
adhesive approved by the Engineer.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-65/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
for bigger pipes and shall be aluminium foil faced preformed sectional glass fibre
and shall be applied to all pipework, valves, flanges and fittings in accordance with
this Specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each joint shall be sealed using
75 mm. wide aluminium foil adhesive tape and the whole covered in 60z heavy duty
glass cloth and all joints lapped and sealed with approved vapour seal. Vapour seal,
first coat, shall be applied by dipping the cloth into the vapour seal prior to applying
to the pipework insulation. The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied with
brush. Finally, the installation shall be finished with a system of 0.67 mm. thickness
aluminium smooth polished sheet cladding, cut and formed into sections to suit the
extreme outside dimensions of the insulated work for straight runs. Each length of
aluminium cladding shall have a snap-lock fixing.
Cladding sections shall be finally arranged with the longitudinal seams turned away
from the normal working area. Bends, tapers, tees, other fittings, valves and pump
bodies shall be encased in specially pressed or otherwise formed aluminium single
sections. Circular bends over 200 mm. outside diameter may be encased in a
maximum of 3 No. equal segmental pressed or formed sections.
Refrigerant pipework
Refrigerant pipework shall be insulated in accordance with KAHRAMAA
requirements. Manufacturers recommendations shall likewise be considered. The
insulated pipework shall be additionally wrapped with 200gm/sqm. quality glass cloth
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-66/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
and painted with two coats of approved weather proofing compound and finally
provided with 0.63mm aluminium cladding for outdoor piping.
The vapour seal material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant and
have anti-rodent and anti-fungal properties. Bitumen based products shall not be
used.
ii.
The vapour seal material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to
use.
General
i.
Thermal insulation to ductwork shall be carried out neatly and to a high grade
quality by skilled workers experienced in the trade, and strictly in accordance
with following specification.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any
building shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, be classified noncombustible. Thermal insulating materials used within any building shall be free
from substances which in the event of a fire would generate appreciable
quantities of smoke, noxious or toxic fumes.
v.
All openings in roof slabs and walls for passing ducts shall be sealed and/or
weatherproofed suitably. Sleeves shall be provided where ducts pass through
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-67/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, then treated with an approved
corrosion inhibitor before insulation is applied. Note that the inhibitor coating
would not be required for galvanized surfaces.
vii.
viii.
The Works Contractor shall allow for the cost of sampling in-place insulation
from ductwork or plants, for inspection by the Engineer. Any sample found not in
accordance with the approved material should be replaced at the Works
Contractors expenses.
ix.
All fiberglass rigid slabs shall have a density of not less than 48 kg/m3 and a
thermal conductivity not greater than 0.037 W/M2K.
x.
xi.
All ductwork within air conditioned zones shall be insulated using 25 mm. rigid
fibreglass slabs covered with reinforced aluminium foil. Panels shall be secured
to the ductwork by applying an approved high quality adhesive to the surfaces of
both the ductwork and insulation panel. Fiberglass matts shall be used for
circular ducts instead of fiberglass slabs. Insulation shall also have 25 mm. wide
galvanized b ands secured at 600 mm. center for circular ducts.
ii.
All insulation joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide minimum aluminium tape.
The insulation shall then be covered with high quality canvas of 200 gm/sq. m.
quality and sealed with an approved vapour seal .
iii.
iv.
All supply and return ductwork running in unconditioned space shall be insulated
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-68/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Exhaust duct traversing conditioned space shall be insulated using 50 mm. foil
backed rigid fibre glass panels.
The material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant, and have antirodent and anti-fungal properties.
ii.
iii.
ALUMINIUM CLADDING
All exposed to sight duct work & pipe work shall be covered with 0.9 mm thick
aluminium cladding.
22.2.23
Water treatment shall be provided to prevent corrosion, fungal growth, scaling and
discoloration. Chemical dosing / water treatment shall be carried out by a specialist
engaged in this activity.
A chemical dosing pot complete with all accessories shall be fitted on the chilled
water circuit to add corrosion inhibitor chemicals to the system at the time of
commissioning and periodically during operation. The pot shall be fabricated out of
M.S. sheet suitable for 125 psig working pressure.
The pot shall be complete with chemical feed valve, non-return valve, drain valve,
water-in and out valves and air cock.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-69/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
The Contractor shall add the first charge of chemical to the system and supply
additional chemical adequate for the operation during Warranty period. Testing
chemicals/instruments shall be included in the scope of supply.
The dosing pot and all connected pipes and fittings shall be insulated in the same
manner as the chilled water pipes.
Details of treatment system offered and technical literature shall be included with the
offer.
22.2.24
All steel work in connection with pipe supports exposed to the elements are to be
painted with two coats of a rust preventive paint approved by the Engineer,
preferably zinc rich primer, followed by one undercoat and one topcoat.
All exposed metal surfaces of air conditioning and electrical apparatus, motors,
guards, pipework, hangers etc. must be galvanized and painted with one coat of
under-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to a colour approved by the
Engineer.
After completion of the installation, the entire work shall be checked for finish and
appearance. Any portion of work found damaged, unpainted or not finished to the
satisfaction of the Engineer shall be rectified.
22.2.25
IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING
All insulated and non-insulated pipework and ductwork shall be identified by colour
codes/safety indicated and basic colour identification bands to BS 1710 (1984).
The safety colour and code indication bands shall be 100 mm. wide between two
basic colour identification bands each of length 150 mm. The identification shall be
at centres of not more than 6 meters and adjacent to all valves, items of plant,
changes in direction and both sides where the pipework passes through walls,
floors, etc. and all service access points.
Pipe and ductwork sizes, content flow and return (F & R) indication and direction of
flow arrows in black shall be applied on the basic colour identification band as
detailed in Tables 1, 2 and Appendix D of BS 1710 (1984).
The safety colour, contents, code and colour identification bands shall be applied by
means of self adhesive coloured or printed tape.
Flow and return (F& R) and direction of flow arrows shall be in black with letter 25
mm. high on 50 mm. wide white self adhesive tape applied in a continuous band
around the pipe insulation.
Pipe contents shall be in black lettering 25 mm. on 50 mm. wide clear self adhesive
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-70/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
labels.
The materials employed shall be as for pipework identification, i.e. self adhesive
plastic.
All the lettering and wording shall be in English.
Where the pipework/ductwork contents constitute a hazard, a symbol as given in BS
1710 (1984) should be added to the type colour.
The hazard information shall be given as briefly as possible, using commonly
accepted forms such as a number indicating which floor of the building.
Where the identification of the space is by room number this must be agreed with
the user who otherwise may have numbered the rooms differently.
22.2.26
The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where
pipes, conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof
slabs as measured in the Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor shall provide cross-over bridges as shown on the drawings. Bridges
details shall be agreed with the Architect and Engineer.
Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.
22.2.27
TEST HOLES
Test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the ducts and shall be of 22
mm. dia. Each test hole shall be fitted with an Instrument Test Port having
galvanized cast metal body, expandable rubber sealing element and metal wing nut
for operation. Test port base shall be seated on soft rubber gasket and riveted to the
duct wall. The wing nut shall extend outside the finished insulation so that the duct
interior can be accessed without disturbing the insulation. Rubber plugs or stick-on
seals shall not be used for closing test holes. The number of test holes shall be as
per recommendation of DW144.
Test holes shall be provided at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-71/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
22.2.28
SECTION 22
:
:
:
:
200 to 1200 F
9 long
At inlet and outlet of chillers and air handling units
Mercury in glass
Thermometer Well
Location
Purpose
Construction
4 in diameter
Pig tail and vent cock
Location
Range
22.2.29
ELECTRICAL WORKS
General
All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical
specifications and shall conform to the regulations of KAHRAMAA.
All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to
function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or frequency vary
within the following tolerances:
i.
ii.
Voltage
Frequency
+ 6%
+ 0.3%
All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolonged
operation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition to the atmosphere
where they are installed to operate. Allowance for the local high ambient
temperature shall be made by reducing the permitted rise of temperature above
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-72/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Electrical Motors
All motors shall be designed to suit the maximum temperature of air passing over
the motors and the additional temperature rise caused by exposure to the sun. The
type of winding insulation shall, however, be not less than Class B. The motors for
exhaust fans shall have the insulation suitable to operate on 500 C. ambient
temperature.
All motors smaller than 0.50 kW shall be designed to operate on single phase. All
motors 0.75 kW and above shall be designed to operate on three phase. All motors
shall be wound for 240 volts, single phase, or 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, A.C.
system. Any motors brought to site not complying with above mentioned voltage and
insulation requirements shall not be accepted.
All motors shall comply with IEC 34/1, 72/1 & 2, BS 3979, BS 4999/5000, and shall
be of reputed make.
Electrical Wiring
The Electrical Contractor will carry out all power cabling up to and including isolators
or up to the control panels in plant rooms, pump room, roof and other mechanical
rooms as indicated on the drawings. The electric supply shall be terminated into the
main incomer of the control panel, isolator etc.
It is the A.C. Contractors responsibility to provide the control panels as necessary
for his equipment and continue the connections from the control panel/isolator up to
all the air conditioning and ventilation units.
Wherever group-control is envisaged as for basement car park exhaust fans, the
Electrical contractor will provide power up to the group control panel and thereon to
the individual isolators. All control cabling, wiring, conduiting, terminations etc is the
responsibility of AC contractor.
The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical equipment/controls
associated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation works. A.C. Contractors scope
of works shall include but not be limited to the following:
Power cabling from isolator to FCU, pressurization unit, packaged AC units, outdoor
AC units, fans etc, from AHU control panel to AHUs, from pump control panel to
pumps, etc. complete with cable tray, conduit, supports etc (For continuity, refer
electrical drawings and specifications).
Power cabling complete with cable tray, conduit etc from the controller of twin fans to
the actual fan units. In case the fan unit is supplied with integral isolator as a
standard accessory, the same shall also be provided by the A.C. Contractor. These
isolators shall be weather proof to IP 55.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-73/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
All control wiring, conduits, cables, cable trays etc., for the air conditioning
equipment, controls, sequence regulation panel and remote emergency push button
stations etc.
All HVAC control components such as flow switches, pressure switches,
temperature/humidity sensors, thermostats etc., are to be wired to control panel and
other associated components using armored cable on galvanized cable rack/tray.
Specification for cables, cable trays, conduits, isolators etc shall conform to electrical
specifications.
Starters
All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L./Star Delta starters
having the following facilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All three-phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase as well
asunder voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts.
Earthing
All motors and starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all
metal parts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass of the earth.
Testing
All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for loose
connections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition,
functional checks shall be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and
sequencing is in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification.
The Engineer shall be given 7 days written notice of such tests so that he may
attend if he so desires.
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses
fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 Kv for one minute, across
the following points:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-74/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Wiring Regulations
All installation shall comply with the Electrical regulations of KAHRAMAA.
CONTROL SYSTEM
The air conditioning installation shall be capable of complete automatic operation.
Necessary operational and safety controls shall be provided for pumps, air handling
units, FCUs, split AC units etc. Low voltage control system shall be preferred. The
location of controls should permit easy access for calibration, adjustment and
maintenance.
Selector switches shall be provided for manual / automatic operation of A.C. plants.
The A.C. Control Panel, Sequence Regulator Panel, Starter Panel etc. are to be
located as indicated on the Electrical drawings and shall be suitable for operation at
500 C. ambient condition.
The contractor shall submit the control schematic diagrams indicating the signal line
from all the control functions in sequential order, control wiring diagram and power
wiring from control panel as a whole to the Engineer for his approval.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-75/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-76/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
l.
SECTION 22
Trip Alarm
The Air conditioning Contractor is to co-ordinate with the Electrical Contractor for the
sizes of starters, cable sizes, protection fuses etc.
A motorized tthree way modulating type divertor valve, shall be installed in the
chilled water return line adjacent to the farther TFAHU as indicated on the
drawings.
ii. The divertor control valve shall regulate flow of chilled water in response to
signals from DDC controller via sensor as shown on the drawing.
iii. Starting and stopping of treated fresh air handling units shall be carried out from
the starter installed in the TFAHU electrical control panel as indicated on the
tender drawings or from remote via DDC controller in the respective areas.
Means of local isolation shall be provided to conform to I.E.E. regulations, latest
edition.
iv. The setpoints shall be suitable to be adjusted by means of the portable
operators terminal/BMS. The operator terminal shall be connected to the service
socket in each panel or to the bus adapter of operator terminal in a remote place.
The temperature values shall be readable from the operator terminal as well.
ii. The divertor control valve shall regulate flow of chilled water in response to
signals from modulating thermostat mounted in the conditioned space.
iii. OFF-HI-MED-LOW switch for operation of FCU shall be installed in the
conditioned space.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-77/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Control Valves
All chilled water control valves shall be 2 way modulating as necessary to achieve
the design conditions ,unless otherwise stated.
The valves and actuators shall be sized by the controls specialist for the specified
duties and shall have a close-off rating properly related to the water system
concerned.
All valves shall be factory rated to withstand the specified test pressure of the
system. Valves 50 mm. and smaller shall be bronze screwed type and valves 65
mm. to 150 mm. shall be cast iron flanged. Valves shall have stainless steel stems
and a spring loaded teflon packing.
3 way valves shall be provided for remotely located FAHU so as to maintain chilled
water circulation.
Temperature Sensors
Duct mounted temperature sensors shall have suitable ranges on either sides of set
point. Sensors shall be of corrosion resistant construction, suitable for mounting on a
vibrating surface. The sensors shall be provided with suitable fixing arrangement.
Averaging element sensors shall be provided when the duct area exceed 0.4 m2 or
when installed within air handling equipment.
Pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be insertion type complete with a stainless
steel pocket/immersion tube for pipe entry.
For electronic control systems the measuring element shall be either incorporated
into a copper capillary for averaging type or enclosed in a stainless steel immersion
housing or tubular probe. The accuracy shall be + 0.50 C.
All sensors shall be of non-adjustable construction calibrated at the manufacturers
works and be provided complete with the manufacturers mounting brackets/flanges
etc.
Controllers
Controllers shall be of the solid state, plug-in type and have corrosion resistant
construction for high humidity service. Each controller module shall have the facility
for calibrated adjustment of all control parameters, i.e. set point, proportional band,
integral action, slope etc., on the front plate. All adjustments shall be of the direct
reading type and shall be non-interactive, e.g. adjustment of set point shall not affect
the proportional band setting.
Electronic controllers shall be proportional, proportional-integral, or proportional
integral-derivative as specified or implied in the control descriptions.
Controllers shall be designed and constructed for equipment room use and shall not
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-78/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
be affected by ambient temperature and humidity. Where dual input controllers are
required, the authority of the compensating sensor shall be adjustable only at the
end.
22.2.30
22.2.31
WARRANTY
The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical
completion of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any
defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found
defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor.
All the compressors shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years from the date of
practical completion. The Contractor shall also guarantee the performance and
efficiency of the plant and equipment as per the specifications for a similar period of
400 days after the practical completion and if the services of Contractors personnel
are requisitioned during this period, such shall be made available free of cost to the
Client.
If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to
do so by another agency at the Contractors entire risk and expense without
prejudice to any rights of the Client.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-79/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
22.2.32
SECTION 22
The technical schedules listed hereunder must be filled in and signed by the bidder
and they must be attached with the offer with complete engineering catalogues for
every piece of equipment to enable the Engineer to evaluate each offer. Offers
submitted without such information will not be acceptable.
Chilled Water Pumps
Reference
:..
Serving
:..
Type
:..
Quantity
:..
Manufacturer
:..
Model Number
:..
:..
Head, feet
:..
Speed, rpm
:..
Power supply
:..
B.H.P.
:..
Motor Type/H.P./Make
:..
Class of Insulation
:..
:..
Overall dimension of
foundations
:..
Components
Flexible coupling
C.I. base plate
:..
:..
Rubber isolators
:..
Pressure gauges
:..
Flexible connections
Mechanical seal
:..
:..
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-80/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Controls
a.
b.
Motorised valve
Make/Model
:..
Type/Size
:..
Power Supply
:..
Power Consumption
:..
Temperature Controls
Make/Model
:..
Type
:..
Temperature range
:..
Power supply
:..
:..
:..
Rubber isolators
:..
Pressure gauges
:..
:..
Location
:..
Make/Model
:..
Type
:..
Total cfm
:..
:..
Casing Construction
:..
Overall Dimension
:..
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-81/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Cooling Coil
Total Cooling Capacity
:..
Sensible Cooling
Capacity
:..
:..
:..
:..
:..
:.
Fans
Type / Make
:..
:..
B.H.P.
:..
:..
Class of Insulation
:..
Miscellaneous Information
Type of filters and thickness :..
Type of Insulation and
density
:..
Controls provided
:..
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-82/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Filters
Fresh Air Filters
Make
:..
Type/Model
:..
Frame
:..
Number of Cells
:..
Cell Dimensions
Efficiency
:..
:..
:..
:..
Make
:..
Type/Model
:..
Location
:..
Sensible Cooling
Capacity (Each)
:..
:..
:..
Air Quantity
:..
:..
:..
:..
:..
:..
:..
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-83/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Through coil
Power supply
:..
Motor kW / Make
:..
Overall dimensions
:..
:..
Insulation
Manufacturer
:..
Type
:..
Density
:..
Finish
:..
Ventilation/Exhaust Fans
Reference
:..
Location
:..
Service
:..
Type
:..
Make
:..
Model
:..
Size
:..
CFM
:..
Static Pressure
:..
:..
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-84/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
22.2.33
SECTION 22
COMMISIONING SHEETS
Date
Sheet No.
Flow rate
Pump RPM
Voltage
Water Temperature
Certified by ..
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-85/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Date
System Reference
Installation Complete
Grilles/Diffusers Open
Flexible Connections
Sheet No. of
Certified by .
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-86/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Date
Location
System/Equip. Ref.
Item
Measurement
Identification
Fan Type
Fan RPM
Motor Power
Starter Type
Air Temperature
OK/Not OK
Thermostat Operation
OK/Not OK
Condensate Drainage
OK/Not OK
OK/Not OK
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
Sheet No. of
Design
S-22-87/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Filter Operation
Chilled Water In
Temperature
Pressure
Temperature
Pressure
Air In Temperature
F.DB
F.DB
F
Psing
F
Psing
F.WB
F.WB
Certified by .
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-88/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Date
Location
System/Equip. Ref.
Item
Measurement
Identification
Fan Type
Fan RPM
Motor Power
Starter Type
Air Temperature
OK/Not OK
Thermostat Operation
OK/Not OK
Condensate Drainage
OK/Not OK
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
Sheet No. of
Design
S-22-89/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Filter Operation
Chilled Water In
Temperature
Pressure
Temperature
Pressure
Air In Temperature
F.DB
F.DB
F
Psig
F
Psig
F.WB
F.WB
Certified by ...
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-90/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
-------------
Serial #
-------------
Motor #
-------------
Rated amps
-------------
Running amps
-------------
Suction pressure
-------------
Discharge pressure
--------------
Oil pressure
--------------
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-91/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Condensate drainage
Space designation
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------
space temp,c/
--------------------------------
S-22-92/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Noise level , NC
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-93/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
EXHAUST FANS
Ref :
Type:
Make / model :
Motor no.1 ,amps
Motor no.2, amps
Supply voltage
Motor no.1 ,rpm
Motor no.2,rpm
Blower no.1,rpm
Blower no.2,rpm
Air volume. L/s
Auto change over panel
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-94/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Date
Reference
Design Vol.
m3/s
Sheet No. of
Duct Size
mm
Duct Area
m2
Velocity
m/s
Units
6
A ______________________________________________________________
B ______________________________________________________________
C______________________________________________________________
D ______________________________________________________________
E ______________________________________________________________
F ______________________________________________________________
G ______________________________________________________________
H ______________________________________________________________
I ______________________________________________________________
J ______________________________________________________________
K ______________________________________________________________
Test Volume
Design
Static Pressure
Remarks
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Certified by .
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-95/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Date
Reference
Design Vol.
m3/s
Sheet No. of
Duct Size
mm
Duct Area
m2
Velocity
m/s
Units
6
A ______________________________________________________________
B ______________________________________________________________
C______________________________________________________________
D ______________________________________________________________
E ______________________________________________________________
F ______________________________________________________________
G ______________________________________________________________
H ______________________________________________________________
I ______________________________________________________________
J ______________________________________________________________
K ______________________________________________________________
Test Volume
Design
Static Pressure
Remarks
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Certified by .
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-96/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
Location
Date
Design
Free Area
m2
Sheet No.of
Measured
Volume
m3/s
Velocity
m2
Comments
Volume % of
m3/s
Design
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Remarks
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Certified by .
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-97/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.34
i.
The schedules have been prepared for the purpose of facilitating selection of
equipment and evaluating the tenders. The reference given against each item in
the schedules refer to the appropriate reference in the drawings.
ii. Technical details of the equipment offered by the Contractor should be furnished,
as asked for in the technical schedules enclosed.
iii. The external static pressure for fans, where given are approximate and the
Contractor will be required to supply equipment to handle the requirements of his
installation without extra cost to the contract.
iv. Should the Contractor wish to amplify any information to be provided, this should
be set out on separate sheets and submitted with his tender together with
explanatory manufacturers catalogues, curves and selection charts.
v. If the equipment selected by the tenderer should require any special alteration or
addition to the architectural or structural work, he must list the requirements
separately.
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-98/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
22.2.35
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
General
AC
USA
USA
USA
FLAKTWOODS
TRANE
CARRIER
EUROCLIMA
VTS CLIMA
YORK
SWEDEN
USA
USA
AUSTRIA
CARRIER
YORK
TRANE
VTS CLIMA
USA
USA
USA
3.
USA
THAILAND
THAILAND
THAILAND
5.
Exhaust Fans
USA
UK
UK
UK
USA
6.
G.I. Sheets
GREEN HECK
FLAKT WOODS
ELTA
XPELAIR
ACME
JAPAN
SOUTH AFRICA
EUROPE
11. Silencers
KMC
ATAI
SAFID
EURO REGISTER
QATAR
KSA
KSA
UAE
ACTION AIR
ATAI
SAFID
EURO REGISTER
ALDES
UK
KSA
KSA
UAE
FRANCE
KMC
ATAI
QATAR
KSA
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
S-22-99/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
SAFID
EURO REGISTER
KSA
UAE
GRINELL
SIKLA
HELTI
USA
GERMANY
GERMANY
15. Valves
NEWMAN HATTERSELY
HOLMES
CRANE
UK
UK
UK
16. Strainers
MUELLER STEAM
NEWMAN HATTERSELY
CRANE
UK
UK
NIPPON STEEL
BRITISH STEEL
SUMITOMO
JAPAN
ARMSTRONG
FLAMCO
SPIRAXSARCO
AFICO
KIMMCO
KSA
KUWAIT
KMC
EUROREGISTER
CIACO
EURO REGISTER
DOHA
BELGIUM
KUWAIT
UAE
TAYLOR
JOHNSON
WEISS
MASON
AMBERBOOTH
KINETICS
USA
USA
USA
MASON
HATTERSELY
KINFLEX
USA
UK
RUBATEX
ARMAFLEX
GULF-O-FLEX
SUPERLON
USA
UK
UAE
USA
DURODYNE
USA
CONTRACT COMPONENTS LTD. UK
YORKSHIRE
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
UK
S-22-100/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 22
WEDNESBURY
MUELLERBRASS
UK
USA
ATAI
THERMAFLEX
SUPAFLEX
28. Adhesive
FOSTER
MIRACLE
IDENDEN
USA
USA
UK
29.
FOSTER
MIRACLE
IDENDEN
USA
USA
UK
Vapour Barriere
USA
GERMANY
UK
UK
GERMANY
UK
FRANCE
UAE
FRANCE
UK
SWEDEN
AEB-740-08 -REV.0
ALFA LAVAL
S-22-101/101
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
SL NO.
TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
23.1.00
23.1.01
Scope of Works
23.1.02
Design Requirements
23.1.03
23.1.04
Regulatory Agencies
23.1.05
Submittals
23.1.06
Coordination
23.2.00
PRODUCTS
23.2.01
General
23.2.02
Piping Products
23.2.03
23.2.04
23.2.05
Landing Valves
23.2.06
Supervisory Devices
23.2.07
System Accessories
23.2.08
23.2.09
23.2.10
23.2.11
Cabinets
23.2.12
23.2.13
Locks
23.2.14
23.2.15
23.2.16
Fire Pumps
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-1/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
23.2.17
23.2.18
23.3.00
EXECUTION
23.3.01
Preparation
23.3.02
Installation
23.3.03
23.3.04
23.3.05
Pre-Commissioning Works
23.3.06
Testing
23.3.07
Painting
23.3.08
23.3.09
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-2/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
It shall be executed as shown on the drawings, and all the equipment and
components shall be approved by the Fire Department of State of Qatar and any
other statutory bodies as required and confirm to the NFPA Standards.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-3/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
23.1.03
23.1.04
REGULATORY AGENCIES
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-4/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
23.1.05
SECTION 23
SUBMITTALS
A. General
Comply with Tender Invitation documents.
Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections
listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and
can be reviewed together.
B. Product Data
Manufacturers specifications
construction, and fabrication.
and
technical
data
including
performance,
C. Shop Drawings
Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction,
specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and
installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated.
1. Submit shop drawings for each complete system or assembly of shop-fabricated,
field-fabricated, and manufactured components.
2. Special requirements:
a. Unless otherwise noted, prepare shop drawings in accordance with
requirements for "Working Plans" as described in NFPA Standard 13.
b. Certify Shop Drawings by a Professional Engineer registered and currently
licensed to practice in the United Arab Emirates.
c. Draw floor plans at 1:100 scale or greater. Submit reproducible copies of all
drawings.
d. Cloud and key with date to indicate areas that have been changed on all resubmittals.
e. Calculations for Hydraulically Designed Systems:
1) Calculations are required for hydraulically designed fire protection
systems.
2) Unless otherwise noted, prepare calculations in accordance with
requirements of "Hydraulic Calculations Procedures" as described in
NFPA Standard 13.
3) Include calculations with submission of Shop Drawings.
D. Quality Control
Field Quality Control submittals as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
a. Document results of test required by authority having jurisdiction, the
Owner's insurance carrier, and listed NFPA Standards.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-5/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
E. Submittal Sequence
1. First, submit reproducible copies of each shop drawing to Architect/Engineer
along with product data and hydraulic calculations.
a. All submittals are to be complete.
b. All shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and product data shall be included
in one submittal.
c. Identify all material.
2. Second, submit two sets of the revised shop drawings to the Owner who will
forward one copy to their insurance carrier for review.
a. Send a copy of transmittal to Architect/Engineer.
b. Make changes to shop drawings after these reviews.
c. Circle changes to indicate areas that have been changed.
3. Submit the final shop drawings with approvals from the approved agencies to the
Architect/Engineer.
F. Alternative Materials
Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid
reasons, with official written apologies from manufacturers for not being able to
supply the requested materials. Only in such cases, the Consultant will consider the
alternatives, before the tender is accepted and the Consultants decision will be final
regarding the matter.
In case the alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance of
the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment,
materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is
fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification, must
be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such
replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but at the Contractors expenses
etc.
23.1.06
COORDINATION
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-6/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-7/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
23.2.00 PRODUCTS
23.2.01 GENERAL
List products by name and manufacturer as listed in UL Fire Protection Equipment
Directory and FM Approval Guide and conform to requirements contained in Contract
Documents.
Material and equipment to be new and currently listed or approved.
Where more than one of any specific item is required, items to be of same type and
manufacturer.
Products to be UL listed, and preferred FM approved as well.
Pipe
All above ground pipe works shall be Galvanized ERW to schedule 40: ASTM
A53 Grade B and underground pipes shall be High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) Class PE 100 as specified hereunder.
Threaded Fittings
Threaded fittings shall be Malleable iron, Class 150 pound: comply with ANSI
B16.3/B1.14.
Pipe Size minimum
Working Pressure
through 1
1 1/4" through 2"
2-1/2" through 3"
4" and 6"
2000 psi
1500 psi
1000 psi
800 psi
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-8/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
Grooved Fittings
1. Grooved fittings shall be cast from ductile iron to ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12 in
hot dipped galvanized.
2. Grooved fittings shall be suitable to rolled grooved pipe.
2. Pressure rating of fittings to exceed twice the maximum system working
pressure.
3.
Fittings to be of same manufacturer as couplings
23.2.03
Design: Provide in this section in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as
referenced by the authority having jurisdiction).
23.2.04
All valves shall be marked with the manufacturers name and the appropriate British
or American standard or shall fully comply with NFPA standards.
All valves to be FM approved and/or UL listed.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-9/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
Valves used as drain valve and valves near jockey pump shall be standard gate
valves. All other valves shall be UL listed, FM approved O.S & Y gate valves.
D. Check Valve
Bronze body with screwed ends. 1 inch through 2 inches.
Listed check valves shall be provided in discharge line of each pump, fire
department connection and at other locations as indicated in the drawing to prevent
reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of cast iron and shall be UL-listed.
Valves shall be swing pattern, metal-to-metal seat and tested to 300-psi hydraulic
pressure.
F. Rubber Face Check Valve: Swing type with flanged ends. 2-1/2 inches through
12 inches.
23.2.05
LANDING VALVES
Landing valves shall be of acceptable to the Fire Brigade use inside buildings. This
device shall have 65mm inlet diameter bore fitted with 65 mm. instantaneous female
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-10/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
23.2.06
SUPERVISORY DEVICES
23.2.07
SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-11/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
B. Pressure Gauges
3-1/2 inch dial marked in 5 pound increments.
1. 1/4 inch NPT.
2. 175 psi working pressure.
Pressure gauges shall be provided on the discharge of the pumps and on wet pipe
sprinkler system riser as shown on the drawing. Each gauge shall not be less than
100 mm dia in dial size and shall comprise of a corrosion resistant housing with glass
window and brass trim. It shall have accuracy within +/-5% of the full-scale deflection
when working at 50 degree C. each gauge shall be provided with a gauge cock. The
pressure gauges shall be calibrated in psi or bars, or both. Each gauge shall have a
range of 0 to 11/2 times the normal working pressure.
C. Automatic Ball Drips: 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT.
D. Insert Sight Glasses: 175 psi working pressure.
E. Downspout Nozzle (express drain outlet)
1. Wall mounted downspout nozzle.
2. Rough bronze finish.
3. Full line size. Terminate at and provide concrete splash block.
23.2.08
The inlet breeching shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm flanged outlet and
four 65 mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains. A nonreturn (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The coupling shall comply with BS 336.
The inlet connections shall be of suitable type of local fire brigade department. The
breaching shall be equipped with a 25 mm drain valve to drain the riser. Valves body
shall be made of DI with polished chrome brass Inlet Valves and Brass/Bronze cap
and chain.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-12/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
23.2.10
SECTION 23
A. General
1. Minimum sprinkler orifice size shall be 1/2 inch.
2. Sprinklers in non-public spaces such as mechanical/electrical equipment, and
storage rooms and sprinklers on exposed piping shall have brass finish unless
noted otherwise.
3. Sprinklers and escutcheons in finished areas to have polished brass or white
finish or finish as noted on plans.
3. Concealed sprinklers shall be installed with the cover plates with a finish
matching with the interiors and to the approval of the architect.
4. Style, size, and temperature rating to be type specifically approved for such use.
5. Thermosensitive glass bulbs to be of all one color for a given temperature
classification.
6. Fusible link sprinkler shall not be acceptable unless the glass bulb sprinkles are
not available for a given application.
B. Upright Sprinklers
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
C. Pendent Sprinklers
1.
2.
3.
4.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-13/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
SECTION 23
G. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet: Wall mounted. Storage capacity of not less than
minimum designated by NFPA 13.
23.2.11
23.2.12
FIRE CABINETS
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-14/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
landing valve, and female coupling for the connection 65 mm chrome plated
adjustable diffuser nozzle. The fire hose shall be placed in the landing valve cabinet
specified above, and shall have minimum working pressure of 15 Bar and bursting
pressure of minimum 45 Bar. The Nozzle shall be Jet/Spray/Shut-off type.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-15/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
door, clear glass or wired glass. The stainless steel cabinets shall be polished finish
type, the finish shall be decided upon the approval of the architect.
The Double fire hose reel cabinet in different locations of the building shall have
following specified fire equipments:
a. Automatic Fire Hose Reel
b. 6 Kg Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher
23.2.13
A zone control valve set shall be UL, FM Approved and it is to be provided for each
sprinkler system zone as shown in the drawings, and shall comprise:
a. Butterfly valve shall have UL 1091. It shall be fitted with factory installed
UL/FM approved tamper switch.
b. Flow alarm switch shall be UL listed and FM approved for the size of the pipe
in which it is installed as a paddle type water flow indicator. Shall be fixed
after the butterfly valve, on the main supply pipe and before any connection is
taken off.
c. Inspector test and drain connections.
d. Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures shall be fitted so
arranged that it can be easily removed for testing and checking without
shutting down the water supply.
23.2.14
LOCKS
Locks shall be of type suitable for the Qatar Fire Department type key. If a non brigade key is used on doorways to control valves, pump rooms, etc. a key shall be
placed in a box with a brigade lock, adjacent to the door.
23.2.15
Supply and install monitoring switches on all sprinkler and hydrant system isolation
valves, to register an alarm if the valves are moved from the fully open position.
The switch, means of actuation and power supply shall be of approved manufacture
and function.
23.2.16
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-16/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
The cylinder shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The temperature shall
range from -20 to 60 C. The extinguisher must have a plastic base (Only for
portable). It must be coated externally by electrostatic polyester powder and oven
baked for corrosion resistance. The cylinder shall be made special cold rolled steel
sheet with Argon/CO2 automatic welding process and the suction tube shall be made
of PVC material. All extinguishers shall carry instructions for operation and
maintenance in English and Arabic. The Fire Extinguisher should have at least been
certified by an independent Certification Organization from International Testing
Laboratories/ Accredited Certification Bodies such as LPCB Approval, BSI KITE
mark or UL listed/FM Approved. The capacity of the ABC dry Powder Fire
Extinguisher shall be 6 KG and shall have a minimum fire rating of 34 A & 183 B as
per BS EN3.
FIRE BLANKETS
Provide fire blankets in Kitchens. Fire blanket shall be good quality with silicon
coating provided on both sides. The size shall be 4 Feet x 6 feet.
The Fire Blanket shall be LPCB approved as well as QCD approved.
23.2.17
FIRE PUMPS
A. GENERAL
Each system shall be design to insure the maximum pumping capacity even if one of
the main pumps fails. The total supplying of all the necessary equipment for the
firewater production (including pumps, engines driven, controllers, instrumentation,
piping, valves, relief valves,) is included in the Contractors scope of work. The
supplying and installation of the day fuel tank of the engines is included in the
Contractors scope. The fuel tank (and all the fuel installation) shall be in accordance
with NFPA standards. The air supply system of the diesel engines drive (automatic
opening, venting panels,) is included in the Contractors scope. The fire pumps,
motor, engine and electric pump controllers and diesel pump controllers shall be UL
listed or FM approved and suitable for sprinklered fire pumproom. An undertaking to
this effect shall be submitted to the supervising engineer. Unit responsibility must
be submitted from the manufacturer.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-17/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
The engine driven fire pumps shall be in accordance with NPFA 20 (curves, starting,
protection, etc.) The problem of surge (hammer effect) shall be taken into account in
the design. A surge analysis shall be conducted and specific surge pressure control
system shall be installed.
Over-pressure system shall also be installed. The
contractor shall provide fully certified hydraulic calculations for exact sizing of the
pumps. The pumps shall be furnished with a full set of bench test certificates
proving acceptability for the design points for this installation.
B. FIRE PUMPS
Fire pumps shall be UL or FM approved. Each pump shall have a capacity as shown
in pump schedule, adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations.
The pumping unit or package shall meet all requirements complying with NFPA 20
The pumps shall also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of
not less than 65% of rated pressure. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 140% of
the rated pressure at rated capacity.
D. PUMP CONSTRUCTION
The pump construction shall be cast iron casing, Bronze impeller, Stainless Steel
shaft and gland packing.
Note: The pump shall also deliver not less than 150 % of the rated capacity at a
pressure of not less than 65 % of the rated pressure. The shut off pressure shall not
exceed 140 % of the rated pressure at rated capacity.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-18/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-19/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-20/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
J. FUEL SYSTEM
A suitable fuel system for the diesel engine shall be furnished. It must be in
accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No.20 and shall include above surface day storage
tank, flexible hose connectors, combination vent, flesh arrestor and fill cap.
K. SILENCER (MUFFLER)
The silencer shall be for turbo-charged engines, sized and selected to accommodate
the allowable pressure drop of the engine.
The silencer shall provide an average attenuation of 20-25 Db (a).
The silencer shall be designed by HEAVY DUTY APPLICATIONS, with noise
attenuation across the entire audible range of the frequency spectrum 63 through
8000 Hz. The silencer shall consist of a series of chambers connected by nonresonant tubes. The entire silencer shall be manufactured from plate steel and be of
a completely welded design. The heavy plate ensure longer silencer life and better
resistance to damage. The heavy plate shall prevent shell radiated noise. There
shall be no spot welds or press fits used.
Silencer inlet and discharge shall be flanged, manufactured from minimum 10mm
thick plate and drilled to ANSI 70 kg. Silencers shall be either and in/end out and
side in/end out configurations to suit installation.
Provide 12mm drain connections. Prior to shipping, the silencers shall be thoroughly
cleaned and coated in a high temperature 650C aluminum paint.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-21/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
Pressure recorder (7 day drive ) shall be provided within the control panel.
Fire Pump Controller shall be a diesel engine type, Controller approved and listed by
the Underwriters Laboratories for fire pump service, carry the labels of both UL/FM
and meet the requirements of the NFPA20.
The controller shall incorporate the following:
1. Each charger shall be completely independent of the other charger and
equipped with its own individual power transformer, rated for a maximum
continuous charge current of 10A. The charger shall be of solid state
electronic design, with semi-conductor type rectifier, and include the following
supervisory and safety features :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
In case of battery failure, the charger shall initiate an alarm and provide a
signal to prevent the use of the defective battery during the start attempt
cycle.
2. Relays : All relays shall be equipped with manual test buttons, status ON
OFF indicators, be of the plug in type and shall meet all voltage and current
requirements.
Remote Alarm Circuit: A total of five (5) standard alarm contacts, rated at 10
A, 125 V shall be provided and wired to the field terminal block, to indicate
the following engine conditions:
a. SPDT contact : Engine Running
b. 1 N/O contact : Contact shall close when main switch in Auto-position
c. 1 N/O contact : Contract shall close when main switch is in OFF or
Manual position.
d. SPDT contact : Engine trouble. This shall be a common alarm contact
indicating the following conditions. Engine over speed, engine fail to
start, low oil pressure, high coolant temperature.
3. Description of Operation: A four positions main switch shall provide selection
of three starting method and one OFF position.
OFF position shall shut down engine and alarms under any condition.
AUTO position : a water pressure switch mounted inside the controller shall
provide the engine start on water pressure drop. The automatic starting circuit
shall alternate the two storage batteries after each start attempt. The attempt to
start cycle shall consist of six cranks and five rest periods of 15 seconds
duration. In the event of one battery failure, the starting cycle shall lock itself to
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-22/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
the remaining battery. In case of engine failure, the controller shall stop any
further cranking and energize the ENGINE FAIL TO START alarm. A manual
stop pushbutton shall enable engine shut down, but only after all starting causes
have returned to normal. The automatic Weekly Exercise cycle shall also be
operational in the auto-position. This cycle shall be programmed on the 7 day
time clock. A short opening of the water solenoid valve shall create a momentary
pressure drop and cause automatic engine start. At the end of the programmed
Exercise cycle, engine shall shut down automatically. A manual test switch
located on the time clock shall allow for manual test operation of the weekly
exercise cycle. The 7 day time clock shall hold its time on A/C power failure and
not require resetting.
TEST Position : Engine shall start in the same manner as the above exercise
cycle start. Turning main switch to Auto or Off position shall shut down engine.
MANUAL Position : Start pushbutton Battery 1 or Battery 2, shall override all
automatic starting circuits, and allow for direct manual engine start.
Safety Shut Down : Engine overspeed condition shall shut down engine without
time delay and lock out until manually reset.
The controller shall provide the following additional safety features Engine shut
down in case of low oil pressure or high coolant temperature during exercise, test
or optional AC failure operation only.
M. JOCKEY PUMP
The Jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the pump schedule
on the drawings.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-23/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-24/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-25/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
23.02.18
SECTION 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire detection system.
B. Control and supervision systems.
C. NOVEC 1230 storage and distribution suppression system.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300.
B. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt-welding Fittings.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
D. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings.
E. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
F. ANSI/ASME SEC 8 - Pressure Vessels.
G. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
H. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Specifications for Brazing Filler Metal.
I. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
J. ANSI/NFPA 2001 NOVEC 1230 Fire Extinguishing Systems.
K. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
L. ANSI/NFPA 72A - Local Protective Signaling Systems.
M. ANSI/NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors.
N. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type-C Elastic Element.
O. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
P. ASTM A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
Q. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-26/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
R. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
S. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
T. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
U. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
V. FS GG-G-76 - Gauges, Pressure and Vacuum, Dial Indicating (for Air,
Steam, Oil, Water, Ammonia, Chloro- fluorohydrocarbon Gases, and
Compressed Gases).
W. MIL-M-12218 X. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
Y. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
Z. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire and Protection Services.
AA.UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
1.4
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide sufficient amount of NOVEC 1230 liquid to convert into NOVEC 1230
vapor. Consider the following when computing volume:
1. Volume of hazard area.
2. Specific volume of NOVEC 1230 vapor.
3. Additional quantities of NOVEC 1230 required to compensate for
openings, pipe losses, and nitrogen dilution.
4. Forced ventilation, fan coast downtime and damper actuation time.
5. Mechanical smoke control system.
6. Other special conditions affecting extinguishing efficiency.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-27/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
B. Locate NOVEC 1230 supply and backup supply in each hazard area.
C. Interface system with building fire alarm system, smoke control system &
emergency power off system, etc as per the Code and QCD requirements.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.6
SUBMITTALS
1.7
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-28/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
1.8
SECTION 23
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing of products specified in
this Section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum ten years documented experience approved by manufacturer, who
maintains a UL listed NOVEC 1230 recharging station and is capable of
providing replacement charge within 24 hours.
C. Design system using a UL, ULC, LPC or FM approved calculation method under
direct supervision of a Professional Engineer:
1. Experienced in design of this work.
2. Licensed at the place where the Project is located.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-29/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
B. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/NFPA 72A code for electrical wiring and
wiring devices.
C. Provide certification of inspection approval of NOVEC 1230 fire protection system
by authority having jurisdiction.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for replacement NOVEC 1230
Include
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-30/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
2.2
SECTION 23
2.3
A. Single action control: Molded surface housing fitted with "pull down" lever which
locks in position after releasing spring-loaded contact switch.
B. Double action control: Molded surface housing fitted with "push in" tab and "pull
down" lever which locks in position after releasing spring-loaded contact switch.
C. Labeling: Locate engraved label adjacent to each manual pull station, indicating
area protected, and that actuation will cause Halon discharge.
2.4
IONIZATION DETECTORS
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-31/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
2.5
PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS
2.6
DISCHARGE NOZZLES
2.7
A. Cylinders: Standard model and size for ease of replacement and addition.
Design, fabricate, certify, and stamp cylinders in accordance with ANSI/ASME
SEC 8.
B. Contents: Fill cylinders with required NOVEC 1230. Pressurize with dry nitrogen
to 500 PSIG (3447 KPa) plus or minus 5 percent total pressure at 70 degrees F.
C. Identification: Permanent plate, specifying agent, tare and gross weight, pounds
of NOVEC 1230 and pressurization level; installed so plate is visible and
readable.
D. Safety Release: Equip cylinders with frangible disc safety device.
E. Cylinder Valves: Heavy duty forged brass, incorporating safety release pressure
operated manual control, solenoid discharge valve, and pressure gauge. Provide
solenoid pilot valves for each cylinder or bank of cylinders.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-32/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
F. Manifold: Provide for systems with more than one cylinder, with rack to secure
each cylinder and check valves between each cylinder discharge and manifold.
2.8
CONTROL CABINET
AEB-740-08-REV.00
Power On
System Trouble
Battery Trouble
Circuit 1 Trouble
Circuit 2 Trouble
Ground Fault
Release trouble
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Green
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
S-23-33/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.9
Alarm Circuit 1
Alarm Circuit 2
Agent Release
Alarm Silence
Battery Polarity
Abort Trouble
Alarm Output Trouble
Supervisory Trouble
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Red
Red
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
:Amber
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Alarm Bells: Low voltage to allow supervision of circuit wiring, of modular design,
with minimum sound level of 88 db at 10 ft (3 meters).
B. Alarm Horns: Low voltage to allow supervision of circuit wiring, with minimum
sound level of 90 db at 10 feet (3 meters)
2.10
OPERATING SEQUENCE
unless system
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-34/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
J. In rooms with suspended ceiling tiles, clip or retain tiles within 4 foot (1.2 m)
radius of the nozzles to prevent lifting during discharge.
K. Install wiring in accordance with Section [16120] & [16180] requirements.
L. Make final connections between equipment and system wiring under direct
supervision of factory trained representative of manufacturer.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-35/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
3.3
TESTING
Record
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-36/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
3.4
SECTION 23
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
23.02.19
The Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System shall be in accordance with NFPA 2010.
The aerosol extinguishing Agent must not be pressurized and must not be toxic;
supportive documentation mandatory. The extinguishing agent must not cause
excessive cooling to avoid damage to components and must be suitable for Class A,
B, C and F Fire as per EN2 Classification. The extinguishing agent must not be
pyrotechnic; supportive documentation mandatory and must be of a stable media,
and have no physical and/or chemical changes in temperatures of over 275 deg C.
The extinguishing agent must extinguish fire chemically. The extinguishing agent
must be environmentally friendly, ecologically friendly, and SNAP Listed (Significant
New Alternative Policy) as per EPA; supportive documentation is mandatory. The
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-37/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
atmospheric Life Time should be negligible and the global Warming Potential shall
be zero. The ozone depletion potential shall also be zero. The extinguishing agent
shall be non-Corrosive for electronic components. The aerosol system shall not use
the pressure piping & valves. The extinguishing system must be versatile, and
suitable for possible future extension and/or additional room protection. The
manufacturer of the aerosol extinguishing system shall be ISO 9001 & ISO 14000
Certified. It should have the International Certification, and should be in accordance
with the NFPA Standards and relevant Test Reports shall be produced. It should
have approval such as UL/ULC, KIWA, BSI, ANPI, LPC, etc.
The submittal shall include Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS, installation reference
list for similar applications and for any other relevant installations. The manufacturer
should have at least 10 years relevant industry experience. The Certified Life Time of
Extinguishing Agent not less than 15 years. The extinguishing agent discharge Time
shall be in the range of 5 10 sec. The agent shall be suitable for the operating in
the ambient temperature range of (minus) -50 C to (plus) 150 deg C and should be
Suitable for humidity level of up to 98%.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-38/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
23.3.00
EXECUTION
23.3.01
PREPARATION
23.3.02
INSTALLATION
C. Pipe Supports
Install hangers in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as referenced by the
authority having jurisdiction). All pipe hangers bolts, nuts, washers and other
hardware to be hot dipped galvanized construction for use at the cooling towers. All
outdoor piping to be hot dipped galvanized construction with all threads coated to
prevent corrosion from outdoor elements.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-39/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
E. Drains
Provide drainage facilities as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F. Control Valves
1. Bolt position on lugged butterfly valves to allow removal of downstream piping.
2. Globe or ball valves to be used as shutoff valves for:
a. Water piping systems.
b. Drain valves.
c. Test valves.
I. Alarms
Install electric alarms as follows:
a. Above fire department Siamese connection or as indicated on plans.
b. No less than 2.5 meters above finished grade.
c. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.
J. Supervisory Devices
1. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.
2. Provide supervisor (tamper) switch for each control valve.
3. Provide water flow switch for each wet pipe system and where otherwise
indicated.
a. Locate minimum distance recommended from change in flow direction.
b. Field adjust for proper flow retard.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-40/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
N. Sprinklers
1.
2.
3.
4.
O. Cabinets
Mount cabinets at elevation indicated on architectural drawings.
P. Signs
Provide permanent signs to identify:
a. Drains.
b. Test connections.
c. Shut-off valves.
d. Risers supplying hydraulically designed systems.
e. Each alarm.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-41/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
23.3.03
SECTION 23
A. Arrange, conduct, and document all performance and acceptance tests required
by the applicable NFPA Standards and the authority having jurisdiction.
1. Give sufficient advance notice of time of test (2 week minimum).
2. Test must be witnessed by:
a. Owner's fire department and maintenance representative.
b. Architect/Engineer representative.
c. Authorized inspector.
d. Owner's insurance representative.
3. Deficiencies to be corrected at no additional cost to owner.
4. Use new pipe and fittings as necessary to correct leaks.
5. Temporary repairs of leaks not acceptable.
6. Repair water damage caused by leaks or test procedures.
B. Conduct tests prior to:
1. Painting.
2. Covering.
3. Concealing in any way.
C. Pressure test control valves as follows:
1. While under full system pressure.
2. Open and close each valve.
3. Demonstrate proper operation to owner.
D. Test drain valves and test valves as follows:
1. Open to full flow for two minutes.
2. Close to test for tightness.
23.3.05
PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS
Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-42/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable
racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be
supplied by the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components
are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could be
damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the consultant.
23.3.06
TESTING
All paperwork and the whole installation shall be hydraulic pressure tested to twice
the normal working pressure or 16.0 bars whichever is greater. The Pressure shall
be maintained for a period of not less than 24 hours, and the drop in pressure
recorded, and the drop in pressure shall be within the specified limits and as per the
relevance British standards.
Any equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure test shall be adequately protected
from the system during the tests.
All leaks are to be immediately repaired and the installations re-tested until the above
requirements are obtained.
All the required tests are to be performed before application of the paint and valve
adjustments made with the pumps in operation.
The Consultants decision will be final and binding the contractor.
23.3.07
PAINTING
All pipe works for the fire fighting services shall be given one coat of rich primer and
two coats of Post office Red paint after installation and pressure testing.
23.3.08
All items of Fire Protection Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and
as per the requirements of the Fire Department.
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-43/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
23.3.09
SECTION 23
MANUFACTURER
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
THORN NORSEN
MOYNE
NOHA
NAFFCO
UK
IRELAND
NORWAY
UAE
2. Sprinkler Heads
RELIABLE
TYCO
GRINNEL
GLOBE
USA
USA
USA
USA
3. Control Valves
KIDDE
GLOBE
GRINNEL
VICTAULIC
UK
USA
USA
USA
4. Landing Valve
ANGUS
GIACOMINI
TYCO
MOYNE
UK
ITALY
USA
IRELAND
5. Fire Extinguisher
CHUBB
NAFFCO
ANGUS
MOYNE
UK
UK
UK
IRELAND
SURYA
ECONOSTO
PACIFIC
SHILED
INDIA
EUROPE
THAILAND
UK
CRANE
SHIELD
NIPPON
ECONOSTO
UK
UK
JAPAN
EUROPE
VICTAULIC
GRINNEL
CENTRAL
SHIELD
TYCO
USA
USA
USA
UK
USA
9. Support System
HELTI
SIKLA
WEICCO
PHD
GERMANY / USA
GERMANY/ USA
INDIA
COLOMBIA
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-44/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
SECTION 23
CHEMETRON
SEVO
TYCO
USA
USA
USA
NAFFCO
MOYNE
CHUBB
UAE
IRELAND
USA
ITT
AURORA
PATTERSON
PEERLESS
USA
USA
USA
USA
AEB-740-08-REV.00
S-23-45/45
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION